Home

Palm TUNGSTEN T2 Handbook

image

Contents

1. OQ a a N ge 07 1 a o ja Locating front panel controls Speaker vt Headphone jack Microphone Screen Voice Memo application button Graffiti 2 writing area To Do List LS Date Address Application buttons Book Book 11 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld Navigator Application buttons Headphone jack Speaker Microphone Screen Graffiti 2 writing area Locating top panel components Indicator light Enables you to select and display records on your handheld screen See Using the navigator later in this chapter for additional information and look for tips throughout this handbook Activates the individual handheld applications that correspond to the icons on the buttons Date Book Address Book To Do List Note Pad and Voice Memo See Buttons Preferences in Chapter 22 for details on reassigning these buttons to activate any application on your handheld Enables you to connect a standard 3 5mm stereo headset sold separately to your handheld for use with audio applications Enables you to listen to alarms voice memos and game sounds on your handheld Serves as an audio input device for applications such as Voice Memo Displays the applications and information stored in your handheld It is touch sensitive and it responds to the stylus The area where you write letters and numbers usi
2. Exit PBI 3 From the HotSync Manager menu select Setup 4 Click the Network tab and make sure your user name has a checkmark next to it If the checkmark is not there click the check box next to your user name General Local Modem Network Checked users make this their Primary PC for performing a Network HotSync operation 373 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 5 Click OK 6 Put your handheld in the cradle cable and perform a HotSync operation The HotSync operation records network information about your computer on your handheld With this information your handheld can locate your computer when you perform a HotSync operation over the network To prepare your handheld for a network HotSyne operation 1 Tap the Home icon O 2 Select the HotSync icon 3 Tap the Menu icon 4 Select Modem Sync Prefs on the Options menu 5 Tap Network Modem Sync Preferences E 6 Tap OK 7 Tap Select Service Welcome Modem D Tap here NOTE See Network Preferences in Chapter 22 for information on creating a network or Bluetooth connection 374 Using File Link 8 Tap Service and select a service Preferences Network Tap here 9 Tap Done 10 Tap the Menu icon O 11 Select Conduit Setup on the Options menu For instructions see Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation earlier in this chapter Perf
3. NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application 466 Product Regulatory Information FCC Statement This device complies with part 15 of the FCC rules Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation NOTE This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct th
4. 3 Select the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you perform a HotSync operation otherwise the account cannot be synchronized 4 Click the Mail Client pick list and select the desktop e mail application you will use to synchronize the selected account with your handheld For each application additional setup information is displayed in the Setup Notes box See the following table for additional setup information for each client TIP If your e mail application is compatible with Extended MAPI try Microsoft Exchange 5 0 or later as a choice for the Mail Client option If your e mail application is compatible with Simple MAPI SMAPI try Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail Client option Although Netscape uses SMAPI Netscape is not supported Optional If prompted enter profile and password information for the client you selected IMPORTANT You must select the synchronize check box and select a mail client in order to synchronize the account between your desktop and your handheld Mail Client Action Microsoft Select a MAPI profile to access the mail server The conduit Exchange 5 0or displays any existing MAPI profiles in the list Enter your later password for Exchange Microsoft Select the MAPI profile to access the mail server The conduit Outlook 97 or checks for any existing MAPI profiles and displays them in the later list Enter your password for Outlook See Configuring
5. A tone sounds to indicate that recording has started Business Voice Memo Business Voice Memo Recording 00 00 00 08 Se e o C m 00 00 22 23 00 00 22 23 max time max time E e Record Face your handheld and begin speaking Tap Pause to stop recording A tone sounds to indicate that recording has paused NOTE If you use other applications on your handheld while pausing the recording press and release the Voice Memo application button to resume recording later Voice Memo Business Recording paused _ Recording status 00 09 EL 00 00 22 23 max time Tap Record A tone sounds to indicate that recording has restarted Tap Stop A tone sounds to indicate that recording has stopped Optional Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title Tap Done 310 Creating a voice memo Storing voice memos on an expansion card You can conserve storage space on your handheld or create voice memos for others by storing your voice memos on an expansion card Voice Memo enables you to store specific voice memos on an expansion card or to configure your handheld to always store voice memos on an expansion card when one is present Keep in mind that when you store voice memos on an expansion card they do not appear in the Voice Memo portion of Palm Desktop software after a HotSync operation and are not backed up So
6. High speed wireless data networks provide an always on network connectivity and high speed wireless data transmission To connect to a high speed wireless data network you must have a GSM mobile phone the correct driver for your phone a subscription to high speed wireless data network services with your mobile phone carrier and the correct high speed wireless data network settings for your carrier 400 Setting Communication Preferences TIP You can also create a connection with a GSM phone using the Phone Link application We recommend using Phone Link to create phone connections See Chapter 14 for details Use the steps described in these sections only if you are unable to create a connection with Phone Link To create a Bluetooth to LAN connection 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Connection 2 Tap New Preferences Edit Connection il Available Connections Name Custom IR to a PC Handheld IR to E RS20rm Connect to Modem Serial to E R520m BT to E R520m Via Cradle Cable IR to E T39m Serial to E T39m BT toE T39m Dialing TouchTone IR to Nokia6210 Serial to Nokia6210 New Eat Delete Volume v Low Tap here 3 Enter a name for the connection such as BT to LAN 4 Tap the Connect to pick list and select Local Network 5 Tap the Via pick list and select Bluetooth 6 Make sure the network access point is ready to accept a Bluetooth connection
7. If you have a slower or more expensive Internet connection you can enable three settings that can help reduce your access costs To change connection settings 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap General 4 Tap the check box next to the following options to enable or disable that option Ask before You re notified each time before you access the Internet connecting Offer old content if Old pages from cache are displayed instead of new alli versions being retrieved from the Internet even if the old pages are outdated A dialog box is displayed to inform you when the page you are viewing is old Disconnect on Exit Your handheld disconnects from the Internet when you exit Web Browser Pro By default these options are disabled that is there are no checks in the check boxes 5 Tap OK Changing Network Preferences Web Browser Pro includes many options you can use to change the way in which you access the network To change Network Preferences 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Network Network O Always connect using Service Roam LAN 340 Customizing Web Browser Pro 3 Change one or more of the following settings Always connect using Check if you always want to use the same ISP to connect to the Internet Service Select the ISP you want to use to connect to the Internet 4 Tap Done Changing the host server Your handheld
8. Send With Bluetooth 4 Select Bluetooth and tap OK Sending data using e mail or SMS communication In addition to beaming data you can also use e mail or SMS communication to send information to and receive information from other devices To use your handheld for e mail communication you need to perform a HotSync operation with your computer use a Bluetooth local area network LAN access point or modem or use a mobile phone For more information see Chapter 17 To use your handheld for SMS communication you need a Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phone sold separately and you need to establish a connection with your GSM mobile phone For additional information about connecting to your GSM phone see Chapter 14 For additional information about sending SMS data see Chapter 15 Using your computer keyboard If you have a lot of data to enter or prefer to use the computer keyboard you can use Palm Desktop software or any supported personal information manager PIM such as Microsoft Outlook to enter information You can then perform a HotSync operation to synchronize the information on your computer with the information on your handheld Many of the applications that came with your handheld are also available in Palm Desktop software and in most PIMs so you don t need to learn different applications For more information on entering data on your computer refer to the online Help in Palm Desktop software
9. The Record menu is the same when you re viewing the Note Pad list and an individual note The Options menu differs depending on whether you re viewing the Note Pad list or an individual note Record menu GET KIT Beam Category Send Category Compatibilit Note Pad list Send Category Send Note Compatibility Options menus Font Note Pad list Preferences Details About Note Pad Options Preferences Security About Note Pad Record BeamNote B Send Note Compatibilit Note screen Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected note to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Displays the Compatibility dialog box where you can choose to beam notes to a previous version of Note Pad Record Edit RSs O F R H About Note Pad Note screen Displays the Note Pad Preferences dialog box where you define the pen and paper color the sort order for notes and the alarm sound Displays the Note Details dialog box where you assign a category and privacy option for a note Shows version information for Note Pad 136 Using Palm Photos Palm Photos enables you to view and manage photos on yo
10. Beam Item Send Item Beam Category Send Categor Send Item Send Category About To Do List Cece Edit Options Record Edit Ss O About To Do List Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected item to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Shows version information for To Do List 176 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software With Palm VersaMail personal e mail software you can send receive and manage e mail on your handheld This chapter describes how to set up different types of e mail accounts and explains how to use the many e mail features in the VersaMail application The VersaMail application version 2 5 is the newest offering in the line of Palm personal e mail software applications Formerly known as MultiMail software the VersaMail 2 5 application contains new features that make sending and receiving e mail messages and managing e mail accounts easier than ever Palm VersaMail personal e mail software features Key features of the VersaMail 2 5 application include the following Support for the Palm Tungsten T2 navigator simplifying data entry and navigation Support for the built i
11. CHES Weston First name Michelle Title Company Example Inc v Work 555 6338 v Home v Fax v Other v E mail Done Tap Done TIP To create an entry that always appears at the top of the Address list begin the Last name or Company field with a symbol as in If Found Call This entry can contain contact information in case you lose your handheld TIP To attach a note to an entry and work with attached notes see Attaching notes in Chapter 4 Selecting types of phone numbers You can select the types of phone numbers or e mail addresses that you associate with an Address Book entry Any changes you make apply only to the current entry To select other types of phone numbers in an entry 1 Tap the entry that you want to change 2 Tap Edit 79 Chapter 5 Using Address Book 3 Tap the pick list next to the label you want to change Address Edit Business Business CHES Weston First name Michelle Title gt Company Example Inc v Work 555 6338 v Home v Fax v Other v E mail fee triangle Address Edit Last name Weston First name Michelle Title serie Example Inc lt 555 6338 Wi 4 Select a new label Changing Address Entry details The Address Entry Details dialog box provides a variety of options that you can associate with an entry To open the Address Entry Details dialog box 1 Tap the entry whose de
12. Causes files attached to e mail to be automatically downloaded to your handheld Attachments that exceed the maximum message size cannot be downloaded See Working with attachments earlier in this chapter for more information Enables you to retrieve messages in HTML format or in plain text format If you choose HTML any messages sent to you in HTML format will be displayed with basic HTML formatting intact Other messages will be displayed as plain text If you choose Plain Text all messages will be displayed as plain text regardless of the format in which they were sent Default setting is HTML See Working with URLs earlier in this chapter for more information on receiving e mail in HTML format Enables you to attach a default signature to all your outgoing messages See Attaching a personal signature earlier in this chapter for more information Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message You can add or update an e mail address in the Address Book directly from the body of a received e mail message To add a new Address Book entry 1 On the Message screen tap the Menu icon O tap Options and then select Add to Address Book Cat Oy O GoToBottom Q Add To Address Book 258 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop A dialog box appears with the From address displayed If a Display Name exists for this Address Book entry the Last name and First
13. FlashCard 36K Graffiti 2 24K ScreenShot 24K 6 Tap Delete 7 Tap Yes 8 Tap Done Removing Palm Desktop software If you no longer want to use Palm Desktop software you can remove it from your computer This process removes only the application files The data in your Users folder remains untouched 75 Chapter 4 Working with Applications IMPORTANT If you remove Palm Desktop software you also remove the HotSync Manager synchronization software and can no longer synchronize with your computer If you want to synchronize data with another personal information manager PIM you need to install HotSync Manager from the Desktop Software CD ROM after you remove Palm Desktop software During the installation select the Custom option and then choose to install only HotSync Manager NOTE You may need to modify the steps shown here to accommodate the version of the operating system installed on your computer To remove Palm Desktop software from a Windows computer 1 From the Windows Start menu select Settings and then click Control Panel 2 Double click the Add Remove Programs icon 3 Click the Change or Remove Programs button 4 Select Palm Desktop 5 Click Change Remove This process removes only the application files The data in your Users folder remains untouched 6 Click Yes in the Confirm File Deletion box 7 Click OK 8 Click Close To remove Palm Desktop software from a Mac computer
14. Preferences Security Details About Voice Memo n Preferences R Security About Voice Memo Rt Edit Options New V Memo JN Delete V Memo D Beam V Memo B Send V Memo V Memo screen Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send the category You can send the category using Bluetooth communication SMS or the VersaMail application Opens a dialog box where you can choose how to send the voice memo You can send the voice memo using Bluetooth communication SMS or the VersaMail application VMemo Edit AA About Voice Memo V Memo screen Displays the Voice Memo Preferences dialog box where you define the sort order for voice memos the alarm sound deletion confirmation setting and whether to automatically store voice memos on an expansion card if one is present Displays the Change Security dialog box where you set a privacy option for all voice memos Displays the V Memo Details dialog box where you assign a category and privacy option for a voice memo Shows version information for Voice Memo 315 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo 316 Using Web Browser Pro IMPORTANT To use Web Pro browser you must first install the application from the Software Essentials CD S Palm Web Browser Pro allows you to view and save Internet web pages Use Web Browser Pro to do the following m Open a web page m Return to a web page you ve re
15. Previous Next week o week BOG EEL Ll Tap to select a day of the current week Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous day 97 Chapter 8 Using Date Book Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current day Tap Go To at the bottom of the screen to open the Go to Date dialog box Select a date by tapping a year month and day in the calendar Previous year Next year Go to Date Lian Feb Mar fpr Moy in _TaP to select a ME Fug Sep oct Nov Dec Mont Tap to select a day Tap to select current date 2 After you locate the date follow the steps for scheduling an event for the current day To schedule an untimed event 1 Select the date that you want for the event 2 Tap New 3 Tap No Time so that no start or end times are defined for the new event Set Time Start Time End Time No Time 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 3 9 TIP You can also create a new untimed event by making sure no event is selected and then writing letters in the Graffiti 2 writing area 98 Selecting an event 4 Enter a description of the event TEJA 4ML New jul 25 02 4r 8 00 untimed g t Ee E I NNE AAEE EEEE event 10 00 TE A TA ee T ee 2 00 3 00 me srnmnnmnnnnnnnnnnmnnnmnnnnnn No time selected 6 00 5 Tap a blank area on the screen to deselect the untimed event If you create an
16. in Chapter 22 to learn about creating ShortCuts To use a ShortCut draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters The ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCut mode ShortCut A Your handheld includes the predefined Graffiti 2 ShortCuts shown in the following table Entry Shortcut Date Stamp ds Time stamp ts Date time stamp dts Meeting me Breakfast br Lunch lu Dinner di 32 Beaming data Full screen writing area When Writing Area Preferences are turned on and active you do not have to write in the Graffiti 2 writing area You can write letters anywhere on the left side of the screen or write numbers anywhere on the right side of the screen Capital letters are formed in the middle of the screen straddling the imaginary dividing line between the left and right sides When Writing Area Preferences are turned off or inactive you must write character strokes in the Graffiti 2 writing area for your handheld to recognize them To use the full screen writing area 1 Turn on Writing Area Preferences See Writing Area Preferences in Chapter 22 for details 2 Open the application in which you want to use the full screen writing area A shaded box appears in the lower right corner of the screen 3 Position the cursor where you want the characters to appear 4 Do any of the following Write lowercase Graffiti 2 letters anywhere on t
17. 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen of an IMAP e mail account tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options CTE Accounts Preferences Display Options Fer a ARETE EA Auto Get Mail Filters Sync IMAP Folders Disc 3 Select Sync IMAP Folders 4 Select the folders you want to synchronize from the pick list either by tapping the folder name or by using the navigator as follows Button Action Select If no folder is selected the Select button highlights the first visible folder on the list If a folder is selected the Select button toggles the check box between selected and deselected Up or Down If a folder is selected use Up and Down to scroll up or down one folder on the list If no folder is selected use Up and Down to scroll up or down one page Left If a folder is selected deselects the folder No function if no folder is selected Right No function A connection is made to your e mail service provider to update the server with changes from your handheld and to have your handheld updated with changes from the server 301 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL Secure Sockets Layer SSL is a protocol designed to ensure that data you receive from a network or the Internet is secure and authentic The VersaMail application uses SSL to help guarantee the secure transmission of e mail messages that you receive When you set u
18. 1 Place the cursor where you want the text pasted 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Tap Edit and then tap Paste To paste text in another application 1 Open the application 2 Place the cursor where you want the text pasted 3 Use the paste option in the application For example in Address Book tap the Menu icon tap Edit and then tap Paste 326 Communicating with other users To undo a Paste action Doone of the following In Web Browser Pro tap the Menu icon O tap Edit and then tap Undo Inother applications if available choose the undo option in the application For example in Address Book tap the Menu icon tap Edit and then tap Undo Communicating with other users Web Browser Pro allows you to communicate with other users in several ways m Use a mailto link in a web page to compose and send e mail m Beam a URL to another Web Browser Pro user a E mail a URL to another user Sending e mail Some web pages include mailto links You can use these links to send e mail to others if you use the VersaMail application or another application that supports this functionality For more information on the VersaMail application see Chapter 17 To send e mail 1 Tap a mailto link in a web page The e mail application opens and a new e mail message is created The message is already addressed to the mailto address and the subject line may be filled out for you as well 2 Compose
19. 2 Click the Programs tab 3 Select Outlook Express as the default e mail program 4 Click OK TIP You can also make Outlook Express the default e mail handler within the e mail application From the Tools menu select Options Click the General tab and then click Make Default Configuring Eudora If you are using Eudora as your e mail application you must set up MAPI in Eudora 273 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To set up MAPI in Eudora 1 From the Eudora Tools menu select Options 2 Do one of the following If Eudora is the only e mail application that you use select Always as the MAPI setting Ifyou use more than one e mail application select When Eudora is running as the MAPI setting 3 Ensure that your username and password are set up correctly within Eudora This information is needed to log in to Eudora to retrieve and synchronize your e mail IMPORTANT Eudora must be running in order for you to perform a HotSync operation The VersaMail application synchronizes with your Dominant Personality in Eudora 5 1 or later Converting attached files You can use attachment conversion plug ins to convert attached files that you are receiving DataViz Documents To Go plug ins enable you to convert attachments using HotSync operations With Documents To Go you can view create and edit Word Excel and PowerPoint attachments on your handheld DataViz Documents T
20. Cancel Opens a dialog box that asks if you want to save the message in the Draft category Tap Yes to keep your changes and return the message to the Draft category Tap No to discard your changes and return the message to the Draft category Adding a signature to a message A signature is text that appears at the end of a message You can define your own personal signature and then add it to a message using menu commands To define a signature 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences SMS Preferences ti Sort by Date O Show Date O Alert Sound Alarm M Confirm Deleted Message M Delete After Transfer Signature 165 Chapter 15 Using SMS 3 Enter your signature NOTE Try to keep your signature brief If a message including your signature exceeds 160 characters it is split into multiple messages When the recipient receives the message it is reassembled into a single message provided the recipient s SMS software supports assembling multi part messages 4 Tap OK To add your signature to a message 1 Create or edit the message where you want to add your signature 2 From the New or Edit Message view tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Options and then tap Add signature Sending data from another application In addition to creating text messages you can create a message that contains data from an application on your handheld For example you can send a Date Book event t
21. Disconnect on Exit Types ahead and completes a recognized e mail address See the procedure for creating new e mail later in this chapter for more information Determines how often e mail messages in the trash are automatically deleted See Emptying the trash later in this chapter for more information Sets the number of seconds to try to connect before timing out This value can be any number greater than 0 seconds however if you set the number too low your connection attempt may time out before you make a connection with the e mail service provider The default setting is 45 seconds To change tap the Timeout field and enter a new value Automatically disconnects your remote connections after each command Each command you perform initiates a new call to your ISP This setting is not recommended if you plan to perform multiple e mail transactions in a short amount of time Disconnects the connection to your e mail service provider only after you leave the VersaMail application This feature is an alternative to Auto Disconnect This option keeps your connection active while you perform multiple transactions in the VersaMail application but automatically disconnects when you move on to a different application on your handheld If this option is not selected you must manually disconnect from your ISP 295 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Modem Wait Displays the number of sec
22. Due Date w No Date Private 0O Setting a due date You can associate a due date with any To Do List item You can also sort the items based on their due dates To set a due date for a To Do List item 1 In the Details dialog box tap No Date to open the Due Date pick list To Do Item Details Priority BJ 2 3 4 5 Category w Unfiled Due Date w No Date Tap here Private O 2 Tap the date that you want to assign the item Today Assigns the current date Tomorrow Assigns tomorrow s date One week later Assigns the date exactly one week from the current date No Date Removes the due date from the item Choose date Opens the date selector where you can choose any date that you want for the item 3 Tap OK TIP If you turn on the Show Due Dates option in the To Do Preferences dialog box you can tap directly on the due date in the To Do List to open the pick list shown in step 2 174 Changing To Do List item details Setting To Do Preferences The To Do Preferences dialog box enables you to control the appearance of To Do List and To Do items in Date Book Agenda view To change the Preferences settings 1 In To Do List tap Show To Do Preferences i Sortby w Priority Due Date W Show Completed Items O Show Only Due Items O Record Completion Date O Show Due Dates Y Show Priorities O Show Categories 2 Select any of the following settings ShowCompleted Displays your complete
23. Handbook for Palm Tungsten T2 Handheld Copyright 1998 2003 Palm Inc All rights reserved Graffiti HotSync MultiMail PalmModem Palm OS and the Palm logo are registered trademarks of Palm Inc Palm Palm Powered Tungsten and VersaMail are trademarks of Palm Inc Palm Inc uses the Bluetooth trademark under express license from Bluetooth SIG Inc U S A All other brands are trademarks of or registered trademarks of their respective owners Disclaimer and Limitation of Liability Palm Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss resulting from the use of this handbook Palm assumes no responsibility for any loss or claims by third parties which may arise through the use of this software Palm Inc assumes no responsibility for any damage or loss caused by deletion of data as a result of malfunction dead battery or repairs Be sure to make backup copies of all important data on other media to protect against data loss IMPORTANT Please read the End User Software License Agreement with this product before using the accompanying software program s Using any part of the software indicates that you accept the terms of the End User Software License Agreement PN 407 5253A IE POWERED Contents About THIS BOOK 614s eset as C6ns eaeau ad Fue See RENE eRe RR Se eee eee 1 Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Palm Tungsten T2 Handheld 3 System FEVUIMCINENES 2510S ive tads ests NE E S E E E EN e vee ee
24. See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands Options menu Display Options Alarm Preferences R About World Clock Display Options Opens a dialog box where you can choose which information appears on the World Clock screen Show Multiple Locations Activates the secondary location displays When it is selected the secondary locations appear below the primary location Date Activates the date display When it is selected the date appears below the time for each location Alarm Sound Sets the sound of the alarm The choices are Alarm Preferences Bumble Bee Reveille Sonata Wake Up and Warbler Volume Defines how loud the alarm sounds The choices are Low Medium and High About World Shows version information for World Clock Clock 350 Performing HotSync Operations HotSync technology enables you to synchronize data between one or more Palm OS handhelds and Palm Desktop software or another personal information manager PIM such as Microsoft Outlook To synchronize data you must connect your handheld and your computer either directly or indirectly Direct methods include placing your handheld in the cradle cable attached to your computer using infrared communications or using a Bluetooth connection Indirect methods include using a modem or network HotSync technology Selecting HotSync setup options You can choose when HotSync Manager will run If
25. The files in this list willbe installed on To add files to this list either drag To fnd other third party applications your handheld device the next time and drop them onto this window or and fils for yourhandhe ki device you perform a Hot9yne operation click the Add button check out our web site at http Awwwpaln com 73 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 5 Click Add To List From Add on lca 3 Add on gt Giraffe pre uit Manage HARDBALL PRC l Holiday Files MINEHUNT PRC x HotSync Manag PUZZLE PRC To Palm Desktop L3 Palm OS Updates alr p Assistant Tutorial Go to Add to Favorites Cancel Add File If the file you want to install is not listed in the dialog box go to the folder to which you copied the file Most handheld application files have the extension PRC or PDB 6 Select the application s you want to install 7 Click Add File to add the selected application to the Install Handheld Files list TIP You can also drag files or folders of files to the list in the Install Handheld Files dialog box The files are copied to the Files To Install folder 8 If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing click Change Destination in the Install Handheld Files window and then use the arrows to move applications between your handheld and an expansion card Handheld SecureDigital SD Card Giraffe pre HARDBALL PRC MI
26. icons 217 236 leaving mail on server 185 193 199 287 managing mail settings 283 marking read and unread 256 257 maximum message size 186 193 200 notification options 213 personal signature 237 258 preferences 257 258 reading 206 475 Index replying to 238 240 Secure Sockets Layer 302 send retry 234 sending 233 signature adding 188 195 202 storing in Outbox 233 trash 254 URLs in messages 241 viewing attachments 241 245 E mail account advanced preferences 294 APOP setting 288 auto get mail 209 before setting up 180 changing e mail address 286 changing mail server settings 287 changing protocol type 284 changing username and password 284 checking for new messages 206 207 color selection 223 corporate 181 creating a synchronize only account 189 196 creating new 182 186 192 194 default mail service 204 205 285 deleting accounts 203 204 display options 220 displaying Inbox 206 editing 202 203 editing accounts 196 291 font selection 222 incoming and outgoing server 184 191 198 managing mail settings 283 notification option 212 outgoing mail server 289 password 184 191 197 problems with 206 synchronization options 261 264 synchronizing 260 276 277 troubleshooting 206 username 184 191 197 Emptying the History list 334 Enabling autofill 337 cookies 337 JavaScript 338 Encrypting data 438 439 Entering data 23 40 importing from other applications 37 40 problems with 452 using Note
27. 1 Tap Get Mail If you have e mail stored in your Outbox tap Get amp Send 2 In the Get Mail dialog box tap Subjects Only to download subjects only or tap Messages to download entire messages Get Mail Options i Subjects Only TIP You can turn off the Get Mail dialog box in VersaMail Preferences See Setting preferences for getting and deleting e mail later in this chapter 207 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Optional Tap Details and select options for retrieving unread e mail downloading attachments using filters auto disconnect maximum download size and default connection type for this account Tap OK NOTE See Creating mail filters later in this chapter for more information about filters See Setting advanced account preferences later in this chapter for information on the auto disconnect feature See Selecting a different service for a given e mail account earlier in this chapter for information on setting a default connection type Optional For IMAP accounts you have the option of synchronizing IMAP folders from the Get Mail dialog See Wireless IMAP folder synchronization later in this chapter for information Details i Get unread mail ONLY Download Attachments Use Filters O Auto Disconnect Max Message Size 5 KB O Always connect using NOTE The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default Tap OK
28. 21 22 23 28 29 30 Tap here to select date 5 Tap the year month and date you want the alarm to sound After you tap the date the Set Alarm dialog box reappears 6 Tap the Time box 134 Setting an alarm for a note 7 Tap the hour and minute columns to select the time you want the alarm to occur Set Alarm Tap here to select minutes Tap here to select hour 8 Tap OK 9 When the alarm goes off and the reminder message appears onscreen do one of the following Tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen An attention indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm and the reminder message appears again in five minutes When the reminder message reappears the current time appears in the Reminder bar and the note title appears on the screen Ifyou did not title the note the time the note was created appears on the screen Tap Go To to open Note Pad Note Pad will open and display the note associated with the alarm 9 35pm Reminder flowers p April 135 Chapter 12 Using Note Pad Using Note Pad menus Note Pad menus are shown here for your reference and Note Pad features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands
29. 362 Conducting IR HotSync operations NOTE If your cradle cable is connected to a USB port you can continue using the cradle cable while HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication If your cradle cable is connected to a serial port you cannot use your HotSync cradle cable again until you reconfigure the HotSync Manager to communicate with the port defined for cradle cable synchronization To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Mac computer 1 Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder 2 In the HotSync Controls tab select Enabled 3 Click the Connection Settings tab 4 Select the On check box next to IR port f eo HotSync Software Setup HotSync Controls f Connection Settings Connection l Settings 2 Internal Modem Internal Modem nknown gt modem IR Port IR Port As fast as possible lt PalmConnect PalmConnect aaaay lt i uss USB Shown with Mac OS X 5 Close the HotSync Software Setup window Performing an IR HotSync operation After you complete the steps to prepare for performing an IR HotSync operation it s easy to perform the actual operation To perform an IR HotSyne operation 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select the HotSync icon 3 Tap Local 4 Tap the pick list below the HotSync icon and select IR to a PC Handheld 5 Position the IR port of your handheld within a couple of inches of the infrar
30. 398 nmasking records 435 nread mail 185 193 199 287 nread messages marking 256 nresponsive handheld 452 ntimed events 96 98 99 101 pgrading a MultiMail database 178 RL beaming 327 changing home page 335 definition 318 e mailing 328 entering in Palm Web Browser Pro 320 Entry field 318 321 in e mail messages 241 truncated 324 USB cradle cable 352 354 363 364 398 port 4 5 363 364 398 troubleshooting 454 455 456 464 User cache enabling disabling 397 User name for ISP 405 identifying handheld 424 User profiles HotSync 376 378 Username 184 191 197 changing 284 editing in account 196 entering 284 synchronizing existing 178 4 4 4 ccocccccoco 4 c V vCal 38 39 vCard 38 39 Vendor for Expense item 122 VersaMail icons 217 236 launching from Palm Web Browser Pro 327 problems with 463 setting preferences for 257 Vibrate alarm 214 387 Video files 69 72 Visiting bookmarked web pages 329 web pages 320 Voice Memo alarms 313 314 creating voice memos 308 311 listening to voice memos 312 313 menus 315 opening 307 overview 307 reviewing voice memos 312 W Web address See URL Web Browser Pro preferences 334 341 Web page displaying old content 324 340 list of visited 333 refreshing 324 returning to 322 saving 331 viewing information about 324 Week Date Book view 104 105 383 453 Wireless LAN access point locations 410 modem 296 World Clock adding locations 347 348 alarm 349
31. Add attachment Undoes last action icon appears in command bar only if you have previously performed one of the actions above or any of the cut copy paste functions described below Cuts selected text Copies selected text Pastes selected text See Chapter 3 for more information on the command bar 297 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software E mail header details When viewing a message in any folder you can change the view of the message header The e mail header options are as follows m Short header Shows sender s name or address From field and subject line Subj field Short header shows sender name and message subject only d 6of6 gt From Joe Sadusky T lt joe jmswordsmith com gt Subj Fw cool site s5s53 Original Message From Joe Sadusky lt jms510 hotmail com gt To lt joe jmswordsmith com gt Sent Monday November 18 2002 10 37 AM Full header Shows the following Tap header icon to switch to full header Sender s name or e mail address From field Subject line Subj field Date message was composed sent or received Date field Size of message including any attachments Size field Recipient s name or e mail address To field inbox lt 1of6 P Tap header icon to switch to Full header shows sender subject date size and recipient information From Angela
32. Attachments 250 Getting sending and managing e mail The selected file appears in the Attachments box Attachments i From v Files on Card Type v AllfFiles Attachments 8 Repeat steps 6 and 7 for each attachment you want to add and then tap Done TIP To delete an attachment from an e mail message tap the attached file in the Attachments box and then tap Delete 9 Tap Send or Outbox Forwarding an attachment You can include an attachment on any message you forward up to the maximum message size To forward a message with an attachment 1 Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e mail 2 Tap the e mail message to display it 3 Tap the Forward button 4 Tap the word To On the Recipient List screen enter or look up the recipient address See the procedure for creating e mail earlier in this chapter for more information on addressing messages 5 Follow the procedure for attaching files presented earlier in this chapter Deleting messages You can delete one or more e mail messages from any folder For example you can delete old messages in the Inbox or messages that you were working on in the Drafts folder When you delete a message it is placed in the Trash folder See Emptying the trash later in this chapter To delete messages on the server when you empty the trash on your handheld you can select the Delete Msgs on Server setting in VersaMail Prefer
33. Encrypt data associated with these applications Address Book O Calculator O Card Info O Clock_PcLK X Date Book O DocsToGo 8 If you want to encrypt only private records select Encrypt private records only 9 Tap the Encryption type pick list and select a type Security Options Options w Encryption X Encrypt data when locked Choose Applications M Encrypt private records only Encryption type 128 bit Blowfish 128 bit MDC C 128 bit RSA RC4 N 10 Tap OK li Select encryption type 439 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Using security shortcuts You can create shortcuts to activate certain security features such as locking the handheld or masking private records For information on using shortcuts see Graffiti 2 ShortCuts in Chapter 3 To create and activate security shortcuts 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Options and then select Security Options 4 Tap the Options pick list and select Shortcuts 5 Tap the check box for the security shortcut you want to activate Security Options i Options w Shortcuts Tap to select shortcut X Lock handheld Select character to change O Mask privat ds ask private records the shortcut key O Hide private records O Show private records 6 If you want to change the current character tap and drag the stylus to select the charact
34. From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Do one of the following Tap here 2 Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Mask Records Preferences Security Password Mask Records i Records marked Private in the details dialog will be masked or covered for your protection Ifa password is assigned you must enter it to show private records 3 Tap OK to confirm that you want to mask private records Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Show Private Records Ifyou do not have a password hidden and masked records become visible If you have a password the Show Private Records dialog box appears Go to step 3 Preferences Security Password Auto Lock Handheld Curran Deivwar l nwnl Mask Private Records Hide Private Records Done Automatic Help AGEe Tap here 4 Tap Done 3 Enter your password and then tap OK Show PrivateRecords Enter your password to show private records 434 Setting Personal Preferences To unmask individual records 1 2 3 4 Select a masked record Do one of the following If you do not have a password a masked record becomes visible Ifyou havea password the Show Private Records dialog box appears Go to step 3 Enter your password Tap OK To make a record private 1 2 3 4 Display the entry that you want
35. Optional If you are retrieving mail using a VPN connection you may be asked to enter the username and password you use to log in to the VPN If so enter the username and password See VPNs earlier in this chapter for more information The Getting Messages dialog box shows updates as your e mail is downloaded When the Getting Messages dialog box disappears another dialog box appears and displays the number of new e mail messages Finished 1 new message Tap OK 208 Getting sending and managing e mail A list of your e mail appears in the Inbox Shows unread total messages Speakeas 3 22 v Inbox M Joe Sadusky 12 10p 7 out of office tomorrow Stra ae M Angela Yee 12 09p Displays the time for Died ES WOENET AM messages received today a message or o S Travis Washingt 12 08p 4 these are f nn and the date for all other subject has been y messades downloaded and M Joe Sadusky 12 07p g hether th f lunch meeting today DEEDES Are o MZ Micki Hickox 11 41a any attachments FW Revised Instructions for U v en Display Auto get mail with notification You can set up the VersaMail application to automatically search for new mail on a regular schedule for a given e mail account The auto get mail feature automatically retrieves new messages and downloads them to your handheld without needing to tap Get Mail CAUTION Your handheld must be connected to an
36. Optional Tap the Auto play check box to automatically play the voice memo when the alarm goes off 9 Tap OK 10 When the alarm goes off and the reminder message appears onscreen do one of the following Tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen An attention indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm and the reminder message appears again in five minutes When the reminder message reappears the current time appears in the Reminder bar and the voice memo title appears on the screen If you did not title the voice memo the time the voice memo was created appears on the screen Tap Go To to open Voice Memo Voice Memo opens and displays the voice memo associated with the alarm Wait a moment for the voice memo to begin playback or tap Play 5 05pm Reminder gt meeting minutes 314 Using Voice Memo menus Using Voice Memo menus Voice Memo menus are shown here for your reference and Voice Memo features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here The Voice Memos and Options menus differ depending on whether you re displaying the Voice Memo list or an individual voice memo V Memo menus V Memo KYST Beam Category Send Categor Voice Memo list Send Category Send V Memo Options menus Font Voice Memo list
37. POP only IMAP Server Folders Root Folder O Deleted Mail Trash O Sent Mail Sent Defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers respectively If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Retrieves incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection See Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL later in this chapter for information on SSL Leaves e mail that you receive on the handheld on the server also Encrypts your username and password when traveling over the network Some services require APOP to work properly while others do not work properly if APOP is used If you aren t sure if your ISP or web e mail provider supports APOP check with your e mail provider See Adding APOP to an account later in this chapter 288 Going beyond the basics eer IMAP Defines the root mailbox on your IMAP server only Deleted Mail Stores deleted e mail in the folder you specify on the server IMAP only This field is case sensitive so spell the folder name exactly as it is on the server For example if your Deleted Mail folder is called Trash on the server you must enter Trash in this space Sent Mail IMAP Shows the name of your Sent Mail folder on the server This only field is case sensitive and the folder name should be spelled exactly as it is on the server If you are using the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit and have an IMAP account
38. Synchronize the files Synchronize the files Synchronize the files Synchronize the files Synchronize the files Synchronize the files B fles 6 VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky oesau z lf ls gt Attachment Conversion 5 Select one of the following Synchronize Select this option to include active accounts in the next Active Accounts HotSync operation For an account to be synchronized you must have selected the option Check this box to synchronize this mail account when you perform a HotSync operation Do Nothing Select this option to exclude e mail accounts from the next HotSync operation 6 Optional Select Set Selection As Default to apply the options you selected to all subsequent HotSync operations Otherwise the settings apply to the next HotSync operation only 7 Click OK 8 Perform a HotSync operation 277 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Synchronizing multiple accounts You can synchronize more than one account during the same HotSync operation NOTE If you want to synchronize both a Microsoft Outlook and a Microsoft Outlook Express account you must have Microsoft Outlook set as the default e mail client on the desktop The maximum number of accounts you can synchronize are as follows m 1Simple MAPI account for example an account set up using Outlook Express or Eudora m 1 Extended MAPI account for example an account set up
39. Tap the sign in button Enter Go and so forth on the web page to gain access to the password protected information MSN Hotmail MR ee AFA www hotmail com Go Sen eee Already have a Hotmail account Sign In Name T i Password Forgot Your Password Problems Signing In d 325 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Copying and pasting text Copying text Pasting text You ll often find text on web pages in web page fields and in dialog boxes that you d like to copy and use elsewhere in Web Browser Pro or in another application To copy text select the text and use the options from the Edit menu Note that none of the Edit options copy images only text Cut Removes the selected text from a field in a web page or dialog box and stores it temporarily in the memory of your handheld If you select text on a web page rather than in a field Cut functions just like Copy Copy Copies selected text from a field or web page and stores it temporarily in the memory of your handheld Select All If the cursor is in a URL input or text field selects all the text in the field If the cursor is not in a field selects all the text on the web page To undo the last Cut Copy or Select All action m Select Undo from the Edit menu Once you ve copied text you can paste that text in a web page field dialog box or another application To paste text in a web page field or dialog box
40. account and its messages is released Selecting a different service for a given e mail account When you set up connections on your handheld using the Phone Link application on your handheld you pair each connection with a network service and then select one of these services to be the default for all network activity sending and receiving e mail surfing the web and so on on your handheld By default the VersaMail application uses this service for sending and receiving messages for all e mail accounts you set up See Chapter 22 for information on setting up the default service for your handheld However for any given e mail account you have the option of switching to a different service for use with that account only For example the default service you have selected for your handheld may be called My Bluetooth and may use your handheld s built in Bluetooth radio to make a connection to your corporate mail server However for your Earthlink account you may want to switch to the service called Earthlink which uses an external modem accessory sold separately to make a connection to your e mail service provider To set up a service for a given e mail account different from the default service for your handheld 1 From the Inbox of the account you want to switch tap Get Mail 0 0 Inbox New 204 Setting up and managing e mail accounts 2 Tap Details Get Mail Options i Subjects Only 3 Tap
41. sign 2 Click Account Information VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options Handheld Settings 268 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop 3 If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld the account information will already be entered If not enter the following NOTE You do not need to fill in these fields if the account is a synchronize only account and the mail client is not Direct POP or Direct IMAP Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith E mail Address Enter the e mail address of the account you are accessing such as examplename yahoo com Username Enter the username you use to access your e mail This is generally the part of your e mail address appearing before the symbol it is usually not your entire e mail address Password Enter the password for this account 4 Under Handheld Settings click Server Settings VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky x File Help Joe Sadusky J Dt E3 g VersaMail Business Sam Yahoo Sam IMAP Sam Syne The Server Settings form is used to change your incoming POP or IMAP server as well as your SMTP d server for your Palm handheld mail account These settings are also used for direct POP and IMAP Speakeasy connections through the conduit Mail Client Sync Setu
42. visited 322 visiting bookmarked web pages 330 Netscape 262 Network connecting 179 410 entering ISP information 411 HotSync operation 372 375 idle timeout 414 login scripts 416 418 password 406 phone settings 407 preferences 403 420 prerequisites for connecting in VersaMail 180 primary DNS 414 secondary DNS 414 selecting connection 407 selecting service 404 user name 405 Network preferences in Web Browser Pro 340 main handheld preferences 403 420 Non GSM phones connecting 402 403 Note Pad alarm 134 copying notes into other applications 131 entering data 40 menus 136 opening 131 overview 131 reviewing notes 133 Notes attaching to records 65 Notification option Palm com account 213 Numbers decimal point and thousands separator 383 Graffiti 2 writing 28 onscreen keyboard 18 23 0 Old messages deleting 251 Old web page content viewing if available 340 Onscreen keyboard 23 52 319 pen stroke to open 422 Opening Address Book 77 applications 41 bookmarked web pages 329 Calculator 87 Date Book 95 Dialer 111 Expense 119 137 HotSync Manager 351 Memo Pad 127 Note Pad 131 Palm Photos 137 Phone Link 150 saved web pages 331 SMS 159 To Do List 171 VersaMail 178 Voice Memo 307 Web Browser Pro 317 World Clock 343 344 Organizer Lotus PIM 38 Outbox 163 228 storing e mail 233 synchronizing 266 Outgoing server settings 184 191 198 289 Outlook connecting to 455 Overlapping events 1
43. you must configure the outgoing mail settings to send mail To set outgoing mail server SMTP settings 1 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 2 Tap the Options pick list and select Outgoing Mail Mail Servers i Incoming Mail Your Name CENE Advanced Outgoing O Reply To Hddress O BCC Outgoing Msgs to 3 Enter any of the following Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply To Address Enter the e mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e mail messages only if it is different from the e mail address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look like the e mail came from the address you entered 289 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e mail message you send to another e mail address The blind copy e mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your desktop e mail account enter that e mail address Mail Servers i Options v Outgoing Mail Your Name for display only Sam Yahoo O Reply To Address O BCC Outgoing Msgs to 4 Tap OK To
44. 0 01 hours ago Would you like to view the old content Tap Yes to view the stored version or force the latest content to be downloaded by tapping Update Content Viewing information about a web page Because of the limited space on the handheld screen sometimes the current web address URL gets truncated To find the full URL name and size of the current web page open the Web Page Info dialog box To view information about the current web page 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Page Info in the Page menu Web Page Info Name Google Size 4998 Bytes URL http www google com 3 Tap OK 324 Using passwords Using passwords Some web sites require that you use a password to gain access to information Passwords in Web Browser Pro work in a slightly different way from those in typical desktop browsers To enter a password 1 Open the web page where you must enter the password The password field contains the word Unassigned MSN Hotmail BR eee za www hotmail com Go a ee a Already have a Hotmail account Si P hotmail com Password Forgot Your Password Problems Signing In 4 b Enter your sign in name in the appropriate field Tap the password field Password A Enter password l Enter your password and tap OK NOTE Your password is visible only when you enter it The password field now contains the word Assigned
45. 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 4 Tap the Account pick list and then tap Edit Accounts Mail Servers i Account v FEMRE Sam IMAP Sam Sync All e mail accounts Username Speakeasy appear in the list Edit Accounts Protocol Password O Always connect using 5 Tap the name of the account whose settings you want to manage and then tap OK To change the protocol type 1 In the Server Settings screen tap the Protocol pick list and then tap POP or IMAP Mail Servers i Account v Sam Yahoo MAP Username Password O Always connect using 2 Tap OK To change your username or password 1 In the Server Settings screen enter a new username Your username is typically the first part of your e mail address which appears before the symbol Mail Servers Account v Sam Yahoo Protocol v POP Username SamYahoo Password O Always connect using 284 Going beyond the basics 2 Tap the Password box and enter anew password in the Password Entry dialog box The VersaMail 2 5 application provides strong encryption for your password 3 Tap OK To set a default service for this account different from the default service for your handheld 1 In the Server Settings screen tap the Always Connect Using check box Mail Servers i Account v Sam Yahoo Protocol v POP Username SamYahoo Password f Tap to change the service i
46. 338 Disconnecting amodem 295 from the Internet 319 Discovery and connection process 391 defined 391 enabling disabling the user cache 397 DNS 414 Documents To Go converting attachments 274 276 Domain name system See DNS Double booked events 107 Download message size 186 193 200 Downloading e mail attachments 217 files all types 322 messages from phone 161 stopping 323 Drafts creating inSMS 164 creating in VersaMail 228 saving in VersaMail 233 236 Dragging memos into other applications 127 stylus to activate features 422 using the stylus 17 Editing bookmarks 330 records 51 52 saved web pages 332 E mail adding Address Book entry from e mail 258 259 adding attachments 247 249 addresses in Address Book 79 addressing 230 alert for new mail 213 attaching files 207 attachments 241 251 backing up databases 299 beeping for new e mail 212 buzzing or blinking for new mail 214 color selection 223 composing 233 copying and pasting text 296 creating new messages 229 233 days to synchronize 265 deleting messages on handheld 251 254 deleting messages on server 289 display options 220 downloading large attachments 245 247 drafts 236 e mailing URLs 328 emptying trash 254 255 filters for 279 280 folder on server 289 font selection 222 forwarding 237 238 forwarding attachments 251 getting entire message 207 getting on desktop 261 264 getting subject only 207 header details 298 HTML 241
47. 4 14 GAC l Breakfast Tap here Bus Business Meals Car Rental Dinner Entertainment Fax Gas Gifts Hotel Ren eS TIP Another quick way to create a new Expense item is to make sure that no Expense item is selected in the Expense list write the first letter s of the expense type and then write the numerical amount of the Expense item This technique takes advantage of the automatic fill feature See Options menu later in this chapter for details TIP To attach a note to an entry and work with attached notes see Attaching notes in Chapter 4 120 Adding expense items Changing the date of an Expense item Initially Expense items appear with the date on which you enter them You can change the date associated with any Expense item To change the date of an Expense item 1 Tap the Expense item you want to change 2 Tap the date of the selected item 4 14 Taxi 4714 Lunch 4 14 Hotel 4 14 Car Rental Tap date 3 Tap the new date Entering receipt details 4 2002 gt ion Feb Mor Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec i S 7 8 9 10 11 GED is i6 17 18 21 22 23 24 25 28 29 30 Expense provides a variety of options that you can associate with an item These options appear in the Receipt Details dialog box To open the Receipt Details dialog box 1 Tap the Expense item to which you want to assign details 2 Tap Details Recei
48. 454 461 recharging handheld 464 tapping and writing 452 using applications 453 454 using Bluetooth 461 462 using passwords 465 using VersaMail 463 Profile e mail 264 HotSync user profile 376 Protocol changing type 284 Proxy server changing 341 Punctuation marks Graffiti 2 writing 28 onscreen keyboard 23 Purging records 54 See also Deleting Push e mail 215 Query applications downloading 322 Quick Connect 81 83 Quick Install 69 73 R Range of times in Day view 109 Read messages marking 256 Reading e mail 206 218 Receipts recording in Expense 121 Receiving data See Beaming information Receiving messages in SMS 161 Recharging the battery 385 Records beaming 33 35 choosing categories 55 creating 50 Date Book 96 defined 50 deleting 52 102 displaying a category of 56 editing 51 52 Expense 120 fonts 66 hiding private 426 433 lost 453 masking private 426 Memo Pad 127 notes for 65 number of 465 private 433 435 purging 54 sending 37 sorting 63 64 To Do List 172 unmasking individual 435 Refreshing a web page 324 Reminder lists 67 Reminders screen types of reminders 215 using 215 viewing 215 Removing applications 75 bookmarks 330 Desktop software 75 saved web pages 333 Renaming bookmarks 330 categories 57 saved web pages 332 Repeating events deleting from Date Book 53 scheduling 101 Replying to e mail 238 Rescheduling events 99 483 Index Resetting hand
49. Card from the Card menu 5 Tap OK 92 Managing expansion cards Managing expansion cards m When writing data to an expansion card wait for your handheld to complete the operation before removing the card from the slot This prevents data corruption or accidental damage to the expansion card m You can install applications to an expansion card after performing an initial HotSync operation See Installing files and add on applications in Chapter 4 for information For optimal performance we recommend that you do not install more than fifty applications to a single expansion card m Reading and writing information on an expansion card uses more battery power than performing the same task on your handheld If you have ample storage space on your handheld consider copying the information to your handheld NOTE You must store and access MP3 files from an expansion card m When your handheld s battery level becomes very low access to the expansion card may be disabled to protect your data If this occurs recharge your handheld as soon as possible Using Card Info menus Card menu The Card Info menu is shown here for your reference and Card Info features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands Rename Card ZR Format Card zF Help H About Card Info Help Provides help text About Card
50. Click the HotSync Controls tab and select any of the following options f 80 HotSync Software Setup x f HotSync Controls Connection Settings q Status O HotSync Enabled Disabled HotSync software is enabled To disable the HotSync software click the Disabed radio button above Listening on USB and PaknConnect gt HotSync Options F Enable HotSync software at system startup D E Show more detail in HotSync Log Shown with Mac OS X HotSync Enabled Disabled Enable HotSync software at system startup Show more detail in HotSync Log Activates the transport monitor and prepares your Mac computer to synchronize with your handheld By default the transport monitor is enabled listen on USB and PalmConnect whenever you start your computer If you are using Mac OS 9 1 and the optional serial HotSync cradle cable and you use the same serial port for other devices besides the HotSync cradle cable disable the transport monitor and then enable it manually only when you connect the cradle cable to perform a HotSync operation Activates the transport monitor automatically each time you start your computer If this option is not selected you must open HotSync Manager and select the Enabled option before you can perform a HotSync operation Includes more troubleshooting information in the log that is generated when you perform a HotSync operation 353 Chapter 21 P
51. Connect on the Record menu 4 Select the method you want to use to connect Quick Connect initiates the related task For example if you tap a phone number Quick Connect sends the selected phone number to your mobile phone To configure Quick Connect settings 1 From the Quick Connect dialog box tap Settings Quick Connect Settings Arthur Manzi O Number Prefix Work 415555 7775 Dial Phone Dialer SMS None Available Fax None Available EMail None Available Map None Available 2 Optional Tap the Number Prefix check box and enter a prefix For example to dial 1 before all phone numbers select this check box and enter a 1 in this field The prefix is not added to a number that begins with the character 3 Tap each of the pick lists and select the application you want to associate with that task 4 Tap OK Tap to Connect With Tap to Connect you can select an entry and initiate a related task by tapping it with the stylus By default Tap to Connect is not enabled To enable Tap to Connect 1 From the Address list tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Option and then select Preferences 3 Tap Enable Tap to Connect 4 Tap OK 82 Creating an Address Book entry TIP You can also configure which application opens when you tap a specific Address record field and whether to add a prefix to all phone numbers See Quick Connect earlier in this chapter to
52. Done Saving pages If you want to save a page such as a travel itinerary or Internet order receipt indefinitely you can create a saved page A saved page is a copy of the page The copy is stored on the handheld until you delete it NOTE By default Web Browser Pro only has a certain amount of memory allocated to storing saved pages To increase or decrease the amount of memory allocated see Changing the size and content of the cache Saving a page To save a web page 1 Open the web page you want to save 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Tap Save Page in the Page menu Save Page 4 Optional Change the page name or category 5 Tap Save Opening a saved page When you open a saved page remember that you re seeing a copy of the actual page To view the current version of the web page enter the URL of the page again To open a saved page 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap View Saved Pages in the Page menu Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro 3 Tap the name of the saved page you want to open Saved Pages Shows when you saved the page _______If you saved it today it shows the time If you saved it before today it shows the date 4 Tap Go Editing information about a saved page You can edit the name of a saved page and change its category To edit information about a saved page 1 2 3 Tap the Menu icon Tap View Saved Pages in the Page menu Tap the name of the sav
53. Forwarding e mail 237 Frequently asked questions application problems 453 beaming and sending problems 461 HotSync problems 454 operating problems 451 password problems 465 phone connection problems 462 recharging problems 464 software installation problems 450 tapping and writing problems 452 VersaMail problems 463 Frozen handheld 452 G Games 387 General preferences 214 380 388 alarm LED 387 alarm sounds 387 alarm vibrate 387 Date amp Time 381 382 Digitizer 382 Formats 382 383 Graffiti 2 384 opening 380 Power 384 386 Sounds amp Alerts 386 388 system sounds 387 Writing Area 388 Getting e mail checking for new messages 207 Glossary See Graffiti 2 ShortCuts GPRS network connecting to 403 413 GPRS defined 400 loss of network connection 413 sending an INIT string 412 413 service limitations 413 Graffiti 2 accented characters 30 alphabet 24 27 basic concepts 24 capital letters 28 Command stroke 49 how to write characters 25 menu commands 49 numbers 28 online Help 52 422 preferences 384 problems using 452 punctuation marks 28 ShortCuts for entering data 32 440 442 symbols 30 tips 26 writing area 12 25 Graphics pick list 336 GSM phones accessing the Internet 411 and GPRS networks 400 connecting with 401 402 entering passkey 152 462 requirement for SMS 159 H Handheld alarm 214 blinking 214 buzzing 214 increasing space on your handheld 16 vibrating 214 477 Index Hard reset 445 45
54. HotSync operations are faster 4 Tap OK 299 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Wireless IMAP folder synchronization If you create an IMAP folder in an account on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server you can wirelessly synchronize e mail messages that you move into or out of the IMAP folder or delete in the folder When you synchronize a folder any e mail messages in the selected folder on the mail server will be downloaded to the same folder on your handheld Any messages moved out of the selected folder on your handheld or deleted on your handheld will be moved or deleted in the folder on the mail server Depending on how you have set up IMAP folders on your handheld and or the mail server you may have to perform some steps before you can wirelessly synchronize e mail messages between your handheld and the server as follows m Ifyou need to create a folder on both your handheld and the server see Creating and editing mail folders earlier in this chapter Be sure to select the Also create on server check box as described in that section After creating the folders continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders m Ifthere is a folder on the mail server but you need to create it on your handheld see Creating and editing mail folders earlier in this chapter You do not need to select the Also create on server check box as described in that sec
55. How do you want to connect between your handheld and phone Select a phone to connect to Manufacturer Ericsson Via Bluetooth Model v T68 Tap Next Tap the Via pick list and select the method you want to use to connect Bluetooth Infrared or Cable The Via pick list options will vary based on the phone model Tap Next If you selected Infrared or Cable in step 8 skip to Configuring network service settings for your phone later in this chapter If you selected Bluetooth in step 8 complete the steps in the procedure that follows 151 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link To configure Bluetooth settings for your phone connection 1 Place your phone into the mode where it can accept Bluetooth pairing from another device See the documentation that came with your phone for details Wait for your handheld to discover your phone When your handheld discovers a Bluetooth phone it displays a screen similar to the screen that follows Discovery Results Select a phone and tap Next T68 Bluetooth Progress Searching for Bluetooth devices Select your phone from the list If your phone doesn t appear on the list tap Find More and select your phone s name when it appears on the list Tap Next Your handheld connects to your phone When prompted to create a trusted connection tap Next Enter a passkey for this connection on your phone and then tap OK A passkey
56. Info Shows version information for Card Info 93 Chapter 7 Using Card Info 94 Using Date Book Date Book enables you to quickly and easily schedule appointments or any kind of activity associated with a time and date Use Date Book to do the following a Display an agenda showing appointments untimed events and your To Do items for the day m Enter a description of your appointment and assign it to a specific time and date m Display a chart of your appointments for an entire week The Week View makes it easy to spot available times and potential scheduling overlaps or conflicts m Display a monthly calendar to quickly spot days where you have morning lunch or afternoon appointments m Set an alarm to notify you of the scheduled activity m Create reminders for events that are based on a particular date rather than on time of day Birthdays and anniversaries are easy to track with your handheld m Attach notes to individual events for a description or clarification of the entry in your Date Book To open Date Book m Press the Date Book application button on the front panel of your handheld Date Book opens to today s schedule aa OG OO a Date Book button TIP Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the Day Week Month and Agenda views When you open Date Book the screen shows the current date and a list of times for a normal business day 95 C
57. Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap Advanced 4 In the Accept cookies check box do one of the following To not store cookies tap to remove the checkmark To accept cookies tap to select it 5 Tap OK Enabling or disabling JavaScript Web Browser Pro supports JavaScript code on web pages JavaScript is often used on web pages for interactive content NOTE Some JavaScript implementations are not supported such as mouse rollovers and form validation To enable or disable JavaScript 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap Advanced 4 In the Enable JavaScript check box do one of the following To disable JavaScript tap to remove the checkmark To enable JavaScript tap to select it 5 Tap OK 338 Customizing Web Browser Pro Changing the size and content of the cache The cache in Web Browser Pro consists of web pages that are stored so you can view them again without accessing the Internet By default this cache is saved thereby saving the content you ve viewed even when you exit Web Browser Pro Pages that you explicitly save are also stored in the cache although they are not deleted when the cache is cleared You must delete saved pages separately to clear that portion of the cache See Deleting a saved page You can change the size of the cache to increase the number of web pages stored you can choose to clear the c
58. Microsoft Outlook later in this chapter for the changes you need to make in Outlook Microsoft If you select Microsoft Outlook Express enter the password for Outlook your e mail account See Configuring Microsoft Outlook Express 5 5 or Express later in this chapter for details later 262 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop Mail Client Action Lotus Notes Eudora 5 0 or later Direct POP connection to server Enter your Lotus Notes ID and password Click Browse if you need to locate your Notes ID If you want to synchronize to a local mail file instead of a server mail file select the Synchronize to local replicated mail file check box You must do all of the following in order to synchronize to a local mail file m Replicate the server mail file to the desktop m Make sure the replicated mail file is in the Notes data directory m Ifyou have performed a custom Notes installation and have replicated the server mail file to another directory on your desktop make sure that it is the path found in the notes ini file See Configuring Eudora later in this chapter for more information about the settings to make in Eudora Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting directly with a POP server You must enter the information about the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld when you create the e mail account to access the server You will enter
59. NOTE See the documentation included with the network access point device for information on how to prepare it to accept a Bluetooth connection The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link Edit Connection i Name BT to LAN Connect to Local Network Via v th Device 7 Tap the Device box The discovery process begins and the discovery screen appears 401 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 8 When the Discovery Results screen appears select the device to which you want to connect Discovery Results a Select a device PicoPalmDesign Bluetooth Discovery Searching for Bluetooth devices If the device to which you want to connect does not appear on the discovery results list tap Find More 9 Tap OK If prompted create a trusted pair with the device See Adding trusted devices earlier in this chapter for details Connecting to non GSM phones If you have a non GSM phone enabled with Bluetooth technology you can connect with the phone from your handheld to access the Internet and use Internet based applications such as e mail or a web browser To access the Internet and use Internet based applications you must subscribe to data services from your mobile phone carrier and must also have an Internet access account These services are not included with your handheld To create a connection with a non GSM phone 1 From
60. Note Pad note Palm Photos photo voice memo Memo Pad memo SMS message Palm Web Browser Pro page or Expense item Creating records You can use the following procedure to create a new record in Date Book Address Book To Do List Note Pad Memo Pad and Expense In SMS you use a different procedure to create a message For more information see Creating messages in Chapter 15 In Palm Web Browser Pro you can either save a web page or bookmark it so you can return to it later For more information see Chapter 19 50 Performing common tasks To create a record 1 Select the application in which you want to create a record 2 Tap New 3 In Date Book only Select start and end times for your appointment and tap OK 4 Enter text for the record 5 Optional Tap Details to select attributes for the record In Note Pad the Details command is located on the Options menu 6 In Address Book Note Pad and Memo Pad only Tap Done There s no need to save the record because your handheld saves it automatically Editing records After you create a record you can change delete or enter new text at any time Two screen features tell you when your handheld is in Edit mode m A blinking cursor a One or more dotted edit lines jul 24 02 KIBO gt Blinking cursor Edit line NOTE In Note Pad you can write anywhere on the screen Therefore you will not see an edit line or blinking cursor u
61. On a Windows computer try these steps 1 Check the Windows system tray to make sure the HotSync Manager is running If it is not click Start on the Windows taskbar and then select Programs Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group and select HotSync Manager You should also see Selecting HotSync setup options in Chapter 21 for instructions on selecting the correct HotSync Manager settings Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial as appropriate from the HotSync Manager menu If you are using the serial cradle cable make sure you selected the correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box It should be set to the port where you connected the HotSync cradle cable 454 HotSync problems I cannot perform a HotSync operation What should I check to make sure I m doing it correctly continued I did a HotSync operation but one of my applications did not synchronize Iam using Outlook as my PIM but I cannot do a HotSync operation I cannot launch the HotSync Manager On a Mac computer try these steps 1 Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled If it is not double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and enable HotSync Manager on the HotSync Controls tab 2 If you are using a USB cradle cable disconnect the cradle cable from your computer and then reconnect the cradle cable and restart your computer 3 If you are using the optional serial cra
62. Pad Voice Memo Memo Pad and Expense You can also sort photos in Palm Photo See Sorting photos in List view in Chapter 13 for details NOTE You can also assign records to categories See Categorizing records earlier in this chapter To sort records in To Do List and Expense 1 2 3 4 Open the application to display the list screen Tap Show Tap the Sort by pick list and select an option Tap OK To sort records in Address Book Note Pad Voice Memo and Memo Pad 1 2 Open the application to display the list screen Tap the Menu icon 63 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 3 Select Options and then select Preferences Address Book Preferences O Remember Last Category M Enable Tap to Connect List By Last Name First Name Company Last Name Note Pad Note Pad Preferences Sort by w Manual Alarm Sound w Alarm Confirm note delete Voice Memo Preferences il Sort by Manual Alarm Sound v Alarm M Confirm V Memo deletion O Record automatically to expansion card if present Memo Pad Memo Preferences Sort by w Alphabetic Do one of the following Address Book Tap the setting you want Note Pad Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic Date or Manual Voice Memo Tap the Sort by pick list and select Date Alphabetic Duration or Manual Memo Pad Tap the Sort by pick list and select Alphabetic or Manual Tap OK To so
63. Revise Micki Hic Drag the column lo 88 Re cross r Wayne H M Registratio LinkeSOF 11 36p divider left or right to jo K The Searc Search R 11 02p make the column o BE Fw REVIEW Donna M 10 33p narrower or wider MiMy scheduldKwong Li 4 54p M Re Bluetoo Kwong Li 2 48p Nen Get Mai Display 3 Tap OK You can also change the font within an individual message This change affects the the font of all messages you compose To change the font of a composed message 1 On the message screen tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options 0d Options M Attachment Save To Drafts Go To Top Go To Bottom 3 Tap Font 4 Tap the Font pick list and select the font you want Select Font Font v ETECO Segoe MT Size Sabon MT Thorndale MT Style v Palm Sample This is a sample 224 Getting sending and managing e mail 5 Tap the Size pick list and select the font size you want Select Font Font Gill Sans MT Size 6_ 9 Style Y riun Sample This is a sample 6 Tap the Style pick list and select the font style you want Select Font Font v Gill Sans MT Size v 9 Style C Sample This is a sample 7 Tap OK Moving e mail between folders You can move one or more e mail messages between folders To move one e mail message 1 Tap the folders pick list in the upper right corner of the screen
64. Rotating photos If a photo appears in the wrong orientation you can rotate the photo To rotate a photo 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Select Photo and then select Rotate Rotate Tap a photo to rotate Rotate Photo Select a rotation p7 ik ka 3 Tap the photo you want to rotate TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight press Up Down Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to view the photo 4 Select the new orientation 5 Tap Done Viewing photo information The Photo Details dialog box enables you to view information about a photo and to change the photo name assign it to an album add a note about the photo and delete a photo 140 Organizing photos To review photo information 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Select Photo and then select Details Details Photo Details i Tap a photo to view details Name Set4_010 Date 11 17 02 Size 46 KB 640x480 Location Handheld Album v Camera 3 Tap the photo for which you want to view information TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the Ge navigator to insert the highlight press Up Down Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to view the photo 4 Review or edit the information 5 Tap Done twice Organizing photos There are several ways you can organize your photos You can s
65. T FS 1 2 45 8 9 11 12 13 15 16 17 18 19 20 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 gt Tap to select date Set Time EN tis gt 345 Chapter 20 Using World Clock 3 Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour 4 Tap each number of the minute and then tap the arrows to change the minutes 5 Tap OK 6 Tap Done Choosing a different primary location If you travel to another location and you want alerts to appear based on local time you need to change the primary location to update the system time You may prefer however to use the secondary locations to view the local date and time and to leave the primary location unchanged To change the primary location 1 Tap the pick list next to the current primary location Primary World Clock location lS 7 pick lit 7 Pale Alte aloft 10 31 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 v Tokyo v London 3 31 pm 6 31 am Sun Dec 7 Sun Dec 7 Set Date amp Time 2 Tap the location you want to use as the new primary location If the new location is in another time zone World Clock automatically updates the date and time in all the applications on your handheld Setting the secondary locations The secondary locations display the date and time in two locations other than the primary location You can use the secondary locations to view the time in places to which you travel or need to contact people The date and time in the secondary locations ar
66. TIP You can also tap the slider bar to jump the slider to that position d 1of1 gt Unfiled groceries 7 8 00 04 Slider Slider bar 00 00 00 12 3 Tap Play 4 Tap Done Setting an alarm for a voice memo You can set an alarm for a specific time and date to remind you to follow up on a voice memo To set an alarm for a voice memo 1 2 w A Select the voice memo to which you want to assign an alarm Tap the Menu icon Tap the Date box Set Date Jan Feb mar Apr may Jun EA Aug Sep oct Now Dec wi T FS 3 4 5 6 10 11 12 13 47 18 19 20 P 25 26 27 3 Select Options and then select Alarm Tap here to select year Tap here to select month Tap here to select date 5 Tap the year month and date you want the alarm to sound After you tap the date the Set Alarm dialog box reappears 6 Tap the Time box 313 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo 7 Tap the hour and minute columns to select the time you want the alarm to occur Set Alarm Tap here to 1 select hour 2 3 4 5 O Auto play 6 7 8 9 Tap here to 10 lect minut Alarm Off 11 nye S3 8
67. Web Browser Pro Clearing the History list If you ve recently visited web pages you have no intention of visiting again you can clear the History list IMPORTANT Clearing the History list removes the record of your recent browsing history Pages you ve recently visited are still available in the cache and you can visit those pages by using the Back and Forward icons in the Web Browser Pro action bar If you want to save the location or content of a web page indefinitely create a bookmark or a saved page for that page before clearing the History list For more information on the cache see Changing the size and content of the cache For more information on the Back and Forward icons see Returning to a web page you just visited To clear the History list 1 2 3 Tap the Menu icon Tap Options and then tap History Tap Clear A confirmation dialog box appears Tap OK NOTE This action clears only the contents of the History list Your bookmarks and saved pages are not deleted Tap Done Customizing Web Browser Pro You can change Web Browser Pro to improve the speed ease of use and security of your browsing experience Changing the default size of text If the default size of the text is too small you can increase the size To change the default size of text 1 2 3 Tap the Menu icon Tap Options and then tap Font Choose font size and check the sample text When you re
68. Yee lt angyee999 hotmail com gt _____ Subj new campaign Date Mon Nov 25 2002 11 45 am Size 352 bytes To joe jmswordsmith com Have some ideas for sleek but not slick Are you free to meet tomorrow say around 11 short header 298 Going beyond the basics You can also switch between a short header and a full header for a message you are composing Short header shows the To and Subject fields only full header shows the To cc bec and Subject fields Message short header Message long header New Message Tap header New Message icon to switch To Ang Yee Subj Lunch meeting to full header Can we make it 1 304 Tap header icor to switch to short header Can we make it 1 30 Send Gatbox ratte Cana To switch between short header and full header view m Tap the header icon in the upper right corner of the message screen Backing up mail databases In most cases your e mail is on your server so you do not need to back up your e mail database from your handheld If you want to make sure you have a current copy of all your e mail you can back up all the e mail databases from the handheld To back up the e mail database 1 Tap the Menu icon tap Options and then select Preferences 2 Tap System Preferences i Advanced X Backup ALL Databases 3 Tap Backup ALL Databases to select it NOTE If you don t select this option
69. You can use these custom fields to track additional information in your Address records such as names of spouses children or any other details Rename Custom Fields Create your own field names by editing the text on the lines below Shows version information for Address Book 85 Chapter 5 Using Address Book 86 Using Calculator Calculator enables you to perform basic calculations Use Calculator to do the following m Perform addition subtraction multiplication division and square root operations m Store and retrieve values m Display the last series of calculations which is useful for confirming a series of chain calculations To open Calculator 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Calculator icon amp Performing calculations The Calculator includes several buttons to help you perform calculations fe fe ue re See co Clears the entire calculation so that you can begin a fresh calculation Clears the last number you entered If you make a mistake while entering a number in the middle of a calculation you can use this button to reenter the number without starting the calculation over 87 Chapter 6 Using Calculator M w nc Toggles the current number between a negative and positive value If you want to enter a negative number enter the number first and then press the button Places the current number into memory Each new number you enter
70. a local direct connection or with infrared communication rather than with a modem or network The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop software If you have not installed this software see Step 4 Install software in Chapter 1 for instructions To perform a local HotSync operation on a Windows computer 1 Place your handheld in the cradle cable kos 2 If the HotSync Manager is not running start it On the Windows desktop click Start and then select Programs Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group and select HotSync Manager Alternatively you can start the Palm Desktop software which automatically opens the HotSync Manager 357 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 3 Press the HotSync button on the cradle cable IMPORTANT The first time you perform a HotSync operation you must enter a user name in the New User dialog box and click OK Every handheld should have a unique name To prevent loss of a user s records never try to synchronize more than one handheld to the same user name The HotSync Progress dialog box appears and synchronization begins HotSync Progress Status Synchronizing Address Book User Marguerite Gallagher oO amp Qu Cae 4 Wait for a message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete After the HotSync process is complet
71. accessory to make a wireless connection to a network by dialing in to a network or by using a cradle cable that is connected to any computer on your LAN or WAN provided that the computer connected to the cradle cable also has the network HotSync technology installed your computer is on and the HotSync Manager is running IMPORTANT Network HotSync technology is available only on Windows computers You must perform the first HotSync operation by using a local direct connection or infrared communication After that you can perform a network HotSync operation 372 Conducting network HotSync operations Connecting to your company s dial in server A network HotSync operation requires the following consult your system administrator for assistance m Your computer has TCP IP support installed Both your company s network system and its remote access server support TCP IP m You have a remote access account Everything you need for connecting to your company s dial in server network modem is included with Palm Desktop software and handheld software You need to activate the feature however on both Palm Desktop software and your handheld To prepare your Windows computer for a network HotSync operation 1 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray 2 From the HotSync Manager menu select Network Local USB Local Serial Modem v Network Custom Eile Link View Log About
72. add a speed dial entry Tap Speed 113 Chapter 9 Using Palm Dialer 3 Enter a name and telephone number TIP You can add a number from your Palm Dialer numeric display or from other Palm applications by using the cut and paste feature on the Edit menu Edit Entry Enter name and number Tap OK to add entry 4 Tap OK The name appears on the speed dial button Speed Dial Entry added to speed dial list 5 Tap Done Dialing a speed dial entry To dial a speed dial entry 1 Tap Speed Tap Speed 114 Using speed dial 2 Tap one of the speed dial buttons The number is dialed and added to the Call History list You are now ready to communicate over your mobile phone Speed Dial Tap a speed dial button to dial the number Messages Roger Bird Larry Editing a speed dial entry To edit a speed dial entry 1 Tap Speed wi E E A 1 EE 2 Tap Edit o bil Tap Speed Q D Z zx oO e annann TIP You can also go directly to the Edit Entry dialog box by tapping and holding a speed dial button Speed Dial Tap Edit 115 Chapter 9 Using Palm Dialer 3 Tap an entry Edit Speed Dial Li Horne Messages Larry Tap an entry Morn Dr Smith Cindy Roger Bird 1 2 3 d 5 Te 8 9 10 Edit name and number Tap Clear to delete current entry T
73. alarm preferences 350 Daylight Saving settings and options 347 348 display options 350 menus 350 opening 343 344 Time Zone 347 486 Index Writing area on handheld 12 preferences 388 Writing See Entering data 487 Index 488
74. and then tap the folder name or press Up or Down on the navigator to move to the folder you want and the press Select to select the folder 0 0 225 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 2 Press Right on the navigator to open the Message menu press Down to move to the Move To option and then press Select to select this option Alternately tap the icon to the left of the message and then tap Move To from the pop up menu Speakeas 3 18 Inbox M out of of Joe Sad 12 10p Mreview c Angela 12 09p o S these ar Travis 12 08p WM lunch meet Joe Sadu 12 07p 11 41a 10 55a Mark Read 2SOF 11 36p e Mark Unread 11 02p lo 10 33p i 4 54p i 2 48p l en The folders pick list appears 3 Press Up or Down on the navigator to move to the folder you want and then press Select to select the folder Alternately tap the folder that you want Speakeas 3 18 Inbox M out of of Joe Sad 12 10p Mreview c Angela 12 09p o S these ar Travis 12 08p MWM lunch meet lJoe Sadu 12 07p G Inbox 18 cki Hic 11 41a Outbox ayne H 10 55a Drafts ikeSOF 11 36p o Sent arch R 11 02p o Trash 18 inna M 10 33p Edit Folders tong Li 4 54p M Ke Bluetoo Kwong Li 2 48p Nen Get Mai_ Display v TIP You c
75. and ty pte 2 deel teteki eee eed teed ees eee Cee 17 Elements of the handheld interface 0 0 0 18 Using thenavigat t sessio eke eas teehee ONES EDERE tke eee tes 20 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld 23 Using the onscreen keyboard vidya ceeo cee eet ned e ee ckw eee n ew eee eae 23 Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data iia ieee es ewe Ve ewe edu ELAS 24 Graffiti 2 HPS siere be eh eee ES pee bead ete kes eee peed ES 26 Graffit Z alphabet vticcssvtas wrevdde utbetie r bE erk PEE E exe wade 27 Contents Capital letters possi crereyea view eee ceria ks helene eee E 28 Graffiti Z numbers 62 02 88 cs dada swie ies wake ke he oa eR a 28 Punctuation marks anasa naaus eee n nen en eee eas 28 Accented characters 0 0 0 n teen eens 30 Symbols and other special characters 0 cece eee 30 Graffiti 2 GeStures 2 2020 6e00 Ui deta ada et a T EE enna es 32 Graffiti 2 ShortCuts seere ha oe coe ogee CaaS He ee wae Eas Sees 32 Full screen writing area 24 ieti beth ape bade bee oaees 33 Beaming dat sra atest nek eee edn epee Eva eas Ra EEE ea eae 33 Peamine psan egress aap inea eats tee ae dee Eads FER eae tee aad 36 Sending datas sergenrenp ep wee ele reese eed ede vee eee seu eee eas 36 Sending data using Bluetooth communication 000000 36 Sending data using e mail or SMS communication 37 Using your computer keyboard 2 4ceccn deen d eee tee eee
76. and your username for your e mail account m Ifyou are connecting using an external modem device such as a PalmModem accessory verify that you have an account with an ISP and are able to dial in over a voice phone line m If you are connecting using a mobile phone through either the built in Bluetooth radio on your handheld a cable or the IR port on your handheld verify that you have either a data enabled GSM or a high speed GPRS account with your wireless service provider m Some wireless service providers require you to be on their network to use your e mail account If this is the case be sure to use your provider s network as the connection type for the account 463 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Iam having problems accessing my account continued I am having difficulty sending and receiving mail using a synchronize only account Recharging problems Problem When I connect my handheld to the cradle cable it does not charge m Some wireless service providers have other requirements specific to their service For example Yahoo requires you to set up POP mail forwarding for your Yahoo account in order to download e mail messages to your handheld Check with your service provider to see if any provider specific requirements exist Service provider settings frequently change If your e mail account was working but you are currently experiencing problems check with your service provider t
77. automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new record or sentence Write the symbol or other special character shown in the table that follows You can make a symbol stroke anywhere in the Graffiti 2 writing area Enter an additional Punctuation Shift stroke to finish writing the character and to make the character appear more quickly After the arrow disappears the symbol appears Draw symbols on EITHER side of the Graffiti 2 writing area I y N A po amp AMAR lt gt C t Auhl singels 31 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld Graffiti 2 Gestures Gestures enable you to use editing commands To use gestures draw the following strokes on the left letter side of the Graffiti 2 writing area Draw gestures on LEFT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Gesture Stroke Gesture Stroke Cut Y Paste y Copy Undo Graffiti 2 ShortCuts Graffiti 2 ShortCuts make entering commonly used words or phrases quick and easy ShortCuts are similar to the Glossary or Autotext features of some word processors Graffiti 2 writing comes with several predefined ShortCuts and you can also create your own Each ShortCut can represent up to 45 characters For example you might create a ShortCut for your name or for the header of a memo See ShortCuts Preferences
78. beam your business card to another device with an IR port 34 Beaming data 4 When the Beam Status dialog box appears point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving device For best results Palm handhelds should be between 10 centimeters approximately 4 inches and 1 meter approximately 39 inches apart and the path between the two handhelds must be clear of obstacles The beaming distance to other devices may be different 5 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue working on your handheld To beam an application 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Tap App and then tap Beam 4 Tap the Beam From pick list 5 Select either Handheld or Card 6 Tap the application you want to transfer Some applications are copy protected and cannot be beamed These are listed with a lock icon next to them 7 Tap Beam 8 When the Beam Status dialog box appears point the IR port directly at the IR port of the receiving device 9 Wait for the Beam Status dialog box to indicate that the transfer is complete before you continue working on your handheld To receive beamed information 1 Turn on your handheld 2 Point the IR port directly at the IR port of the transmitting device to open the Beam dialog box 35 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld Beaming tips Sending data You can send data us
79. cable click the Local tab to display the settings for the connection between your computer and the handheld cradle cable and adjust the following options as needed If you are using the USB cradle cable you do not need to use the settings on the Local tab for a direct HotSync operation General Local Modem Network Serial port Speed As Fast As Possible Serial Port Identifies the port that HotSync Manager uses to communicate with the cradle cable If necessary you can change the port selection Your handheld cannot share this port with an internal modem or other device Speed Determines the speed at which data is transferred between your handheld and Palm Desktop software Try the As Fast As Possible rate first and adjust downward if you experience problems This setting allows your handheld to synchronize with computer at the fastest speed possible 352 Selecting HotSync setup options 5 Click the Modem tab to display the modem settings and adjust the options as needed For more information see Conducting modem HotSync operations later in this chapter 6 If you are attached to a network click the Network tab to display the network settings and adjust the options as needed For more information see Conducting network HotSync operations later in this chapter 7 Click OK To set the HotSync options on a Mac computer 1 Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder 2
80. cable which in turn connects to the back of your computer and through the AC adapter to the wall current This enables you to recharge your handheld as well as update the information between your handheld and your computer using HotSync technology The universal connector also connects peripheral hardware devices to your handheld such as an external battery pack or keyboard sold separately 14 Using the protective cover Using the protective cover The cover protects your handheld screen when it is not in use When the cover is on you can still view information on your handheld and use the navigator to navigate through your data and accomplish tasks To remove the cover 1 Gently lift one of the cover tabs from the side of your handheld Cover tab 2 Store the cover by aligning the cover tabs with the notches on the sides of your handheld and then gently pressing it onto the back of your handheld 15 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld Adding an expansion card An expansion card sold separately increases the variety of tasks you can do and the amount of space you have to store software and data on your handheld To insert a card 1 Insert the card into the expansion slot with the label side facing the display 2 Push lightly against the card with your thumb When the card is released you hear the system sound if system sounds are turned on See Sounds amp Alerts Preferences in Chapter 22 f
81. can modify Bluetooth Connection Network and Phone settings This section provides details about each of these screens 1 Tap the Home icon O 2 Tap the Prefs icon amp 3 From the Communication Preferences list select the name of the Preferences screen you want to view TIP You can also press Left Right Up and Down on the navigator to highlight O a Preferences screen name and then press Select on the navigator to open that Preferences screen A o O s Formats Graffiti 2 E s Power Sounds amp Alerts s Writing Area Communication Connection s Network gt Phone Personal Buttons Color Theme Owner Security gt ShortCuts Bluetooth Preferences When another Bluetooth device is within range typically 10 meters or approximately 30 feet of your handheld you can connect your handheld with Bluetooth devices such as m Mobile phones Computers m LAN access points m Palm OS handhelds The Bluetooth Preferences screen enables you to configure settings that determine how your handheld communicates with other Bluetooth devices You can turn Bluetooth communication on and off assign a name to your handheld for Bluetooth communication and choose device discovery and wakeup settings 389 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Turning Bluetooth communication on and off By default the Bluetooth communication feature on your handheld is turned off The default setting is designed to
82. cannot be installed Make sure the dialog box that confirms where the files will be installed is closed You cannot add more files to the list when the confirmation dialog box is open For details see Installing applications and files on a Windows computer in Chapter 4 450 Operating problems Operating problems Problem I don t see anything on my handheld s screen I get a warning message telling me my handheld memory is full My handheld keeps turning itself off Solution Try each of these in turn Press an application button to ensure that your handheld is turned on Tap the Brightness icon 9 in the upper right corner of the Graffiti 2 writing area If the Brightness dialog box appears adjust the brightness by pressing and holding Up on the navigator for a few seconds If this doesn t work press and hold Down on the navigator for a few seconds If your handheld was exposed to cold make sure it is at room temperature Charge your handheld Perform a soft reset If your handheld still doesn t turn on perform a hard reset See Resetting your handheld in Appendix A IMPORTANT With a hard reset all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased Never perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during the next HotSync operation Purge records from Date Book and To D
83. card 1 2 3 From the Communications Preferences list select Network Tap the Phone box Tap the Use calling card check box to select it Phone Setup i Select this box to use a O Use calling card Enter your calling card calling card number here Enter your calling card number on the Use calling card line NOTE The Phone Setup dialog box works correctly for AT amp T and Sprint long distance services However because MCI works differently MCI customers need to enter the calling card number in the Phone field and the phone number in the Use calling card field TIP It s a good idea to add at least three commas before your calling card number to compensate for the cue delay Tap OK Tap Done 409 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Connecting to your service After you set your Connection and Network Preferences establishing a connection to your ISP or your company s network dial in server is easy To establish a connection 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap Connect to dial the current service and display the Service Connection Progress messages 3 Optional From the Service Connection Progress dialog box tap the box that displays the service name select another service and then tap Done To see expanded Service Connection Progress messages press Down on the navigator 4 Tap Done To close a connection 1 From the Commun
84. check box is selected If you don t want to save a copy tap the check box to deselect it The archive option is not available in Note Pad Palm Photos Palm Web Browser Pro and Voice Memo In SMS you must tap Archive in the Message menu to archive a message 4 Tap OK If you chose to save a copy of the selected item your handheld transfers it to the archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation To delete a record with alternate methods m Delete the text of the record m In Date Book Address Book Palm Photos To Do List and Memo Pad open the Details dialog box for the record tap Delete and then tap OK NOTE When deleting a repeating event in Date Book you can choose to delete the current repeating event current and future events or all instances of that event In Palm Photos you can select and delete multiple photos at the same time See Deleting photos in Chapter 13 for details a In Note Pad and Voice Memo open the note or voice memo you want to delete and then tap Delete m In Palm Web Browser Pro you can delete your list of bookmarked pages or clear the history list of the web pages you ve visited You can also clear the cache of web pages stored on your handheld so you can view them without accessing the Internet again See Chapter 19 for details InSMS tap Empty Trash on the Message menu to permanently delete messages in the Trash category 53 Chapter 4
85. computer the printer font is used by default to increase printing speed If the printer font does not include the euro a box is printed instead of the euro symbol You can work around this problem by transferring the expense data to another application and inserting a bitmap image of the euro into the document in the appropriate places or by not using the printer s built in fonts if allowed 125 Chapter 10 Using Expense Using Expense menus Expense menus are shown here for your reference and Expense features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands Record menu GET Edit Options Delete Item zD Purge E Options menu zo Preferences AR Custom Currencies About Expense Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can select automatic fill and default currency options Preferences a Use automatic fill when entering data Default Currency vw Use automatic fill Enables you to select an expense type by writing the first letter of an expense type in the Graffiti 2 writing area For example if you write the letter T it enters the Taxi expense type Writing T and then E enters Telephone which is the first expense type beginning with the letters TE About Expense Shows version information for Expense 126 Using Memo Pad amp Memo Pad provides
86. computer to use a synchronize only account A synchronize only e mail account enables you to download view and manage e mail between the handheld and a desktop e mail application such as Microsoft Outlook by performing a HotSync operation by means of the cradle cable You can t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for any account of this type To create a synchronize only e mail account 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Accounts 3 Select Account Setup Accounts Sam Yahoo 1 Sam IMAP 2 Sam Sync 3 Speakeasy L4 Account Setup 189 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 4 Tap New Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Sam Yahoo 5 Do the following Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account such as My Yahoo Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting Select Other if your ISP is not listed Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP Most mail providers use the POP protocol If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected it displays the correct protocol Account Setup i Enter aname for this account e g My Mail and select settings Account Name Sam Sync Mail Service v EarthLink Protocol v POP O Synchronize Only Account 6 On the same screen select the Synchro
87. conserve battery power When Bluetooth communication is off you cannot communicate with other Bluetooth devices You must turn on Bluetooth communication to use any of the Bluetooth communication features Keep in mind that when Bluetooth communication is on your battery will drain more quickly than when Bluetooth communication is off To turn on Bluetooth communication 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap the Bluetooth pick list and select On NOTE Switching Bluetooth On and Off may take several seconds Please wait before continuing to step 3 below Preferences Bluetooth Bluetooth v On _____ Bluetooth pick list Device Name Discoverable v Yes Allow Wakeup w No 3 Tap Done Assigning a Bluetooth device name The Bluetooth device name is similar to wearing a name tag The name you assign to your handheld identifies you to other Bluetooth devices When other users search for Bluetooth devices your Bluetooth device name appears on their screen as a discovered device If you do not enter a device name your handheld sends the default name Palm OS handheld To assign a Bluetooth name to your handheld 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap the Device Name box 390 Setting Communication Preferences 3 Enter a name for your device Preferences Bluetooth Bluetooth v On Device Name April Device Name box Edit Devi
88. default setting is used when you click the Default button in the Custom dialog box r HotSync Action for Date Book OK oe Cancel Help z 8 C Desktop overwrites handheld T Set as default QO C Handheld overwrites Desktop O28 C Donothing Click OK Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other applications Click Done to activate your settings 10 Perform a HotSync operation 446 Resetting your handheld To restore your data from a Mac computer after a hard reset 1 Double click the HotSync Manager in the Palm folder 2 From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings 3 From the Users pop up menu select the appropriate user name 4 Select an application from the list 5 Click Conduit Settings 6 Click Macintosh overwrites handheld for each conduit Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation Thereafter the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings To use a new setting on an ongoing basis click Make Default Thereafter whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations HotSync action for Address Book BZ synchronize the files aE Macintosh overwrites handheld eS Handheld overwrites Macintosh B amp E O Do Nothing Default setting Synchronize the files O Make Default Cancel ox 7 Click OK 8 Repeat steps 4 through 6 to change conduit settings for other a
89. eee dae es 37 Importing data s scgsien sepesi ai EE e EE EEE EAE RIENA E tay Mae E 37 Importing data from a Windows computer sssi sses 000 c eee eee 38 Importing data from a Mac computer 0 eee cee eee 39 Using Note Pad cerccsirssince sire ren eee ndt itie diaii iE ees 4 40 Using a portable keyboard 424 2525 tee he eae ees Ge ht nn rren 40 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 00000e ee ees 41 Opening applications 15 cr 2b 85d bod ASR bea de noe eye ehen eee Enns Pees 41 Other ways to open applications u s deka tel eneheearasd tam 42 Opening expansion card applications 0 0 00 cece eee eee 42 Switching between applications ois0 ci1veotives eee ved cits etis des Vans 43 Catesorizin applications s 22s e i4iwiedss died ti eee ae eed ewe BG 44 Changing the Applications Launcher display 00005 45 Copying applications to or from an expansion card 0004 46 Selecting copy SeCMINGS caves crer doe dveaarvenee es Yen TETE E EE eN E 47 Usm MENUS 2 ciccsc cle ranei e ea E AN E E ees 48 Choosing a Men s iid tie oes ba eee ed See a ees ois 49 Choosing application preferences 00s0c0eeccecesesnetesetveeenees 50 Performing COMMON tasks 29 ve eos dee w an Ko beee ew New wae bewe a 50 Creating records eich reviv ie cee cee ee ere EE E E EE eee tres 50 Editing ROCOLdS 15 028 tbh see reret EA ENE E A sede Arp ewe teens 51 Deleting records gs aro chan pha
90. event and decide later that there is no particular start or end time you can easily change it to an untimed event Tap the time of the event in the Date Book screen tap No Time and then tap OK TIP To attach a note to an entry and work with attached notes see Attaching notes in Chapter 4 Selecting an event After you create an event you can select an event to view its contents reschedule it make it a repeating event and add alarms or notes To select an event 1 Go to the day on which the event is scheduled 2 Tap the event TIP You can also press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight on the O next event in the current day or on the first event of another day To scroll through the events in the selected day press Up and Down on the navigator Rescheduling an event You can easily make changes to your schedule with your handheld To reschedule an event 1 Select the event you want to reschedule 2 Tap Details 3 To change the time tap the Time box and tap a new time 4 To change the date tap the Date box and tap a new date 5 Tap OK 99 Chapter 8 Using Date Book Setting an alarm for an event The Alarm setting enables you to set an alarm for events in your Date Book You can set an alarm to notify you minutes hours or days before an event The default Alarm setting is 5 minutes before the time of the event but you can change this to any number of minutes hours or days When you set
91. field of the Network Preferences screen If you did not enter a password this command prompts you to enter one The Password command is usually followed by a Send CR command Tells your handheld to wait a specific number of seconds before executing the next command in the login script Reads an IP address and uses it as the IP address for your handheld This command is used with SLIP connections 417 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Prompt Opens a dialog box and prompts you to enter certain text for example a password or a security code End Identifies the last line in the login script 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 until the login script is complete 5 Tap OK Plug in applications You can create plug in applications containing script commands that extend the functionality of the built in script commands A plug in application is a standard PRC application that you install on your handheld just like any other application After you install the plug in application you can use the new script commands in a login script Plug in applications have the following characteristics m Written in C language Compiled into a device executable m Called properly from a login script m Able to return control to a login script after it terminates m Created using a development environment that supports Palm OS software such as Metrowerks CodeWarrior for Palm Platform For additional information on creating plug
92. folder tap New and then enter the new folder name For IMAP accounts only select the check box if you also want to create the folder on the server When finished tap OK POP accounts IMAP accounts Edit Categories Edit IMAP Folders Enter anew category name Enter anew folder name O Also create on server 228 Getting sending and managing e mail To rename a folder tap the folder name from the list on the screen tap Rename and then enter the new folder name For IMAP accounts only you have the option of renaming the folder on the server Select the check box if you also want to rename the folder on the server When finished tap OK POP accounts IMAP accounts Edit Categories Edit IMAP Folders Enter anew category name Enter a new folder name Favorites z Favorites O Also rename on server To delete a folder tap the folder name from the list on the screen and then tap Delete For IMAP accounts only you have the option of deleting the folder on the server Select the check box if you also want to delete the folder on the server and then tap OK For POP accounts the folder will be deleted immediately and you will not see a confirmation screen Edit IMAP Folders Are you sure you want to permanently delete folder Delete confirmation Favorites This action cannot be appears for IMAP undone accounts only O Also delete on server Creating and sending new e mail When you create a ne
93. handheld Under normal circumstances you will not have to use the reset button On rare occasions however your handheld may no longer respond to buttons or to the screen In this case you need to perform a reset to get your handheld running again 444 Resetting your handheld Performing a soft reset A soft reset tells your handheld to stop what it s doing and start over again All records and entries stored in your handheld are retained with a soft reset After a soft reset the Preferences screen appears and the Date and Time option is highlighted so you can reset the date and time if needed To perform a soft reset 1 Open your handheld See Opening and closing your handheld in Chapter 2 for details 2 Use the tip of your stylus or an unfolded paper clip or similar object without a sharp tip to gently press the reset button inside the hole on the back panel of your handheld Reset button Performing a hard reset With a hard reset all records and entries stored in your handheld are erased Never perform a hard reset unless a soft reset does not solve your problem NOTE You can restore any data previously synchronized with your computer during the next HotSync operation To perform a hard reset 1 Open your handheld See Opening and closing your handheld in Chapter 2 for details 2 Press and hold the power button on the top panel of the handheld 3 While holding the power button use t
94. http www hotmail com Done ene Tap More to view the entire message 218 Getting sending and managing e mail Plain text and HTML e mail By default the VersaMail application is set to receive mail in HTML format This means that any e mail messages sent as HTML will be displayed on your handheld with basic HTML formatting intact including the following Boldface a Italics m Underlining Colored words m Bullet lists Numbered lists m Line breaks Most formatting not displayed is stripped of its HTML tags and shown as plain text For certain types of graphic images for example JPG or GIF files the graphic may be displayed as a URL in the body of the e mail message In some cases you can tap the URL to open the graphic image See Working with URLs later in this chapter for more information When you set the VersaMail application to receive e mail messages as HTML any messages sent as plain text will be displayed as plain text only You can also set the application to receive all messages as plain text only regardless of the format in which they were sent If you choose this option only the text of any messages sent in HTML format will be displayed NOTE The VersaMail application sends all messages as plain text only with all HTML tags stripped even if you are forwarding or replying to a message that was originally received as HTML To select whether to receive e mail messages i
95. if you give your expansion card to a friend you do not have another copy of your voice memo s You must use a card reader sold separately to view the contents of the expansion card on your computer and use a third party application to back up data stored on an expansion card Additionally you cannot mark voice memos private or attach alarms to voice memos that are stored on an expansion card NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application To store specific voice memos on an expansion card 1 Create or open a voice memo 2 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner and select Card 3 Tap Done To automatically store voice memos on an expansion card 1 From the Voice Memo list tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Options and then select Preferences Preferences i Sort by Manual Alarm Sound Alarm M Confirm V Memo deletion O Record automatically to expansion card if present 3 Select the check box Record automatically to expansion card if present 4 Tap OK 311 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo Listening to voice memos The Voice Memo list disp
96. in any application that resides on your handheld Find does not search applications that reside on an expansion card To use Find 1 Tap the Find icon TIP If you select text in an application before you tap Find the selected text automatically appears in the Find dialog box 2 Enter the text that you want to find Find is not case sensitive For example searching for the name davidson also finds Davidson Find locates any words that begin with the text you enter For example searching for plane finds planet but not airplane 60 Performing common tasks 3 Tap OK Find searches for the text in all records and all notes Matches for David To Do Items Call David 555 2676 _ V Memos Addresses Find Taylor David 650 555 3434W Datebook Expense Items Memos Notes As your handheld searches for the text you can tap Stop at any time You may want to do this if the entry you want appears before your handheld finishes the search To continue the search after you tap Stop tap Find More 4 Tap the text that you want to review Using Phone Lookup Phone Lookup displays the Address list screen You can add to a record the information that appears in this list To use Phone Lookup 1 Display the record in which you want to insert a phone number The record can be in Date Book To Do List Memo Pad SMS or any other application that
97. in applications send e mail to Palm Developer Support at devsupp palm com Deleting a network service profile There is only one way to delete a network service profile Use the Delete command from the Service menu To delete a network service profile 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Service pick list 3 Select the network service profile you want to delete 4 Tap the Menu icon 5 Select Delete from the Service menu 6 Tap OK 7 Tap Done 418 Setting Communication Preferences Network Preferences menu commands The Network Preferences screen includes menu commands to make it fast and easy to create and edit network service profiles TCP IP application menus are shown here for your reference See Using menus in Chapter 4 for more information about choosing menu commands Service menu Service Duplicate L Options menu Options ViewLog V TCP IP troubleshooting If you have problems establishing a network connection using TCP IP check the troubleshooting tips in this section and try the suggestions listed Displaying expanded Service Connection Progress messages It s helpful to identify at what point in the login procedure the connection fails An easy way to do this is to display the expanded Service Connection Progress messages These messages describe the current stage of the login procedure Press Down on the navigator at any point during log
98. in response to an alert message your handheld reminds you of the item again in five minutes The Reminder screen displays alerts that await attention 5 55pm Reminders O two 5 45 pm Today Stop on the way home O 5 40 pm Today Alarm O 4 10 15 am 11 00 am Today Review schedules To respond to alerts do one of the following m Select an item s check box to clear the item m Tap an item either the icon or the text description to open the application where the alarm was set The application opens to the entry associated with the alarm a Tap Done to close the reminder list and return to the current screen An attention indicator will blink in the upper left corner of the screen tap it to view the alert list again m Tap Snooze to see the list again in five minutes If you tap Done or Snooze and view the reminder list later the current time appears in the Reminder bar and the original alert time appears with each list item m Tap Clear All to dismiss all alerts in the list 67 Chapter 4 Working with Applications Receiving alerts from Palm Desktop software You can also set an option to receive Date Book event alerts from Palm Desktop software The feature is disabled by default so you must enable it within Palm Desktop software To enable an event alert from Palm Desktop software 1 Double click the Palm Desktop icon 2 From the Tools menu select Options and then select Alarms 3 Set Alarm Configur
99. information your name address phone number and so on By default Web Browser Pro stores the information you entered in these fields The next time you use that order form and type the first few letters in a field Web Browser Pro remembers the last item you entered in that field that started with those letters and fills in the field This also applies to URLs If autofill is enabled when you enter the first few letters of a URL you ve entered before in the URL Entry field Web Browser Pro completes the URL for you To enable or disable autofill 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap General 4 In the Autofill Text check box do one of the following To turn off autofill tap to remove the checkmark To turn on autofill tap to select it 5 Tap OK 337 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Enabling or disabling cookies Some web sites store information in a small text file called a cookie Cookies usually contain information about you and your preferences for that web site A site can use this information to customize the pages you see the next time you visit Allowing a web site to create a cookie does not give the site access to the rest of your handheld A cookie stores only the information you provide while visiting the web site By default Web Browser Pro saves the cookies it receives You can tell it not to accept cookies To enable or disable cookies 1 Tap the
100. information about the incoming POP server the outgoing SMTP server your e mail username your password and your e mail address You can change these settings under Handheld Settings in the conduit see the procedure for setting handheld synchronization settings later in this chapter During the HotSync operation the conduit reads the settings you made If the settings do not exist or all server information is wrong an error is reported in the HotSync log file However if the incoming server POP is correct the Inbox is synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected If the outgoing server SMTP is correct the Outbox is synchronized send e mail if you selected the option to synchronize the Outbox If neither is correct then nothing happens If you want to synchronize e mail for an account that requires APOP authentication you must select the option to use APOP on your handheld See Adding APOP to an account later in this chapter for details If you want to synchronize e mail for an account that requires ESMTP authentication for example Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication you must select the option to use ESMTP on your handheld See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for details The conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct POP 263 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Mail Client Action Direct IMAP conne
101. is a wireless provider such as charges Cingular or T Mobile that charges a fee for data transactions using the auto get feature can substantially add to your monthly charges This issue is especially noticeable for POP accounts because the size of the IDs used to locate POP account messages is much larger and thus POP messages take longer to download than for IMAP accounts NOTE If you primarily retrieve messages over your company s network Bluetooth or 802 11b network monthly charges should not be an issue If you set the auto get mail interval for more frequently than once per hour an alert message appears Auto Get Mail Setting Auto Get Mail schedule more often than once an hour will shorten battery life and may increase usage costs To minimize resource concerns set your interval for e mail auto get to no more frequently than once per hour Inbox icons in the VersaMail application The icons to the left of a message in the Inbox indicate the message s status KA Only the subject header information is downloaded M Part or all of the message text is downloaded Q Part or all of the message text and attachment information is Ny downloaded 217 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Reading e mail To read e mail tap the e mail message in the Inbox or the folder where the message is located Speakeas 3 22 w Inbox M Joe Sadusky 12 out of office tomorr
102. later as a choice for the Mail Client option if your e mail application is compatible with extended MAPI If your e mail application is compatible with SMAPI select Microsoft Outlook Express as a choice for the Mail Client option NOTE A profile contains configuration information such as the location of incoming e mail your personal address book and other information services that you can use The profile may be MS Exchange Settings your name or something different For more information on profiles see your e mail application s documentation 264 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop 5 Under the account name click Advanced Sync Options VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky x Eile Help Joe Sadusky J t EAE VersaMail H Business B Sam Yahoo Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options E Handheld Settings Sam IMAP Sam Syne Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Option E Handheld Settings W Speakeasy Attachment Conversion Maximum 2 message size KB Days To Synchronize Mail Advanced Sync Options Sam Sync 50 Maximum message size KB Specifies the maximum message size to download during a HotSync operation Mail that is larger than this size will be truncated on your Palm handheld i Days To Synchronize Mail Synchronize mail that has been on the server for the specified number of days or less with your Palm handheld I Synchronize unread mail
103. level or category Attach a note to an individual To Do List item for a description or clarification of the task To open To Do List Press the To Do List application button on the front panel of your handheld To Do List opens to display the list of all your records To Do List button TIP Press the To Do List application button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have records 171 Chapter 16 Using To Do List Creating list items A To Do List item is a reminder of a task that you must complete A record in To Do List is called an item To create a To Do List item 1 Tap New ToDo v All Send flowers TOM sass New To Do item _ Tap New t 2 Enter the text of the To Do List item The text can be longer than one line 3 Tap anywhere onscreen to deselect the To Do List item TIP If no To Do List item is currently selected writing in the Graffiti 2 writing area automatically creates a new item Setting priority You can use the priority setting for items to arrange the tasks in your To Do List according to their importance or urgency The default setting for the To Do List is to arrange items by priority and due date with priority 1 items at the top If you have a number of items in your list changing an item s priority setting may move its position in the list When you create a new To Do List item its priority is automatically set to level 1 t
104. m The name of the outgoing mail SMTP server m Whether your e mail account requires any security such as SSL APOP or ESMTP m Your e mail address and password m The login script if any that you need for connecting to your ISP or mail server NOTE Information about your e mail account is available from the e mail provider Depending on the type of e mail service you have you may be able to access this information by going to the e mail provider s web site or by contacting the provider s customer support Using a corporate e mail account If you want to access e mail on your handheld using your corporate e mail account you create this account on your handheld in exactly the same way as any other account see Network e mail account prerequisites later in this chapter with one exception for a corporate e mail account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN See VPNs later in this chapter for information NOTE If your company has a Bluetooth network located behind the corporate firewall or if you are using an 802 11b SDIO card sold separately in your handheld and your company has an 802 11b network located behind the corporate firewall you may not need to set up a VPN to access your corporate e mail account See the following section for details The following considerations apply when setting up a corporate e mail account Username and These might be your Windows NT or Windows 2000 username passw
105. make text easier to read You can choose small small bold large or large bold fonts in enables you to change the font style Merten d lofS gt Unfiled g Minutes d 1of2 gt 11 22 Meeting Minutes implementated by employees Small font CEA tors iUnfied Large font 1 ing Bill Davidson to study time im Small bold Michele Baker toreporton je tont Dalias F i aae Large bold fs EEEE EAEE A font To change the font style 1 Open an application 2 Tap the Menu icon wo Select Options and then select Font A Tap the font style you want to use Select Font Tap here for small font o Tap OK Unfiled Bill Davidson to study time management program as Michelle Baker to report on each application that N Aa Memo d iof5 gt Unfiled 112 eting Mi 4 Tap here for small bold font Tap here for large bold font Tap here for large font 66 Performing common tasks Receiving alerts You can receive alerts on your handheld and in Palm Desktop software Receiving alerts on your handheld When you use certain application settings your handheld can alert you to any of the following An appointment set in Date Book A note created in Note Pad A voice memo created in Voice Memo a An alarm set in World Clock When an alert occurs your handheld displays a reminder message If you tap Snooze
106. name fields show the display name Add to Address Book Add angyee999 hotmail com to Address Book Last name Yee First name Angela 2 Optional If the Last name and First name fields are blank enter the first and last name associated with the From e mail address 3 Tap OK to add the e mail address to the Address Book and then tap OK in the confirmation dialog box You can also update an existing Address Book entry with a new e mail address or create a second Address Book entry for a name that has an existing record The procedure is the same as for adding a new Address Book entry If you tap Add to Address Book from the body of an e mail message and a record already exists for the recipient name you are prompted either to update the e mail address for the recipient or to create a new record for the recipient Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop IMPORTANT You must have a Windows computer to synchronize e mail between your handheld and your computer To manage your e mail on your desktop as well as on your handheld you can synchronize an e mail account on the handheld with an e mail application on the desktop You can use many popular e mail applications called clients such as Microsoft Outlook Eudora Lotus Notes Outlook Express or any other e mail clients that use MAPI This chapter describes the following m Starting the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit Configuring and activ
107. necessary you can adjust the local and modem HotSync settings as well To set the HotSync options on a Windows computer 1 Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray bottom right corner of the taskbar If you do not see the HotSync icon you need to start HotSync Manager On the Windows desktop click Start and then select Programs Navigate to the Palm Desktop software program group and select HotSync Manager Alternatively you can start the Palm Desktop software which automatically opens the HotSync Manager 2 Select Setup General Local Modem Network C Available only when the Palm Desktop is running Manual you start the HotSync Manager yourself 351 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 3 Click the General tab and select one of the following options Always available Adds HotSync Manager to the Startup folder and constantly monitors the communication port for synchronization requests from your handheld With this option the HotSync Manager synchronizes data even when Palm Desktop software is not running Available only when Starts HotSync Manager and monitors requests the Pa eskt H Software de inning automatically when you open Palm Desktop software Manual Monitors requests only when you select HotSync Manager from the Start menu If you re not sure which option to use keep the default setting Always available If you are using a serial cradle
108. new e mail You select how your handheld notifies you of new e mail in your handheld s General preferences To make your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e mail 1 Tap the Home icon O 2 Tap the Prefs icon amp 3 From the General Preferences list select Sound amp Alerts Preferences General T Date amp Time Digitizer Formats Graffiti 2 Power Writing Area Communication Bluetooth Connection Network Phone Personal Buttons Color Theme i 4 Do any of the following To change the volume of the Alarm Sound tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select Low Medium High or Off To change whether or not the handheld indicator light blinks when you receive new e mail tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off To change whether or not the handheld vibrates when you receive new e mail tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off Preferences Sounds amp Alerts Custom silent All Off System Sound v High Game Sound v High Alarm Sound High Alarm LED On Alarm Vibrate Off 5 Tap Done 214 Getting sending and managing e mail Viewing and using the Reminders screen Your handheld displays a Reminders screen that shows summary information about new e mail messages and alerts from other applications such as alerts to remind you of Date Book appointments To view the Reminders screen m Tap the blinking asterisk kf in the upper left
109. next automatic send retry See Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications later in this chapter for icons that indicate messages awaiting the next automatic send retry as well as messages in the locked and error state Outbox icons in the VersaMail applications The icons to the left of a message in the Outbox indicate the message s status Message is waiting either to be manually sent or to be sent during the M next send retry You can edit move or delete a message in this state Send retry is currently in process you cannot edit move or delete a O message in this state Third automatic send retry has failed You must manually send a message in this state Completing drafts If you are composing an e mail message and you exit the VersaMail application before tapping Outbox Send or Cancel the e mail automatically moves to the Drafts folder To finish editing the e mail tap the folders pick list and select Drafts Select the e mail you want to complete or edit and tap Edit You can also delete the e mail in the Drafts folder 236 Getting sending and managing e mail Attaching a personal signature You can include a personal signature such as your name e mail address and telephone number with each e mail you send To create a personal signature 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options 3 Select Preferences 4 Tap Signature Preferences i General Advanced System Get w Subjects Only Ask
110. number If you need to dial an outside line prefix make sure you selected the Dial Prefix option on your handheld and entered the correct code If the telephone line you are using has Call Waiting make sure you selected the Disable call waiting option under Modem Sync Phone Setup on your handheld and entered the correct code Make sure the telephone line you are using is not noisy which can interrupt communications Check the batteries in your modem and replace them if necessary 458 HotSync problems I can t perform an IR HotSync m On a computer running Windows 98 be sure that the operation HotSync Manager is running that Infrared is selected on the HotSync Manager menu and that the Serial Port for local operations is set to the simulated port for infrared communication See Conducting IR HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for details m On a computer running Windows 2000 ME XP select IR in the HotSync Manager See Preparing your computer for infrared communication in Chapter 21 for details a Ona Mac computer make sure the infrared communications extensions have been installed in the Extensions folder inside the System folder Next open the HotSync Software Setup window and be sure that HotSync Manager is enabled and that the Local Setup Port is set to Infrared Port See Conducting IR HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for more information a On your handheld be sure the HotSync applicati
111. often is expressed using a 24 hour clock In the United States however time is expressed using a 12 hour clock with an AM or PM suffix All your handheld applications use the Country default settings You can however customize your own preferences as described in Time date week start and numbers formats later in this chapter To set the country default 1 From the General Preferences list select Formats 2 Tap the country name pick list Preferences Formats Preset to w United States Time HH MM am pm 3 58 am Date M D 2 11 02 Feb 11 2002 Week starts Sunday Numbers 1 000 00 3 Select the setting you want to use 4 Tap Done Time date week start and numbers formats The Time setting defines the format for the time of day The time format that you select appears in all applications on your handheld To select the time date week start and numbers format 1 From the General Preferences list select Formats 2 Tap the Time pick list and select a format 3 Tap the Date pick list and select a format 4 Tap the Week starts pick list and select whether you want the first day of the week to be Sunday or Monday This setting controls the Day Week and Month views in Date Book and all other aspects of your handheld that display a calendar 5 Tap the Numbers pick list and select formats for the decimal point and thousands separator 6 Tap Done 383 Chapter 22 S
112. only if you are unable to create a connection with Phone Link and you have already used the Connection Preferences screen to create a trusted pair for your phone high speed data network or LAN access point See Creating Bluetooth connections earlier in this chapter for additional information 410 Setting Communication Preferences To configure Internet access with a Bluetooth phone or LAN access point 1 2 From the Communications Preferences list select Network Tap the Service pick list and select the name of your ISP or network service See To select a network service profile earlier in this chapter for details If the name of your service does not appear on the list see Adding detailed information to a network service profile later in this chapter for information on adding an item to the Service pick list Enter your User Name and Password for your ISP or network service See Entering a user name and Entering a password earlier in this chapter for details Preferences Network v Service My ISP User Name mynetnam _ Enter the user name and password m you use to connect with your ISP Connection v BT to LAN Tap the Connection pick list and select a connection to a Bluetooth GSM phone a high speed wireless data network or a LAN access points for which you have already created a trusted pair The Connection name is based on the model of your phone if you
113. placed in the expansion card file list If you prefer to store these files on your handheld you can move them to the handheld file list When you drag and drop a folder Palm Quick Install looks at files in the first level of subfolders only it does not look at folders nested inside the subfolders 72 Installing and removing applications To install files in a different location start Palm Quick Install and drag the files to a different file list m You can also access the Palm Quick Install window by clicking Quick Install on the Palm Desktop Launch bar Installing applications and files on a Mac computer The Install Tool makes it easy to install applications and files during a HotSync operation You can specify whether to install the files on your handheld or on an expansion card To install add on software on your handheld using a Mac computer 1 On your Mac computer copy or download the application you want to install into the Add on folder in your Palm folder Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder From the HotSync menu select Install Handheld Files From the User pop up menu select the name that corresponds to your handheld 7 e088 Install Handheld Files User dkajiyama E o e a Destination PS Giraffe prc 19K Handheld B HARDBALL PRC 17K Handheld eE MINEHUNT PRC 9K Handheld PUZZLE PRC 4K Handheld E Remove From List FE SY tina Ppp h Tips
114. prerequisite for 180 synchronize only connection 179 Content latest web page 324 old web page 324 Continuous events deleting from Date Book 53 scheduling 101 Contrast control See Brightness control Controlling Internet access 340 Cookies definition 338 enabling or disabling 338 Copying notes into other applications 131 photos into other applications 137 text 52 text in Web Browser Pro 326 Country default setting 383 Cradle connecting to computer 14 for local HotSync operations 357 364 viewing data from 385 473 Index Creating Address Book entries 78 79 categories 44 45 57 currency symbols 123 custom fields in Address Book 85 Date Book events 95 e mail folders 228 229 Expense items 120 expense reports 125 notes for records 65 records 50 ShortCuts 440 signature 165 SMS messages 160 synchronize only e mail account 189 196 Currency default 123 defining 123 for Expense items 122 Current date 453 Current time 41 Custom currencies and symbols 123 fields in Address Book 85 Cutting text 52 text from web pages 326 Cycling through views 78 95 131 171 D Data entry See Entering data Databases backing up 299 downloading 322 upgrading a MultiMail database 178 Date displaying in World Clock 350 Expense item 121 setting current 345 381 453 To Do List record due 174 Date amp Time preferences 381 382 Date Book adding Address Book data to records 61 62 Agenda view 106 alarm 100 archi
115. quickly review your appointments and available time slots In addition the graphical display helps you spot overlaps and conflicts in your schedule To display the Week View 1 Tap the Week View icon B B Week View 2 Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a week at a time or tap on a column to display details of an event The Week View also shows untimed events and events that are before and after the range of times shown Continuous events appear in green with the Repeat icon qh Previous m Next week week Nov Dec 03 q Week 49 gt SM T W T F S Tap for that day 8 00 2 3 4 5 81 _ Diamond indicates untimed event 10 00 m O PERE m Bar indicates earlier event 12 00 2 00 4 00 L m Dashed line indicates continuous event Oo 600 E Bar indicates later event 3 Tap an event to show a description of the event Sat 12 6 03 10 00 am 11 00 am Event details Take Blade to Vet Appt g 4 8 00 4 10 00 j E E Tap to show event details 12 00 2 00 4 00 L O m 6 00 oO 4 104 Changing the Date Book view go Oe Keep the following points in mind To reschedule an event tap and drag the event to a different time or day Tap a blank time on any day to move to that day and select that time for a new event Tap any day or date that appears at the top of the Week View to move directly to that day without selecting an event
116. repeatedly to cycle through all your categories Tap the pick list in the upper right corner of the screen and select the category you want to display Press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category list press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight a category and then press Select on the navigator to view that category Changing the Applications Launcher display By default the Applications Launcher displays each application as an icon As an alternative you can choose to show a list of applications You can also choose to view the same category of applications each time you open the Applications Launcher To change the Applications Launcher display 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Options and then select Preferences 4 Tap the View By pick list and select List 5 Tap OK _ v All Address EB Calc Card Info Gj Date Book Dialer Documents Expense AZ Graffiti 2 HotSync Memo Pad Note Pad 29 Phone Link Photos E Prefs amp ToDo List Sms Voice Memo amp 4 VersaMail WorldClock lt amp WebPro To open the Applications Launcher to the last opened category 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Options and then select Preferences 4 Tap the Remember Last Category check box to select it 5 Tap OK 45 Chapter 4 Working with Applications Copying applications to or from an expansio
117. satisfied with your choice tap OK 334 Customizing Web Browser Pro Changing your home page Your home page is the web page that appears when you first open Web Browser Pro You can change your home page to any web address NOTE Your service provider has the option to disable this choice If the choice is disabled your changes have no effect To change your home page 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap Default 4 Do one of the following Enter the address of the new home page Tap Current URL to make the page currently displayed in Web Browser Pro your home page Preferences i Home Page Tap here to enter a new web address Optional Tap a button www com net org More to complete the web address Use the drop down list to choose one of the last five home pages you ve used as your home page Preferences i Default Default www www hotmail com waw yahoo com www google com om comf rer ora gt More 5 Tap OK 335 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Changing how images are downloaded Images in web pages can be very large You can make web pages download faster by reducing image quality or removing images altogether Alternatively if you have a fast Internet connection you can have images downloaded so that they appear at their highest quality To change how images are downloaded and displayed 1 Tap t
118. show the correct date I know I entered some records but they do not appear in the application I m having problems listing memos notes or voice memos the way I want to see them I created an event in Date Book but it doesn t appear in the Week View My vCard or vCal e mail attachment isn t forwarding correctly Solution Your handheld is not set to the current date Make sure the Set Date box on the Date and Time Preferences screen displays the current date See Date amp Time Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information m Check the Categories pick list upper right corner Select All to display all the records for the application m Check Security and confirm that Private Records is set to Show private records In To Do List tap Show and see if Show Only Due Items is selected Ifyou cannot manually arrange the order of memos notes or voice memos on the list screen select Preferences from the Options menu and make sure that Sort by is set to Manual m If you choose to view your memos notes or voice memos alphabetically on Palm Desktop software and then perform a HotSync operation the memos on your handheld still appear in the order defined in the Preferences setting In other words the sort settings you use with Palm Desktop software are not transferred to your handheld If you have two or more events with the same start time the first event created appears as a gray bar and any su
119. tap the Menu icon O Tap arrows to scroll to next and previous notes l 9 26 pm Call George AA 1of2 gt Unfiled 12 6 Review or edit the contents of the note 2 Select Options and then select Preferences The note title and the date you created the note appear in the Note Pad list If you did not assign a title to your note the time you created the note appears as the note title This makes it easy to locate and review your notes By default your notes appear with a white paper background and the ink from the pen is blue You can change the color of both the paper and the ink from the pen Your color selections apply to all your notes You cannot change the color settings for individual notes 133 Chapter 12 Using Note Pad 3 Tap Color Select Colors i MM Paper 00000 Hae armoa 4 Tap Pen and then tap the color of ink you want to use 5 Tap Paper and then tap the color of paper you want to use 6 Tap OK Setting an alarm for a note You can set an alarm for a specific time and date to remind you to follow up on a note To set an alarm for a note 1 Tap the note to which you want to assign an alarm 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Options and then select Alarm 4 Tap the Date box Set Date Jan Feb Mar Apr may Jun PAM Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Tap here to select month M T Tap here to select year 14 15 16 17
120. the Communications Preferences list select Connection 2 Tap New SEERY v connection Edit Connection Available Connections IR to a PC Handheld Name Custom Connect to Modem Via v Cradle Cable n Dialing TouchTone IR to Nokia6210 Serial to Nokia6210 Volume v Low Ren Ei Baer Tap here 3 Enter a name for the connection 4 Tap the Connect to pick list and select Modem 402 Setting Communication Preferences 5 Tap the Via pick list and select Bluetooth Edit Connection a Connect to You must select Modem rather than Phone Via in the Connect to field to connect with a non GSM phone Device p Dialing w TouchTone Volume w Low 6 Prepare your phone to accept a Bluetooth connection NOTE See the documentation that was included with your phone for how to prepare your phone to accept a Bluetooth connection The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pairing or a Bluetooth link 7 Tap the Device box The discovery process begins and the discovery screen appears 8 When the Discovery Results screen appears select the phone with which you want to connect and then tap OK Discovery Results Select a device Lars Motorola Phone Tap here to select the phone with which you want to connect Tap Find More to discover additional phones 9 Create a trusted pair with the phone See Adding trusted devices earlier in th
121. the duration of the repeating event If you change the repeat interval of a repeating event such as from daily to weekly previous occurrences of that event are not changed and your handheld creates a new repeating event If you change the date of an occurrence of a repeating event such as from January 14 to January 15 and apply the change to all occurrences the new date becomes the start date of the repeating event Your handheld adjusts the end date to maintain the duration of the event If you apply the change to current and future occurrences past occurrences are not changed If you change other settings of a repeating event such as time alarm private and apply the change to all occurrences your handheld creates a new event The start date of this new event is the day on which the setting is changed If you apply a change to a single occurrence of a repeating event such as time that occurrence no longer shows the Repeat icon m Changing the Date Book view In addition to displaying the time list for a specific day you can also display a whole week a month or an agenda To cycle through Day Week Month and Agenda views Press the Date Book application button repeatedly to display the next view Tap the appropriate view icon in the lower left corner of Date Book 103 Chapter 8 Using Date Book Working in Week View Week View shows the calendar of your events for an entire week You can use this view to
122. the file type Palm Quick Install determines whether to install the files on your handheld or on an expansion card You can use any of the following methods to install applications and files with Palm Quick Install m Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop m Drag and drop files onto the Palm Quick Install window m Use the commands or buttons in the Palm Quick Install window m Right click a file and send it to Palm Quick Install The procedures that follow explain how to install applications and files using each of these methods To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install icon 1 Copy or download the application s or file s you want to install onto your computer 2 From My Computer or Windows Explorer select the file s or folder that you want to install 69 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 3 Drag and drop the file s or folder onto the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop ade Palm Quick Install displays a confirmation dialog box that shows whether the files will be installed on your handheld or on an expansion card and you can choose the user name to which the files will be installed 4 Click OK The selected files are placed in the Handheld or Expansion Card file list based on the file extension 5 Perform a HotSync operation to install the files See Chapter 21 for details NOTE Files that remain in the list after you pe
123. the following occurs m When you turn off the power a Ata time you specify m After a period of inactivity you specify To set your handheld to lock when you turn it off 1 Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box Preferences Security Password Tap here Current Privacy Level Hide Private Records 2 Enter your password 3 Select On power off Lock Handheld Automatically lock handheld On power off Select On power off After a preset delay Your handheld will lock when it is turned off 4 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change 429 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld To set your handheld to lock at a preset time 1 Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box Preferences Security Pas Aut Handheld Tap here Current Privacy Level Hide Private Records 2 Enter your password 3 Select At a preset time and then use the arrows to set the time Lock Handheld Automatically lock handheld Set Time Ata abet time A a it After a preset delay Pierre Pine ka v ara Pm Your handheld will lock at gt 11 00 pm 4 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change To set your handheld to lock after a period of inactivity 1 Tap the Auto Lock Handheld box Preferences Security Password Auto Lock Handheld 7 Tap here Current Privacy Level
124. time However you may want to turn off the IR port when you re not using it to improve performance of HotSync operations To return to local serial cradle cable HotSyne operations on a Mac computer 1 If necessary connect the cradle cable to a serial port on your computer 2 Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder 3 In the HotSync Controls tab select Enabled 364 Conducting modem HotSync operations 4 Click the Connection Settings tab and select the correct connection 5 Close the HotSync Software Setup window The next time you want to perform a HotSync operation just press the HotSync button on the cradle cable as you always did before Conducting modem HotSync operations You can use a modem to synchronize your handheld when you are away from your computer IMPORTANT You must perform the first HotSync operation by using a local direct connection or infrared communication After that you can perform a modem HotSync operation To perform a modem HotSync operation you need the following A modem connected to your computer m Palm Desktop software configured for use with the modem A modem connected to your handheld m A configuration for the kind of modem connection you want to make See Connection Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information Preparing your computer for a modem HotSync operation There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your computer for a mod
125. title area at the top of the screen Tap the title area EEZ Edit Options New Memo Delete Memo Bear Memo _Tap the Menu icon In this example three menus are available Record Edit and Options The Record menu is selected and contains the commands New Memo Delete Memo Beam Memo and Send Memo 48 Using menus Choosing a menu The menus and menu commands that are available depend on the application that is currently open Also the menus and menu commands vary depending on which part of the application you re currently using For example in Memo Pad the menus are different for the Memo list screen and the Memo record screen To select a menu command with the stylus 1 Open the menu bar for an application 2 Tap the menu that contains the command you want to use 3 Tap the command you want to use TIP After you open the menu bar you can also press Right and Left on the navigator to select a menu press Down on the navigator to select the command you want to use and then press Select on the navigator to run the command Graffiti 2 menu commands Most menu commands have an equivalent Graffiti 2 Command stroke which is similar to the keyboard shortcuts used to execute commands on computers The command letters appear to the right of the command names Menu commands Command letters Keyboard Graffiti 2 Help G When you draw th
126. which Conformity is Declared EMC standard ETSI 300 826 Radio standard ETSI 300 328 2 Safety standard EN69950 Manufacturer s Name Palm Inc Manufacturer s Location 400 N McCarthy Boulevard Milpitas CA 95035 USA Importer s Name Palm Germany GmbH Importer s Location Landsberger Strasse 155 D 80687 Munchen Germany Type of Equipment Palm handheld with Bluetooth capability Model Number Tungsten T2 Year of Manufacture 2003 Applicable countries complying with this declaration Austria Belgium Denmark Finland France Germany Greece Iceland Ireland Italy Luxembourg Norway Portugal Spain Sweden Switzerland Holland UK I the undersigned hereby declare that the equipment specified above conforms to the above Directive s and Standard s Place Milpitas CA Date April 21 2003 Typed Name David Woo Title Global Compliance Manager 469 Product Regulatory Information Taiwan Statement Article 14 Unless approved for any model accredited low power radio frequency electric machinery any company trader or user shall not change the frequency increase the power or change the features and functions of the original design Article 17 Any use of lower power radio frequency electric machinery shall not affect the aviation safety and interfere with legal communications In even that any interference is found the use of such electric machinery shall be stopped immediately and reusing of su
127. with the M button is added to the total already stored in memory The number that you add can be either a calculated value or any number you enter by pressing the number buttons Pressing this button has no effect on the current calculation or series of calculations it merely places the value into memory until it is recalled Recalls the stored value from memory and inserts it in the current calculation Clears any value that is stored in the Calculator memory Calculates the square root of a number Enter the number and then tap the square root button Viewing Recent Calculations The Recent Calculations command enables you to review the last series of calculations and is particularly useful for confirming a series of chain calculations To display recent calculations 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Options and then select Recent Calculations Recent Calculations 86 666667 86 666667 3 After you finish reviewing the calculations tap OK 88 Using Calculator menus Using Calculator menus The Calculator menu is shown here for your reference and Calculator features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands Options menu Edit RAE Recent Calculations l About Calculator About Calculator Shows version information for Calculator 89 Chapter 6 Using Calculator 90 Usi
128. you learn the procedures for creating letters numbers punctuation and symbols as well as some Graffiti 2 tips and tricks Most people find they can enter text quickly and accurately with only minutes of practice Graffiti 2 writing includes any character you can type on a standard keyboard The Graffiti 2 characters closely resemble the letters of the regular alphabet which makes Graffiti 2 writing easy to learn Graffiti 2 writing is different from the writing software found on earlier Palm handhelds For example some characters are formed using a single stroke while others are formed with more than one stroke There are four basic concepts for success with Graffiti 2 writing a If you draw the character shape exactly as shown in the tables later in this chapter like the shapes shown in the following diagram you can increase the accuracy of your writing ABCDE 24 Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data a The heavy dot on each shape shows where to begin the stroke Certain characters have similar shapes but different beginning and end points Always begin the stroke at the heavy dot You should not create the heavy dot it is there only to show you where to begin the stroke m Graffiti 2 includes symbols made with a single stroke and symbols made with multiple strokes With some multi stroke symbols the first stroke is the same as a single stroke symbol As a result the down stroke for the letter i cannot be r
129. your To Do task HTML handheld for the attachment file type either use the default graphic and soon viewer shown or select a viewer from the list For example if you have two photo viewing applications on your handheld and you select a photo attachment on the list the Viewer pick list appears containing the names of the photo viewing applications Tap the pick list and select the application you want to use to view the photo attachment If there is only one viewer registered for the attachment file type the viewer is shown without a list Palm OS Tap the name of the attachment you want and then tap application Install The file installs automatically or database file pre or pdb Attachments ee sa Viewer pick list is displayed only if handheld has Size 25k Viewer multiple viewers registered for attachment file Type MSWc MMWordPlugin type Button displays View or Install depending on the attachment file type 244 Getting sending and managing e mail 4 When you have finished viewing or installing the attachment tap Done This returns you to the Attachments dialog box where you can select another attachment if you want to If there is no Done button on the attachment screen tap the VersaMail icon amp in the Applications Launcher to return to the Inbox of the account you were in 5 When you have finished viewing or installing all attachments tap Done on the Attachments dialog box This retu
130. your e mail message in the e mail application For more information on composing e mail messages in the VersaMail application see Chapter 17 3 Tap Send to send the e mail message Outbox to send the e mail message later or Cancel You are returned to Web Browser Pro and to the web page you were viewing Beaming a URL You can share your favorite web pages with other Web Browser Pro users by beaming URLs to their handhelds 327 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro To beam a web page s URL 1 Navigate to the web page 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Point the IR port of your handheld directly at the IR port of the receiving device 4 Tap Beam URL in the Page menu DEMA Edit Options y Open URL AN f Bookmark URL E View Bookmarks cer ncedsanenitedst sess eae atebecuncr ieeedsdetenotenacetens g View Saved Pages Pn Page Info Disconnect fg Googe Seay N eem LUUR Y Advanced Search e Preferences bd The receiver can choose to accept the beamed URL or not If they choose not to accept the URL the beaming process ends 5 While the URL is prepared for beaming a message is displayed 6 While the URL is being beamed a message is displayed When the message closes the URL is finished being beamed to the receiving handheld E mailing a URL You can also e mail the URLs of your favorite web pages to other users To e mail a web page s URL 1 Navigate
131. your passkey is rejected your phone may have a preassigned passkey see the documentation included with your phone for information The documentation might refer to a Bluetooth connection as a Bluetooth pair or a Bluetooth link If you need additional information about pairing your phone and handheld refer to the Phone Pairing Handbook at www palm com support globalsupport My handheld cannot connect to Use the following steps to test the connection my mobile phone 1 2 3 4 Tap the Home icon Select the Phone Link icon amp Tap Connect If the connection is successful open the application that requires the connection and complete the desired task If the connection is not successful try the steps that follow Ifyou have a Bluetooth phone you may need to go through the pairing process on both your handheld and your phone See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 for information on completing the pairing process on your handheld See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the pairing process on your phone If you need additional information about connecting your phone refer to the Phone Pairing Handbook at www palm com support globalsupport Make sure the Connection for your mobile phone is selected in the Connection Preferences screen and the Phone Preferences screen Ifyou are using a Bluetooth connection make sure that your phone is equipped wi
132. 0 centimeters approximately 1 foot of your face while recording A tone sounds to indicate that recording has started 2 Face your handheld and begin speaking 3 Release the Voice Memo application button to stop recording A tone sounds to indicate that recording has stopped 4 Optional Select the time at the top of the screen and enter a title 308 Creating a voice memo 5 Optional Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner and select the category where you want to store the voice memo TIP To automatically store voice memos on an expansion card see Storing voice memos on an expansion card later in this chapter 4d 1of1 gt Unfiled Enter title here 2 32 pm 7 8 00 00 00 00 00 12 Tap to create another voice memo 6 Tap Done Pausing and resuming a voice memo recording To pause and resume while recording a voice memo you must use the onscreen controls This section covers how to use the onscreen controls to pause and resume while recording a voice memo To pause and restart while creating a voice memo 1 In the Voice Memo list tap New 2 Optional Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner and select the category in which you want to store the voice memo TIP To automatically store voice memos on an expansion card see Storing voice memos on an expansion card later in this chapter 309 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo Tap Record
133. 0 seconds perform a soft reset Perform a soft reset See Resetting your handheld in Appendix A Tapping and writing problems Problem When I tap the buttons or screen icons my handheld activates the wrong feature When I tap the Menu icon O nothing happens I can t get my handheld to recognize my handwriting Solution Calibrate the screen See Digitizer Preferences in Chapter 22 Not all applications or screens have menus Try changing to a different application For your handheld to recognize handwriting input with the stylus you need to use Graffiti 2 writing See Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data in Chapter 3 Make the Graffiti 2 character strokes in the Graffiti 2 writing area not on the display part of the screen If you want to write on the display part of the screen you must turn on and activate Writing Area Preferences See Full screen writing area in Chapter 3 Write Graffiti 2 strokes for lowercase letters in the left side strokes for capital letters in the middle and strokes for numbers in the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area Make sure that Graffiti 2 is not in shift mode See Symbols and other special characters in Chapter 3 See Graffiti 2 tips in Chapter 3 for tips on increasing your accuracy when you write Graffiti 2 characters 452 Application problems Application problems Problem I tapped the Today button but it does not
134. 07 Owner preferences 424 425 P Pages See Web pages Palm Photos albums 144 145 beaming photos 145 copying photos 143 copying photos into other applications 137 deleting photos 146 desktop software 146 List view 138 menus 147 opening 137 organizing photos 141 143 photo details 140 rotating photos 140 slide show 139 thumbnail view 138 481 Index thumbnails 137 viewing photos 137 Palm Quick Install 69 73 PalmModem accessory prerequisite for connection 180 Passkeys 152 entering to create a trusted pair with a phone 152 462 Passwords 426 428 changing 426 changing in VersaMail 284 creating 426 deleting 426 editing in e mail account 196 entering in Web Browser Pro 325 for network 406 forgotten 465 VersaMail 184 Pasting notes into other applications 131 photos into other applications 137 text 52 text from a web page 326 Payment Expense item 122 PDBs 322 Pen stroke full screen 422 423 Peripheral hardware 14 Personal preferences 380 420 442 Buttons 421 423 Color Theme 424 Owner 424 Security 425 428 Shortcuts 440 Phone connection problems 462 463 creating a trusted pair 402 downloading messages from 161 entering ISP information 411 entering passkey 152 462 Lookup 61 62 numbers selecting for Address list 80 numbers selecting types 79 preferences 420 settings for ISP or dial in server 407 409 Phone Link Bluetooth connection 149 158 creating connections with 150 156 entering passkey 462 overvi
135. 1 Hardware add ons 14 Help Graffiti 2 52 online tips 19 onscreen keyboard 319 Hiding records 433 History list clearing 334 definition 333 limit 333 Home page changing 335 returning to 322 Host name 341 Host server changing 341 HotSync Bluetooth operations 370 372 buttons preferences 423 conduits for synchronizing applications 354 355 446 447 conduits for synchronizing applications Mac 356 customizing 355 356 first time operation 357 361 376 378 IR operation 361 365 linking to external files 39 375 local operation 352 357 456 local operation on Mac 360 modem operation 353 365 369 457 458 modem settings 366 network operation 372 375 operations using cradle 364 398 operations using IR port 361 364 399 400 performing wireless HotSync operation 372 problems with 454 460 problems with IR 459 restoring data 446 447 selecting HotSync operations on your handheld 371 372 setting options 351 353 starting Manager 260 synchronize active accounts 260 synchronizing e mail 277 user profiles 376 using with another PIM 76 Hyperlink See Link Icons Add Remove Programs 76 alarm 100 application 18 45 Back 322 beam 36 Brightness 13 broken envelope 215 CD ROM 7 Clock 18 Desktop Installer 7 Find 60 for e mail messages 217 236 Forward 322 Home Page 322 HotSync Manager 73 260 lock 35 menu 50 note 65 on handheld buttons 12 online Tips 19 Open URL 320 paperclip 217 Quick Connect 81 Qui
136. 1 Insert the Desktop Software CD ROM into the CD ROM drive on your computer 2 Double click the Desktop Software CD ROM icon on your desktop 3 Double click the Palm Desktop Installer icon 4 From the Easy Install screen select Uninstall from the pop up menu 5 Select the software you want to remove 6 Click Uninstall 7 Select the folder that contains your Palm Desktop software files 8 Click Remove 9 Restart your computer 76 Using Address Book Address Book enables you to keep names addresses phone numbers and other information about your personal or business contacts Use Address Book to do the following Quickly look up or enter names addresses phone numbers and other information See Finding information in Chapter 4 for details Enter up to five phone numbers home work mobile fax and so on or e mail addresses for each name Dial a phone number and send an e mail or SMS message directly from Address Book using the Quick Connect feature See Making connections from Address Book later in this chapter Define which phone number appears in the Address list for each Address Book entry Attach a note to each Address Book entry in which you can enter additional information about the entry Assign Address Book entries to categories so that you can organize and view entries in logical groups Create your own digital business card that you can beam or send to other devices with an ap
137. 13 Using Palm Photos Viewing photos in Thumbnail view Thumbnail view displays miniature versions of your photos so that you can see several photos on the screen at the same time Use this view to browse through photos or to locate a photo when you don t know the name of the photo To view photos in Thumbnail view 1 Tap the Thumbnail icon Ei v Camera Album pick list Select a photo to view Thumbnail icon 2 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner and select the album you want to view 3 Tap the thumbnail of the photo you want to view TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the O navigator to insert the highlight press Up Down Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to view the photo 4 Tap anywhere on the screen to return to Thumbnail view Viewing photos in List view List view displays a list of your photos so that you can see the names and dates associated with your photos Use this view to locate a photo when you know the name or the date the photo was created 138 Viewing photos To view photos in List view 1 Tap the List icon El 2 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner and select the album you want to view Tap and drag divider to resize columns List icon Set4_010 10 05 02 Set4_011 10 05 02 Set4_012 10 05 02 Set4_013 10 05 02 Set4_014 10 05 02 w
138. 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 2 Tap No to stop downloading and return to the Message screen Tap Yes to continue downloading the entire message with attachment Get Message The remaining message and or attachment is 392K Do you want to continue to download it 3 Optional Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message screen When downloading is complete the paper clip icon appears and the More button is no longer displayed Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter To download multiple attachments whose total size exceeds the maximum message size 1 Tap the red paper clip icon Inbox iof gt 1E From Joe Sadusky lt jms5 10 hotmail com gt Subj files for your review please see attached and get back to me by COB dd photos to your e mail with MSN 8 Get 2 months FREE 2 Select one of the following To return to the Message screen tap Cancel To view any fully downloaded attachments without continuing to download additional attachments tap No Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter To continue downloading all messages tap Yes Get Attachment There are additional attachment s The remaining message and or attachment s is 119K Do you want to download them now 3 Optional Tap Cancel to stop downloading and return to the Message scre
139. 2 26 Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data Graffiti 2 alphabet The Graffiti 2 alphabet consists of the following letters Draw letters on LEFT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Letter Strokes Letter Strokes yA 7 7 E F G G H i ar g C Tke Q L i ae o G P 2 Q 4 R R s s T A U Y vV V W lt fax 4 Zz TIP A full screen pen stroke brings up Graffiti 2 Help on your handheld See Pen Preferences in Chapter 22 for details 27 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld Capital letters Graffiti 2 writing automatically capitalizes the first letter of a new record or sentence but you can also write additional capital letters NOTE To cancel the automatic capitalization of the first letter of a new record or sentence draw two Punctuation Shift strokes before drawing the first letter For more information see Symbols and other special characters later in this chapter To write additional capital letters m Draw the same stroke shapes used for a lowercase letter but write across the division line in the middle of the Graffiti 2 writing area or ABC 6 MN i 123 Division marks Graffiti 2 numbers Writing numbers with Graffiti 2 writing is similar to writing letters of the alphabet except that you make the character strokes on the right side numbers side of the Graffiti 2 wri
140. 2 application 44 45 assigning records to 55 56 beaming 33 35 bookmarks 329 creating 57 default 44 55 displaying 56 85 453 merging 58 renaming 57 saved web pages 332 sending 37 using in Applications Launcher 44 45 Cc field 231 Chain calculations 88 Characters Graffiti 2 24 Charging handheld 6 Check boxes 19 Clearing cache 339 Calculator entries 87 History list 334 reminders 215 Color Theme preferences 424 Combining categories 58 Comma delimited files importing data from 38 Command buttons 19 equivalents Graffiti 2 writing 49 stroke 36 49 62 toolbar 49 Command toolbar activating 49 in VersaMail 297 Communication preferences 379 Bluetooth 389 397 Connection 398 403 Network 403 420 Phone 420 Compressing Day view 109 images 336 Conduits account information screens 271 for modem HotSync operations 369 for synchronizing applications 455 for synchronizing applications Mac 356 shortcuts 272 SSL and 278 for synchronizing applications 354 355 446 447 synchronizing multiple accounts 278 Conflicting events 107 Connecting service templates 404 to server or ISP 410 to the Internet 319 with a GPRS network 400 402 403 413 with anon GSM phone 402 403 with a phone 400 403 Connection mobile phone 317 modifying Web Browser Pro preferences 340 preferences 398 403 preferences for Bluetooth 407 requirements 317 Connection types changing in e mail account 284 modem sled prerequisite for 180 PalmModem accessory
141. 2 gt Jan Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec SM TW T FS Tap a date to select it 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3 10 11 12 OF tap Today 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 Gp 4 Tap Delete 5 Optional Tap Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the message from the server now Delete Confirmation Delete message s from the handheld O Also delete message s on server 6 Tap OK Emptying the trash Deleted e mail accumulates in the Trash folder and takes up space on your handheld To increase memory you should empty the trash regularly If you want to automatically empty the trash you can set a preference to empty the trash immediately or empty any e mail older than a certain number of days To empty the trash 1 Tap the Menu icon and then select Empty Trash from the Message menu Empty Trash Delete messages from both the handheld and the server or from just the handheld NOTE If Auto Empty Mail from Trash is selected in VersaMail Preferences a message asks if you want to delete the trash 254 Getting sending and managing e mail 2 Optional Tap Details to see how many messages are in the trash and whether the messages are set to be deleted on the server Empty Trash There is 1 message out ofa totalof1 inthe Trash that will also be deleted on the server 3 Ifyou want to delete messages from the handheld as well as from the server
142. 2 Handheld Step 5 Perform a HotSync operation Windows When prompted place your handheld in the cradle cable and press the HotSync button Mac After the installation finishes place your handheld in the cradle cable and press the HotSync button Tip You can also perform a HotSync operation using Bluetooth communication For more information see Performing a Bluetooth HotSync operation in Chapter 21 Step 6 Register your handheld Windows When the first HotSync operation is complete the installer displays screens where you can select product registration options After you complete these screens the Congratulations screen appears Macintosh When the first HotSync operation is complete double click the Palm Desktop software icon in the Palm folder inside the Applications folder by default to access screens where you can select product registration options After you complete these screens the Congratulations screen appears Congratulations You ve set up your handheld installed Palm Desktop software performed your first HotSync operation and registered your handheld If you re using a Windows computer you also created your handheld business card For comprehensive information about using your handheld continue reading this electronic handbook For more information about using Palm Desktop software see the following m The online help for Palm Desktop software To access the online help go to th
143. 2 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 3 Tap the check box for Mask password entry Security Options i Options Password Tap here A Mask password entry M Quick password delay time limit 5 sec 4 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change Setting the quick password delay time limit You can set a quick password delay time limit to accommodate your personal preference After the delay limit has been reached you must enter the full password For more information about the quick password see Changing or deleting a password earlier in this chapter To set the quick password delay time limit 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the check box for Quick password delay time limit Security Options i Options Password IY Mask password entry Tap here A Quick password delay time limit 2 sec Enter delay time limit 3 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change 428 Setting Personal Preferences Locking your handheld You can lock your handheld so that it cannot be operated until your password is entered In the event that your handheld is lost or stolen this helps protect your data from unauthorized use You can set your handheld to lock automatically or you can lock it manually Locking your handheld automatically You can set your handheld to lock automatically when any one of
144. 4 Minimum requirements Windows computers 000000 eee 4 Minimum requirements Mac computers suaus ead Kone eae ow lt 4 4 Internet access requirements sce iw dur soln sson n nenn rnrn rnnr 5 Upgrade information s ess csrsksceni surts imi Ereet i eE Ei Ea 5 Step 1 Connect the HotSync cradle cable to the computer 5 Step 2 Charge your handheld oc iiss edie vterdas ceeedeskebedos Rubavew eS 6 Step 3 Set up your handheld 2 ai oat aye eh cea eee heat eee eh 6 Step 4 Install SoftWare ic ssipneede een eete sen aE E RA E AE EE te 7 Step 5 Perform a HotSync operation s susse rse rrn rrer r rrene 8 Step 6 Register your handheld cvics vececek Pee eae eo ece tee ead Tae 8 Conpratulanions sai sdieniavdietdyedn rieguds eteedis vibe wbx hbevewrs 8 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld 0 0e eee eeeee 9 Locating handheld components cs 2 2 ctu ees stve Sti eek eei ie te sas eins 10 Opening and closing your handheld unan c cece eee 10 Locating front panel controls 10 4 2 4 eter es teeta Gecawa ek Serie es bes 11 Locating top panel Components iccus evens ine en Serge ender anwdges 12 Adjusting screen brightness 40 354055005 eds 4es He eee eRe eee 13 Locating back panel components 2 ci sce ee tenes enieeeeehieeds 14 Using the protective cover svi kuin wre ber bee bewakwe ews beeen ees 15 Adding an expansion card siutebus vaya dds eww eeaeee Hebeea ce bee y 16 Tapping
145. 4 02 4 09 pm message 14085553397 Cancel our 3p 14085553333 Did you see th When is the flight to Austin Done Reply Delete 3 Tap the message you want to view 4 Tap one of the following Done Reply Delete Returns to the list view Creates a message to the sender and copies any selected text into the new message Moves the message to the Trash category 162 Viewing messages To view data messages in your Inbox 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner 2 Tap Inbox ke 1 unread 14085556397 14085558388 14085556497 14085550347 Staff meeting Yep lt sago Cancel our 3p Did you see th Send amp Check 3 Tap the message you want to view Transfer Do you want to accept Driving directions into Memo Pad Category Unfiled 4 Tap Yes to add the data to the appropriate application or tap No to view the raw data To view messages in your Outbox or Archive categories 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner 2 Tap Outbox or tap Archive Unsent message Sent message sms 1 unsent v Outbox 114085551777 14085557767 14085551212 iAsk Dan about It s a go iWhen is the fli Send amp Check 3 Tap the message you want to view 4 Tap one of the following Done Edit Delete Returns to the list view Ope
146. 6 Tithe Bertolli Marcus 213 422 1363 Company Bruce Jeremy 408 459 1279 w Work Butler Richard 516 626 1424 w Home Cain Cathy 650 235 6222 Mabile Carpenter Joan 718 824 1548 E mail Carter Melanie 212 395 6277 w Other Chu Byron 213 343 9801 Address Conner Sandy 301 933 683 yl itv aaa LOOK UP ss Tap New 3 Enter the last name of the person you want to add to your Address Book The handheld automatically capitalizes the first letter of each field except numeric and e mail fields You do not have to use the Graffiti 2 capital stroke to capitalize the first letter of the name 4 Tap the First Name field 5 Enter the first name of the person in the First Name field Creating an Address Book entry 6 Enter the other information that you want to include in this entry As you enter letters in the Title Company City and State fields text appears for the first logical match that exists in your Address Book As you enter more letters a closer match appears For example you may already have Sacramento and San Francisco in your Address Book As you enter S Sacramento appears and as you continue entering a and n San Francisco replaces Sacramento As soon as the word you want appears tap the next field to accept the word 7 Tap the scroll arrows to move to the next page of information 8 After you finish entering information tap Done Address Edit Business
147. 8 Jumping to another web page 321 K Keyboard computer 37 onscreen 18 23 319 422 portable 40 shortcuts in VersaMail 304 L LED 13 387 Letters font style 66 Graffiti 2 24 27 onscreen keyboard 23 Link colors changing 337 definition 321 downloading files 323 unvisited links 337 visited links 337 See also Connection List in Applications Launcher 45 Location adding 347 348 deleting 349 displaying secondary 350 modifying 348 setting primary 344 346 381 setting secondary 347 Locking the handheld with a password 423 424 429 431 Logging informational errors 260 Login scripts ISP 181 network 416 418 Looking up Address Book data to add to other records 61 62 scrolling in Address list 59 Lost handheld contact for 79 records 453 Lost password 432 Lotus Notes selecting as mail client 263 Lotus Organizer importing data from 38 479 Index M Mail server settings changing 287 Mail service default service for e mail account 204 205 285 Mail settings changing e mail address 286 changing mail server settings 287 changing protocol type 284 changing username and password 284 managing 283 Mailbox adding new 182 Mailto links 327 Maintenance information 443 Marking messages unread read 256 Masking private records 434 Maximum cache size 339 Maximum message size incoming e mail 186 193 200 POP and IMAP server 287 Memo Pad adding Address Book data to records 61 62 archive files mpa 38 categorizi
148. 87 388 lists 67 Index preset 109 setting in Date Book 100 setting in Note Pad 134 setting in Voice Memo 313 setting in World Clock 349 sound 109 214 350 387 452 Vibrate setting 387 388 Alerting for new mail 213 Alphabet Graffiti 2 writing 27 onscreen keyboard 18 APOP adding to an account 288 291 293 and synchronization 263 requirement 181 287 Application buttons 12 41 78 95 111 131 171 421 Applications Address Book 77 beaming 33 35 Calculator 87 Card Info 91 categories 44 45 Date Book 95 Dialer 111 downloading 322 Expense 119 font style 66 installing 68 74 Launcher 41 45 Memo Pad 127 Note Pad 131 opening 42 Palm Photos 137 Phone Link 149 plug in 418 preferences for 50 removing 75 sending data from 166 size in kilobytes 465 SMS 159 471 Index To Do List 171 VersaMail 177 version of 465 viewing as icons 45 viewing as list 45 Voice Memo 307 Web Browser Pro 317 World Clock 343 See also Add on applications Archive files importing data from 37 for main applications 38 messages in SMS 163 saving deleted records 53 saving purged records 54 Attaching a signature to messages 188 195 202 Attachments 163 attaching files from an expansion card 249 attaching files from applications 247 downloading 258 icon for 217 saving to expansion card 247 selecting plug ins 275 sending 233 using Documents To Go 274 276 Audio files 69 72 Auto get mail 209
149. ESMTP to an account m Setting advanced e mail account options m Cutting and copying text from an e mail message for use in other applications m Using the command bar m Viewing e mail header details m Backing up your mail databases m Synchronizing IMAP folders wirelessly m Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL The section ends with a summary of the VersaMail application navigator controls and keyboard shortcuts Managing mail filters Filters provide efficient ways to manage e mail retrieval and storage When you tap Get Mail or Get amp Send filters determine which e mail messages are downloaded to your handheld and in which folder the downloaded messages are stored For example you may want to file e mail about sales meetings in a Sales folder You can create a filter that automates this action so that whenever you receive e mail about sales meetings it is immediately sent to the Sales folder which you created in the filters screen Creating mail filters To create a mail filter you select various criteria such as To From and Contains This information makes up the filter statement For example if you want stock quotes from your online brokerage service sent to a folder you created called Finance you can filter those e mail messages and store them in the Finance folder The filter statement which is displayed in the Filter Editor is shown in the following figure Filter Editor i Name Quotes Ifthe From v Contai
150. Every Time Confirm Deletions O Delete Msgs on Server I Download Attachments Receive Format HTML 5 Tap the Attach Signature check box to select it Signature Attach Signature Sam Yahoo Marketing Director 555 555 5555 6 Enter your signature information 7 Tap OK Forwarding e mail You can quickly forward e mail messages from any folder other than the Outbox folder To forward e mail 1 Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the e mail 2 Tap the e mail message to display it 237 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 3 Tap the Forward button lt 1of1 gt El From Travis Washington N lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site check this out www futurefacing com tw Tap Forward 4 Tap To 5 On the Recipient List screen enter or look up the recipient address See the procedure for creating new e mail earlier in this chapter for more information on addressing messages Forward Message Joanna Kwan Subj fwd cool site See below from T 1 Travis Washington lt trwashjr hotmail com gt wrote check this out lt CoE 6 Optional Enter some text describing the forwarded message 7 Tap Send to send the message or tap Outbox to store it in the Outbox NOTE Forwarded messages are always sent as text only even if you received the original message in HTML form
151. Hide Private Records 2 Enter your password 430 Setting Personal Preferences 3 Select After a preset delay Lock Handheld Automatically lock handheld Never On power off After a preset delay Select After a preset delay Your handheld will lock if inactive for Tap to select Minutes or Hours 1 mi Hour s Enter the amount of time 4 Enter the inactive period and then select Minute s or Hour s from the pick list 5 Tap OK NOTE You need to turn off and then turn on your handheld before this change is enabled IMPORTANT If you lock your handheld you must enter the exact password to reactivate your handheld If you forget the password your handheld will present the hint you have entered to help you remember the password If you still cannot remember the password you must perform a hard reset to resume using your handheld Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your handheld however you can restore all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation See Performing a hard reset in Appendix A for more information Locking your handheld manually You can turn off and lock your handheld manually To lock and turn off your handheld 1 Tap Lock amp Turn Off Preferences Security Current Privacy Level Hide Private Records Tap Lock and Turn Off 2 To use your handheld turn it on and then enter the password 431 Chapt
152. If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users you may want to create a user profile See Creating a user profile later in this chapter before performing the following steps IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with a local direct connection or with infrared communication rather than with a modem The following steps assume that you have already installed Palm Desktop software See Step 4 Install software in Chapter 1 if you have not installed this software 359 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations To perform a local HotSync operation on a Mac computer 1 Place your handheld in the HotSync cradle cable 2 Make sure that HotSync Manager is enabled Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder Click the HotSync Controls tab and make sure the Enabled option is selected 3 Press the HotSync button on the cradle cable The HotSync Progress dialog box appears followed by the Select User dialog box 360 Conducting IR HotSync operations 4 In the Select User dialog box select the user name you entered when you installed the Palm Desktop software and click OK Select User Please select a user User dkajiyama xa New User Cancel 6 OK Shown with Mac OS X The HotSync Progress dialog box reappears and synchronization begins HotSync Progress Status
153. Jul23 gt a 10 00 Work on project 1 00 Working Lunch with Anne 2 00 Take a walk 2 30 File weekly reports 3 35 Return all calls 4 45 Project presentation w All O 1 Call David a Ef 1 Send flowers to M O 1 Write thank you note to Vickie O 2 Pick up fresh vegetables Day with appointments 8 30 am q Tue Jul23 gt No Appointments Today w All 1 Call David 1 Send flowers to M 1 Write thank you note to Vickie 2 Pick up fresh vegetables 2 Drop off library books 4 Smog the car 5 Check out www palm com m wy oO oO o o o Same day without appointments NOTE You can also change the category of To Do items shown Tap the pick list to select another category See Chapter 16 for more information on working with To Do items 106 Spotting event conflicts Spotting event conflicts With the ability to define specific start and end times for any event it s possible to schedule events that overlap an event that starts before a previous event finishes An event conflict time overlap appears in the Week View as overlapping bars The first event created appears as a gray bar and any subsequent conflicting events appear as a single red bar The Day View displays overlapping red brackets to the left of the conflicting times The Month View displays conflicting appointments in red Peery 4 Week 1p Jan 2 04 MMs S M TW T F S 8 00 28 29 30 31 1 2 3 9 00 Staff meeting 8 00 eo B
154. L peetetorertetiiesst akerai rakei t eiae ei ees 327 F mailing a URD scssi sie cee rube chords nieni redet eR ET EET Kee HOR 328 Bookmarking your favorite pages 0 cece cece eee eee 329 Adding bookmark tna ie ot og esr SEL ee GREE ee een uea 329 Visiting a bookmarked page lt iusnceearewne diese ieei rruna sw ae eaeas 329 Editing information about a bookmark 00 eee eee 330 Deleting a bookmark lt oscksutaes Foxvte sous vedere d eerie sense 330 PAVING PARCS ecse neier his acdsee sE le ewes E EN 331 SAVING aA PAO sri cite tees cetyl eee Ee ch oe ee aos 331 Opening a saved page iw cides oki ea bh eeeeye eee ket hee area ences 331 Editing information about a saved page 6c4cceeee nee ee sens 332 Deleting asa ved Pace veils ered exe wes ely ees eats EnEn eet 333 Finding web pages you recently visited 0 cece cece 333 Returning to a page you visited 2 2 iee sek ions Sh hee bs eh eRe oes 333 Clearing the Hist ry list o d yoda eee ee eh eee eda eee ey eM 334 Customizing Web Browser Pro caciiccivsew cain we cb een teh eee eee ake 334 Changing the default size of TEX oc xed eavedederveedias ven deeewns es 334 Contents Changing your home page ty eis oie eeday dee cheese bees Caen es 335 Changing how images are downloaded 0 000 eee eee 336 Changing link Coloty pirssi rereset tti diel ERT anra ope eine eee ee 337 Enabling or disabling auton 52i 020s022500h0eeadiedage ea wewe
155. MS carrier Leave Messages on Phone Return Receipt Warn Over Indicates whether messages are deleted from your phone after you download them to your handheld To keep messages on your phone after you transfer them to your handheld select this check box Determines whether you receive receipt confirmation notices Tap the pick list to select from the following options None and Requested Determines whether you receive a warning when multi part messages exceed more than the specified number of parts Tap the pick list to select from the following options 1 part 3 parts 5 parts 10 parts 50 parts and Never warn 168 Using SMS menus Expires Indicates how long unsent messages remain in your Outbox Tap the pick list to select from the following options 4 Hours 1 Day 1 Week 2 Weeks 1 Month and Max Time Message Indicates whether your handheld obtains your mobile phone Genter service provider s Message Center number directly from the phone or whether you need to enter the number manually If your phone is already configured to use SMS you do not need to change this setting Tap the pick list to select from the following options Auto and Custom TIP To restore all of these options to the original settings tap Default 6 Tap OK to close the Message Details dialog box 7 Tap OK Using SMS menus SMS menus are shown here for your reference and application features that are not explained elsewhere a
156. NEHUNT PRC PUZZLE PRC Dl lt 3 eos 9 Click OK to close the Change Destination window 10 Close the Install Handheld Files window 11 Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application s on your handheld See Chapter 21 for details NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were not installed This can happen if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation Expansion cards may hold applications that use files other than the Palm application files For your handheld to recognize such a file you must first launch the associated application at least once 74 Installing and removing applications Removing applications If you run out of memory or decide that you no longer need an application you installed you can remove applications from your handheld or from an expansion card From your handheld you can remove only add on applications patches and extensions that you install you cannot remove the applications that reside in the ROM portion of your handheld To remove an add on application 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Delete on the App menu 4 Tap the Delete From pick list and select either Handheld or Card If you want to delete applications from a card the card must be seated in the expansion card slot 5 Tap the application that you want to remove Delete Delete From v Handheld Free Space 14 1M of 14 3M
157. O Ciak li v Wiese ebb pick list Name Date Set4_005 10 05 02 Set4_006 10 05 02 Set4_007 10 05 02 Set4_008 10 05 02 Set4_009 10 05 02 Select a photo to view 3 Tap the name of the photo you want to view TIP You can also browse and select a photo with the navigator See Using the navigator in Chapter 2 for details 4 Tap anywhere on the screen to return to List view Viewing a slide show A slide show is a sequential presentation of each of the photos in the current album You can set the length of time each photo remains on the screen in the Preferences dialog box To view a slide show 1 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner and select the album you want to view 2 Tap Slide Show Camera Album pick list Tap Slide Show Name Set4_005 Set4_006 Set4_007 Set4_008 Set4_009 Set4_010 Set4_011 Set4_012 Set4_013 Set4_014 v Camera Date 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 10 05 02 Slide Show Album pick list Tap Slide Show 139 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos To adjust the delay between photos during a slide show 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options and then select Preferences Preferences Slide Show Delay w 3 seconds 3 Tap the pick list and select the delay interval 1 second 2 seconds 3 seconds 5 seconds or 1 minute 4 Tap OK
158. Opens the Quick Connect dialog box where you can choose which application you want to use to make the connection Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected entry to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld 84 Creating an Address Book entry Options menus Font Security Record Edit RST O Preferences Rename Custom Fields About Address Book Options J Font L F Rename Custom Fields About Address Book F ZR Address Edit view Address list Preferences Rename Custom Fields About Address Book Opens a dialog box where you can choose Address Book display options Preferences O Remember Last Category M Enable Tap to Connect List By Last Name First Name Remember last category Determines how Address Book appears when you return to it from another application If you select this check box Address Book shows the last category you selected If you deselect it Address Book displays the All category These custom fields appear at the end of the Address Edit screen Rename them to identify the kind of information you enter in them The names you give the custom fields appear in all entries
159. PPP 3Com Impact ISDN 64K A 3Com Impact ISDN 64K MLPPP bd Modem Speaker on off Shown with Mac OS X Modem Identifies the type of modem connected to your computer If your modem does not appear on the list use the Hayes Basic setting or select Custom to enter a command string Refer to the manual that came with your modem to find the appropriate command string Modem Speaker Activates the modem s speaker If you are having trouble connecting turn on this option to make sure that the modem connected to your computer is responding to incoming calls 8 Click OK 9 Close the HotSync Software Setup window Preparing your handheld for a modem HotSync operation There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your handheld for a modem HotSync operation To prepare your handheld for a modem HotSync operation 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select the HotSync icon 3 Tap Modem 367 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 4 Tap the pick list below the icon and select a modem configuration A RAT AEE Select a modem Palmviodem a IR to Phone configuration Serial to Phone Serial to Modem If you need to create a configuration tap the Menu icon and then select Connection Setup on the Options menu See Connection Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information 5 Tap the Enter phone field Phone Setup Li al O Use calling card Tap here If you plan to connect to your co
160. Pad 40 using the computer keyboard 37 using the onscreen keyboard 23 Entries See Address Book Envelope icon 217 Error log 260 ESMTP 181 291 adding to an account 293 Eudora configuring for e mail 273 Euro displaying on desktop computer 125 in Expense 122 123 in Graffiti 2 writing 30 in onscreen keyboard 24 printing 125 Events See Date Book Exclamation marks in To Do List 175 Expansion adding hardware 14 using cards 91 93 Expansion Card applications 42 copying applications 46 described 16 formatting 92 renaming 92 Expense adding Address Book data to records 62 63 categorizing records 55 creating records 120 currency 122 date of item 121 defining new currency 123 menus 126 overview 119 receipt details 121 reports 125 type 121 126 vendor 122 Extended MAPI 262 External keyboard 40 F FAQs See Frequently asked questions FCC Statement 467 476 Index File types that can be downloaded 322 Filed SMS messages 163 Files converting attachments 274 276 error log 260 linking to external 39 375 Filters creating 279 281 deleting 283 editing 283 examples of 282 turning on and off 281 282 Finding applications using Graffiti 2 writing 42 information in applications 58 63 phone numbers 61 62 using the Find application 60 Folders creating new 228 viewing other 220 Fonts 66 choosing fonts in applications 66 euro symbol 125 setting size in Web Browser Pro 334 Forgotten password 432 Formats preferences 382
161. Press Right and Left on the navigator to scroll to the next or previous week Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight and then press Right and Left to select a day within the selected week To view the events on the selected day press Select on the navigator again The Week View shows the time span defined by the Start Time and End Time in the Date Book Preferences settings If you have an event before or after this time span a bar appears at the top or bottom of that day s column Use the onscreen scroll arrows to scroll to the event or press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll to earlier and later time slots within the selected week Working in Month View oe The Month View screen shows which days have events scheduled Lines in the Month View indicate events and repeating events Diamonds indicate untimed events and green dashed lines with a Repeat icon amp indicate continuous events RA q Dec gt Previous next month SMT WT F S 1 2 3 i4 5 fe A secs Lahe 17 1 e Diamond below date indicates untimed event 7 8 9 a 10 i 11 12 13 Bssssssesfasanrasasshassnsassnfassnss Dashed line below date indicates continuous event 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Dashes on right side indicate events E GoTo Month View button You can control the types of events that appear in the Month View See Display Options later in this chapter Keep the following p
162. Sync operation with a user profile 378 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 379 Setting General Preferences j lt oiw tak sew aioe Eee neha mane ee 380 Date amp Time Preferences 0 6 ccc cence eee 381 Digitizer Preferenc s lt iiise ete dessi ko dees bed nen Peas ead oad bs 382 Formats Preferences sc c05 cdeicde adee neg ated aered Gog Kas Ree eS 382 Graffiti 2 Preferences cser criteri aker euei eee Sek eee be ee ba 384 Power Preferences 0 06 06 2 cece eo conse a ged pune we gue ees Gon es mses Saw Ap 384 Sounds amp Alerts Preferences 0 0 e cece cece eee eee 386 Writing Area Preferences cig iets Secede Sore bes Bed eee eee ees 388 setting Communication Preferences v 25 ics ccs tiv ecsdnie ses ouby vad 389 Bluetooth Preferences 0 0 0 ect teen ete 389 Connection Preferences 0 0 0 0 cee eee nen n eee nen 398 Network Preferences 00 0 cc cece cc een ence n eee n enna 403 Phone Preferences 4 424 234825652454 fe bbs eeee need etd a eeaees 420 Setting Personal Preferences vieicivvcet cewedev vie wen vipevdeseeewds 420 Buttons Preferences coe ce bn eee ee eed ee Bw ee i 421 Pen Preferences 2 24 2045000348000 46 ede binds deed heck wind 422 HotSync Buttons Preferences iohicadianedscaeew eg Rae ew ed rran 423 Color Theme Preferences 1 0 0 0 0 c cece cence ence teen enna 424 Owner Preferences oe sss dat ce ud dete ne wee ee eee oe eae eas 424 security Prefe
163. Synchronizing Address Book User dkajiyama Ge powered Cancel Shown with Mac OS X 5 Wait fora message on your handheld indicating that the process is complete After the HotSync process is complete you can remove your handheld from the cradle cable Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle cable and then lift it up to remove it Conducting IR HotSync operations You can use the infrared IR port on your handheld to perform HotSync operations When you perform an IR HotSync operation you don t need your cradle cable However you must have a computer that s equipped with an IR port and that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the Infrared Data Association IrDA standards This is especially useful if you travel with an infrared enabled laptop You simply enable infrared communication on your laptop and handheld and follow the steps in Performing an IR HotSync operation later in this section Preparing your computer for infrared communication Before you can perform a HotSync operation using the IR port the computer with which you want to synchronize must fulfill these requirements m Your computer must support the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards m Your computer must have an enabled infrared port that s built into the computer or an enabled infrared device attached to the computer 361 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations m Some desktop computers may re
164. Tap the up or down arrows to change the hour 4 Tap each minute number and then tap the arrows to change them 5 Tap OK 6 Tap Done To set the time zone and daylight saving time 1 From the General Preferences list select Date amp Time 2 Tap the Location pick list 3 Select Edit List 4 Select the location where you want to set the time zone 5 Tap Edit to open the Edit Location dialog box 6 Follow the steps under Adding a location in Chapter 20 to select the time zone and daylight saving time settings 7 Tap Done Digitizer Preferences The Digitizer Preferences screen opens the digitizer calibration screen This is the same screen that appears when you start your handheld for the first time You can recalibrate your screen after a hard reset or if your digitizer drifts You may need to repeat this process a few times until the calibration registers To calibrate your handheld screen 1 From the General Preferences list select Digitizer 2 Tap the targets as indicated on the screen as precisely as possible Formats Preferences Use the Formats Preferences screen to set the country default and the display format of the dates times and numbers on your handheld 382 Setting General Preferences Country default The country default sets date time week start day and number conventions based on geographic regions where you might use your handheld For example in the United Kingdom time
165. Voice Memo MENUS oy iis ecw ekakisees eeu ees eee ed Gar wee es 315 V Memo MENUS aoreeeiee nn oe ee sete EE NE A E 315 Options MENUS 42 erea E E ER EEE OTA gins ETa EEE Shed 315 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro 02 eee eeeeeeee 317 What Web Browser Pro looks like 2 0 0 0 00 ccc cence 318 Getting help in Web Browser Pro 06 20 oeds terern a eee ee ae edebdees 319 Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet 319 Browsing the web on your handheld 0 0 0 0 c cee eee eee 320 Visiting A WED DABS a acer Chie dee tnt de eee ESE ENEE eee est 320 Following a HUG si incscenendep erent 6 Sashes a hee bea ee Eg 321 Returning to a web page you just visited 0000 ee ee 322 Returning to your home page ssssusurusrsrnrernrrrrnrrnnn 322 Downloading a file to your handheld 0 0c eee eee eee 322 Refr shing a p ge a4 54 athe drr sp eh EEEE E EEE E N RE E 324 Viewing information about a web page 60 cece cece eens 324 Using PasswOnds osetis crre trr seeti tank hma aaea kea aA i eel i iai ees 325 Copying and pasting text isis a Seek eo eee tb eles bees oe 326 Copying ION 2 cbecidcue ireti eeGt ee Bae a E e ype ew ends eee 326 PASO COM obea et ed ein ieee aed eee yd EIEEE ane tess 326 Communicating with other users 7 42 2 25 5 tiee ead elie wad dist eai een 327 Sending CMGI co adsiere sitia nea ii ee mii d moona KER peni E Barania E 327 Beaminga UR
166. Working with Applications Purging records Over time as you use Date Book To Do List and Expense you ll accumulate records in these applications that have outlived their usefulness For example events that occurred months ago remain in the Date Book and To Do List items that you marked as completed remain in the list as do Expense items All these outdated records take up memory on your handheld so it s a good idea to remove them by using Purge If you think Date Book or To Do List records might prove useful later you can purge them from your handheld and save them in an archive file on your computer Purging is not available in Address Book Note Pad Palm Photos Voice Memo SMS or Memo Pad You must delete outdated records manually from these applications In Palm Web Browser Pro you can purge stored web pages by clearing the cache See Changing the size and content of the cache in Chapter 19 To purge records 1 Open the application 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Select Purge on the Record menu A confirmation dialog box appears Date Book Tap the pick list and select how old a record must be to be purged Purge deletes repeating events if the last of the series ends before the date that you purge records Date Book To Do List If you want to save a copy of the purged records to an archive file on your desktop be sure that the check box is selected If you don t want to save a copy tap the check box to dese
167. a parameter field so that you can add the necessary data 416 Setting Communication Preferences To create a login script 1 Tap Script 2 Tap the End pick list Login Script w Send CR Li w Wait For Host Name w Send w Wait For User ID w Send User ID w Send CR w Wait For Password Send Password T End Tap here 3 Select the command you want from the Command list If the command requires additional information a field appears to the right of it for you to enter the information The following commands are available Wait For Wait For Prompt Send Send CR Send User ID Send Password Delay Get IP Tells your handheld to wait for specific characters from the TCP IP server before executing the next command Detects a challenge response prompt coming from the server and then displays the dynamically generated challenge value You then enter the challenge value into your token card which in turn generates a response value for you to enter on your handheld This command takes two arguments separated by a vertical bar on the input line Transmits specific characters to the TCP IP server to which you are connecting Transmits a carriage return or line feed LF character to the TCP IP server to which you are connecting Transmits the user ID information entered in the User ID field of the Network Preferences screen Transmits the password entered in the Password
168. a to the handheld The next time you perform a HotSync operation Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a user name to the handheld To use a profile for a first time HotSync operation on a Mac computer 1 Connect the new handheld to the HotSync cradle cable 2 Press the HotSync button on the cradle cable 3 Select the profile you want to load on the handheld and click OK to transfer all the profile data to the handheld Select User Please select a user User Profile1 R oe f X _ New User Cancel Co Shown with Mac OS X The next time you perform a HotSync operation Palm Desktop software prompts you to assign a user name to the handheld 378 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Preferences enable you to customize the configuration options on your handheld The options are grouped into three categories General Communication and Personal Each category provides access to a list of relevant Preferences screens Use preferences to do the following m Access the General Preferences screens to customize any of the following settings Date amp Time Digitizer Formats Graffiti 2 Power Sounds amp Alerts Writing Area Set the location date and time Calibrate the screen on your handheld Set the country default and the formats for times dates calendar and numbers Select alternate strokes for selected Graffiti 2 characters Set these features auto shutoff interv
169. ache immediately or you can choose to clear the cache each time you exit Web Browser Pro so it starts fresh at the beginning of each session To change the size and content of the cache 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap Advanced Preferences Li Advanced M Accept cookies Enable JavaScript O Clear cache on exit Manx cache size 1024 k Cache used Cid 4 Use one or more of the following options Clear Cache Tap to clear the cache immediately Clear cache on exit Select the check box to clear the cache each time you exit Web Browser Pro Deselect the check box to keep the cache from session to session Max cache size Tap to change the maximum cache size used to store web pages The default size of the cache is 1 024KB and the maximum size is 9 999KB NOTE Remember that your handheld has a limited amount of memory Choose a cache size that lets you store at least a few pages but still leaves room on your handheld for other data and applications A value of at least 500KB is recommended 5 Tap OK 339 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Controlling how Web Browser Pro accesses the Internet Because some wireless Internet service providers ISPs charge by the amount of data you download Web Browser Pro is careful to limit how often it accesses the Internet If you have a faster or more permanent connection to the Internet the default settings should work for you
170. acussceckTacodsennerancesdaosenaveedaoee sts t View Saved Pages M Disconnect Qora Vea Cy LUT Sent Advanced Search Preferences To connect to the Internet 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Connect in the Page menu The Service Connection Progress dialog opens Service Connection Progress Y Dialing ISP Change Network 319 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro 3 If the connection is not established do one of the following Tap Cancel to stop the connection process Tap Change Network to select a different service to connect to Network Service i Select a network service ISP Browsing the web on your handheld Just like the web browser you use on your desktop computer Web Browser Pro lets you browse the web in several ways m Visit a web page by entering its URL m Visit another web page by tapping a link m Go back to the pages you already visited by using the Back and Forward icons m Return to your home page Visiting a web page You can visit web pages using the Open URL dialog box or using the URL Entry field To visit a web page using the Open URL dialog box 1 Tap the Open URL icon Z 2 Enter the URL of the web page you want to visit The field in the Open URL dialog box already contains the characters www If the web address you want to enter starts with another set of letters just drag over the www and backspace to erase them Tap butt
171. ail account My Farthlink connects using the default handheld service My Bluetooth in this example The Always connect using check box changes the connection service for the selected e mail account only You must follow the preceding procedure for each e mail account whose connection you want to switch from the default connection on your handheld 205 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Troubleshooting account access problems Occasionally you may experience problems using an e mail account after you set it up If you followed the account setup procedures described in Setting up and managing e mail accounts earlier in this chapter but experience problems using the account you may need to verify that the account complies with your e mail provider s requirements See Appendix B for troubleshooting information for account access problems Getting sending and managing e mail Getting and sending e mail on your handheld is easy and helps you keep your business and personal life organized You can manage the messages in your e mail accounts by moving messages between folders deleting old e mail messages individually or in groups and marking messages as read or unread This section describes how to do the following m Get and send e mail for your e mail accounts m View and send e mail attachments such as text or Microsoft Word documents wirelessly Getting e mail You can get e mail subj
172. al Stay on in cradle Beam receive Power on when opened and Power off when closed Select system game and alarm options from three profiles Custom Silent and All Off Enable and disable Writing Area Preferences and show or hide penstrokes while writing Graffiti 2 characters m Access the Communication Preferences screens to customize any of the following settings Bluetooth Connection Network Phone Turn Bluetooth communication on and off assign a name to your handheld and configure device discovery and wakeup settings Configure communication settings Configure your handheld for use with a network Select a connection for use with wireless data and phone applications on your handheld 379 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld m Access the Personal Preferences screens to customize any of the following settings Buttons Assign an application to the Favorites icon Reassign various applications to the following the application buttons on the front and side panels of your handheld the HotSync button on the cradle cable and the full screen pen stroke command Color Theme Select a color theme to change the appearance of your handheld screen Owner Enter your name phone number and other owner information to your handheld Security Set a password privacy options and locking options ShortCuts Define a list of Graffiti 2 abbreviations Setting General Preferences The Genera
173. al add on keyboard for use with your handheld With this keyboard you can use shortcuts to perform many tasks in various handheld applications The following table summarizes the keyboard shortcuts specific to the VersaMail application To use a keyboard shortcut 1 Press Command 2 Press the letter of the shortcut ShortCut Feature C Copy D Delete E Empty Trash F Forward Message H Mark Read Mark Unread K Keyboard L Address Lookup M Get Message Create New Message 304 Going beyond the basics ShortCut Feature N lt X Zg lt C HW DBD DO TD O Press amp hold Mail Reply to Message Paste Go to Bottom Preferences Select All Go to Top Undo Move To Save to Draft Cut Send Deselect All Get amp Send 305 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 306 Using Voice Memo 2 Voice Memo provides a place for you to record your thoughts while you re on the go You can use Voice Memo to do things you might do with a voice recorder and more Record and play back voice memos directly on your handheld Set an alarm to use your voice memos as reminder messages Assign your voice memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups Synchronize with your computer using Palm Desktop software and HotSync technology and then listen to voice memos on your computer or send them as e mail attachments Share v
174. alarm is triggered the reminder list displays the alarm message until you clear it See Receiving alerts in Chapter 4 for details For example you set an alarm for an untimed event that occurs on February 4 If the alarm is set for 5 minutes the reminder message appears at 11 55 PM on February 3 The reminder remains in the reminder list until you turn on your handheld and dismiss it Scheduling repeating or continuous events The Repeat function enables you to schedule events that recur at regular intervals or that extend over a period of consecutive days A birthday is a good example of an event that repeats annually Another example is a weekly guitar lesson that falls on the same day of the week and the same time of day A business trip or a vacation is an example of a continuous event To schedule a repeating or continuous event 1 Select the event 2 Tap Details 101 Chapter 8 Using Date Book 3 Tap the Repeat box to open the Change Repeat dialog box Change Repeat i BENE 00 Week Month Year Tap one of the above Tap the buttons to set arepeat i Repeat interval Private O box 4 Tap Day Week Month or Year to set how often the event repeats For a continuous event tap Day 5 On the Every line enter a number that corresponds to how often you want the event to repeat For example if you select Month and enter the number 2 the event repeats every other month 6 To speci
175. an alarm the Alarm icon appears at the far right of the event When the alarm is triggered a reminder message also appears onscreen To set an alarm for an event 1 Select the event to which you want to assign an alarm 2 Tap Details 3 Tap the Alarm check box to select it The default setting 5 Minutes appears 4 Tap the pick list to select Minutes Hours or Days 5 Select the 5 and enter any number from 0 to 99 inclusive as the number of time units Event Details Enter number of time units here Tap here to Private O select unit of time 6 Tap OK 7 When the reminder message appears onscreen do one of the following Tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen An attention indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm and the reminder message appears again five minutes later 100 Scheduling repeating or continuous events Tap Go To to open Date Book Date Book will open and display the event associated with the alarm 8 34pm Reminder eC Saturday 12 6 03 8 35 pm 9 35 pm Bike ride with Lori Alarm for untimed events You can set a silent alarm for an untimed event In this case the alarm is triggered at the specified period of minutes hours or days before midnight beginning of the day of the untimed event When the
176. an also move a single e mail message from within the body of the message by pressing the command bar stroke in the Graffiti 2 writing area tapping the folder icon and selecting the destination folder from the pick list See Using the command bar later in this chapter for more information on the command bar To move multiple e mail messages 1 Tap the folder that contains the e mail messages you want to move 2 Select the messages by tapping to the left of each message icon TIP To select a group of adjacent messages drag the stylus to the left of the message icons 226 Getting sending and managing e mail A checkmark appears next to the selected messages Speakeas 3 18 Inbox M out of of Joe Sad 12 10p Mreview c Angela 12 09p lo S these ar Travis 12 08p M lunch meet Joe Sadu 12 07p M FW Revise Micki Hic 11 41a DS Re cross r Wayne H 10 55a M Registratio LinkeSOF 11 36p M The Searc Search R 11 02p o SS Fw REVIEW Donna M 10 33p MI My schedulaKwong Li 4 54p M Re Bluetoo Kwong Li 2 48p Nen Get Mai Display v 3 Do one of the following Tap the Menu icon and then tap Move To Tap a message icon next to a selected message and then tap Move To on the pick list Speakeas 3 18 w Inbox M out of of Joe Sad 12 10p Mreview c Angela 12 09
177. and SP6 or later requires a serial cradle cable sold separately and administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software Windows 98 Windows ME Windows 2000 Pro requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software Windows XP Home or Pro requires administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software Internet Explorer 4 01 with SP2 or later 50 megabytes MB available hard disk space VGA monitor or better Palm Desktop software Quick Tour requires 256 color video display 16 Bit or High Color and 800 x 600 resolution recommended CD ROM or DVD ROM drive Mouse One available USB port or serial port serial cradle cable sold separately Minimum requirements Mac computers The minimum requirements for Mac computers are as follows Mac computer or compatible with a PowerPC processor Mac OS 9 version 9 1 or later with 12MB available memory or Mac OS X version 10 1 2 or later 25MB available hard disk space Monitor that supports screen resolution of 800 x 600 or better Step 1 Connect the HotSync cradle cable to the computer m CD ROM or DVD ROM drive you can also download Palm Desktop software from www palm com intl Mouse m One available USB port or serial port serial cradle cable sold separately and compatible with Mac OS 9 only Internet access requirements The requirements for Internet access are as follows m Any one of the following A Bluetooth mobile pho
178. and the Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User s Guide on the Desktop Software CD ROM Importing data If you have data stored in computer applications such as spreadsheets and databases or if you want to import data from another handheld you can transfer the data to your handheld without having to type it Save the data in one of the file formats listed in the next section import it into Palm Desktop software and then perform a HotSync operation to transfer the data to your handheld 37 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld Importing data from a Windows computer Palm Desktop software can import data in the following file formats Comma delimited csv txt Address Book and Memo Pad only Tab delimited tab tsv txt Address Book and Memo Pad only CSV Lotus Organizer 2 x 97 Mapping Address Book only vCal vcs Date Book only vCard vcf Address Book only Date Book archive dba Address Book archive aba To Do List archive tda Memo Pad archive mpa Archive formats can be used only with Palm Desktop software Use the archive file formats to share information with other people who use a Palm OS handheld or to create a copy of your important Palm Desktop information To import data from a Windows computer 1 2 3 Open Palm Desktop software Click the application into which you want to import data If you are importing records that contain a field with category names do the
179. andheld mobile phone and modem accessory sold separately NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application Quick Connect You can use Quick Connect to select an entry and initiate a related task with one hand using the navigator You can also configure which application opens when you choose a specific Address record field and whether to add a prefix to all phone numbers To use Quick Connect from an Address entry 1 Open the Address entry to which you want to connect 2 Press Right on the navigator to open the Quick Connect dialog box TIP You can also tap the Quick Connect icon in the title bar of the Address record Address SP Business Quick Connect Arthur Manzi Arthur Manzi Work 415 555 7775 3 Select the method you want to use to connect Quick Connect initiates the related task For example if you tap a phone number Quick Connect sends the selected phone number to your mobile phone 81 Chapter 5 Using Address Book To use Quick Connect from the Address list 1 Highlight the Address entry to which you want to connect 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Select
180. ands from the Network Preferences screen or by using a third party application NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application The Network Preferences settings give you the ability to connect to your ISP or dial in server with applications that support viewing the transmitted data Visit the web site www palm com intl for information on third party applications that take advantage of TCP IP Creating and selecting network service profiles Use network service profiles to store the configuration settings for your ISP or a dial in server You can create save and reuse network service profiles You can create additional network service profiles from scratch or by duplicating existing profiles and editing information After you create a new or duplicate profile you can add and edit settings You can also duplicate and rename a profile that you created with Phone Link This preserves the current Phone Link settings when you use Phone Link to create a new phone connection Otherwise Phone Link erases the current settings when it creates the new settings To add a new network service profile 1 From t
181. ant to appear in the memo Use the carriage return stroke to move down to new lines in the memo 4 Tap Done Reviewing memos The first line of a memo appears in the Memo list This makes it easy to locate and review your memos To review a memo 1 From the Memo list select the text of the memo TIP You can also select review and move between memos with the navigator See Using the navigator in Chapter 2 for details Memo w All 1 11722 Meeting minutes 2 Directions to Moscone Center 3 Plans for conference 4 Priorities on new project 5 To discuss Jose Ribera Select a memo to review gt 2 Review or edit the text in the memo 3 Tap Done 128 Using Memo Pad menus Using Memo Pad menus Memo Pad menus are shown here for your reference and Memo Pad features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you re displaying the Memo list or an individual memo Record menus ttc Options iets Edit Options Beam Category New Memo Send Categor Delete Memo a Beam Memo Memo list Send Memo Memo screen Send Category Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send all records in the selected category to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handh
182. ap OK to change entry Dialing a number from the Call History list Palm Dialer keeps a list of 11 of the most recently dialed numbers If the number is a speed dial entry the name from the speed dial entry appears in the Call History list You can dial a number using the Call History list To dial a number from the Call History list 1 Tap History Tap History 116 Dialing a number from the Call History list 2 Tap an entry from the list Call History 19875554678 219702 3 38 pm Larry 2r 19 02 3 38 pr 12095553663 2 13 02 3 37 pr it Tap entry to enter number on Dialer screen 17995551412 219702 3 36 pm 219702 3 36 pm i 21902 3 35 pm pas ariar 12 46 proj Date and time you called Number or name if number is a speed dial entry Tap Done to return to Dialer screen 3 Tap Dial The number is dialed and you are now ready to communicate over your mobile phone 12095553663 The selected number displays Tap Dial 117 Chapter 9 Using Palm Dialer 118 Using Expense Expense enables you to keep track of your expenses and then transfer the information to a spreadsheet on your computer In Expense you can do the following Record dates types of expenses amount spent payment method and other details associated with any money that you spend m Assign expense items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups m Kee
183. ape as it appears in the tables 25 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld 5 Do one of the following Ifyou are drawing a single stroke character lift the stylus from the screen at the end of the stroke shape When you lift the stylus from the screen your handheld recognizes your stroke and prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen If you are drawing a multi stroke character draw the remaining strokes required for the character The order of the strokes required is shown in the tables When you lift the stylus from the screen after drawing the last stroke your handheld prints the letter at the insertion point on the screen To delete Graffiti 2 characters m Set the insertion point to the right of the character you want to delete and make the backspace stroke in the Graffiti 2 writing area Backspace ar Graffiti 2 tips When using Graffiti 2 writing keep these tips in mind m Accuracy improves when you write large characters Draw strokes that nearly fill the Graffiti 2 writing area a Write at natural speed Writing too slowly can generate recognition errors m Press firmly and do not write on a slant Vertical strokes should be parallel to the sides of the Graffiti 2 writing area m Alternate stroke shapes are available for some characters You can use the Graffiti 2 Preferences screen to choose the one that s easiest for you See Graffiti 2 Preferences in Chapter 2
184. apping and typing Check box 8 12 arn A Tue uli23 gt H 1 Send flowers to M Check box Previous next arrows 10 00 Work on project 4 1 00 Working Lunch with Anne 2 00 Take a walk 2 30 File weekly reports 3 35 Return all calls 4 45 Project presentation O 1 Call David O 1 Write thank you note to Vickie O 2 Pick up fresh vegetables Command button Tap a check box to select or deselect it When a check box contains a check mark the corresponding option is selected and active When a check box is empty the corresponding option is deselected and inactive Command buttons Tap a button to perform a command Command buttons appear at the bottom of dialog boxes and application screens Next previous arrows Tap the left and right arrows to display the previous and next Pick list Scroll bar records tap the up and down arrows to display the previous and next pages of information Tap the arrow to display a list of choices and then tap an item in the list to select it Drag the slider or tap the top or bottom arrow to scroll the display one line at a time To scroll to the previous page tap the scroll bar just above the slider To scroll to the next page tap the scroll bar just below the slider You can also scroll to the previous and next pages within a record by pressing Up and Down on the navigator Displaying online tips Many of the dialog boxes that appear on your handheld contai
185. apter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To attach a file from a handheld application 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Options 3 Select Attachment Cat Ortions ME Attachment fA SaveToDrafts W GoTo Top Go To Bottom Handhelc Application pre Four Way Appointment vCal Select type of file you want to Downloat Database pdb attach Memo Text Attachi MSWord All files of the selected type appear in the Type box For example if you select Appointments vCal tap Date Book to see a list of appointments from a particular date that you can attach or tap To Do to see To Do List tasks 5 Tap the file that you want to attach and then tap Add Attachments i Type wv Memo Text Download Free Applications Four Ways to Enter Text Handheld Basics Power Tips Attachments 248 Getting sending and managing e mail The selected file appears in the Attachments box Attachments i Type v Memo Text Download Free Applications Four Ways to Enter Text Handheld Basics Power Tips Attachments Four j to Enter Text txt 6 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each attachment you want to add and then tap Done TIP To delete an attachment from an e mail message tap the attached file in the Attachments box and then tap Delete 7 Tap Send or Outbox Attaching files from an expansion card If you have purchased an expansion card and have saved files to the card you can a
186. ard you can enter data on your handheld using the Note Pad application When you use Note Pad you write quick notes directly on the handheld screen in your own handwriting See Chapter 12 for more information and instructions Using a portable keyboard You can connect a portable keyboard accessory to the universal connector on your handheld so that you can type data directly into your handheld Portable keyboards are very helpful when you need to enter large amounts of data quickly and accurately while you are away from your computer such as writing an e mail message For additional information about this optional accessory go to the web site www palm com intl 40 Working with Applications This chapter explains how to open and switch between applications on your handheld how to change application settings so they are personalized to your work methods and how to categorize applications so you view them in related groups Opening applications You can use the Applications Launcher to open any application installed on your handheld or an expansion card You can also open Date Book Address Book To Do List Note Pad and Voice Memo with the application buttons on your handheld Voice Memo Applications Launcher Date Book Address Book To Do List Note Pad In addition to providing a way for you to open applications the Applications Launcher displays the current time battery level and ap
187. ask Records Automatically mask records Never On power off fifter a preset delay Select After a preset delay Your handheld will mask private records if inactive for Tap to select Minutes or Hours Hour s Enter the amount of time 5 Enter the inactive period and then select Minute s or Hour s from the pick list 6 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change Encrypting your data You can encrypt selected data whenever your handheld locks The more applications and data that are selected the longer the encryption process When you unlock the handheld and enter a valid password the encrypted data is decrypted The more applications and data that are selected for encryption the longer the decryption process To encrypt your data when the handheld locks 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Select Options and then select Security Options 4 Tap the Options pick list and select Encryption 438 Setting Personal Preferences 5 Tap the check box for Encrypt data when locked Security Options i Options X Encryption O Encrypt data when locked Choose Applications O Encrypt private records only Encryption type w 128 bit Blowfish Tap pick list and select Encryption 6 Tap the Choose Applications button 7 Select the applications whose data you want to encrypt and tap OK Encrypt Data
188. assword and then tap OK 202 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Sam Yahoo Advanced Outgoing Options Port Number 25 X My server requires authentication ESMTP Username Password Username and Password fields appear only if Ti ESMTP check box is selected Tap done to complete setup 2 Tap OK Deleting an e mail account When you delete an account in the VersaMail application the account is removed from your handheld The account still exists on the server For example deleting your Yahoo account from the VersaMail application deletes only the account from your handheld Your e mail account still exists at Yahoo com NOTE You can delete all but one of your e mail accounts you must have at least one account To delete an account 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Accounts 3 Select Account Setup Accounts Sam Yahoo 1 Sam IMAP 2 Sam Sync 3 Speakeasy 4 Tap the name of the account you want to delete and then tap Delete Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Sam IMAP 203 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 5 Tap Yes in the Delete Confirmation dialog box to delete the account and all associated e mail messages Delete Account Are you sure you want to permanently remove the Sam IMAP account Yas 6 Tap OK After you perform the next HotSync operation the memory associated with an
189. at Replying to e mail You can reply to an e mail as you are reading it or start the reply when viewing messages in the folders list view 238 Getting sending and managing e mail To reply to an e mail that you are reading 1 Tap the e mail you want to reply to 2 Tap Reply lt 1of1 gt El From Travis Washington T lt trwashjr hotmail com gt Subj cool site check this out www futurefacing com tw 3 In the Reply Options dialog box select options for replying to the sender only or to all e mail recipients and for including original message text Reply Options M Include Original Text 4 Tap OK 5 Enter a reply Reply To Message neat Travis Washington lt trwashjr hotmail com gt wrote check this out v comerme 6 Tap Send to send the message or tap Outbox to send it later NOTE Replies are always sent as text only even if you received the original message in HTML format 239 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To reply to an e mail from the folders list 1 On the message screen tap the folder name in the upper left corner to open the message menus and then press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Options menu 2 Press Down on the navigator to move to the Reply option and then press Select to select this option TIP Alternately you can tap the folders pick list select the fol
190. at appear in the list select Hayes Basic Setup String Identifies the setup string for your particular modem Not all modems require a setup string Refer to your modem manual and enter the setup string if it is recommended by the manufacturer 4 Click OK To prepare a Mac computer for a modem HotSyne operation 1 Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on and that no communications applications such as fax or telephony software or AppleTalk networking are running on that serial port Make sure your computer is disconnected from all online services such as CompuServe and America Online AOL This helps to avoid conflicts with the serial port In addition your computer must be on and it should not be in sleep mode when receiving a call from a remote handheld Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder Click the HotSync Controls tab and enable the Transport Monitor if it is not already enabled 366 Conducting modem HotSync operations 4 Click the Connection Settings tab 5 Select the On check box for the modem connection you re using and then click Settings 6 In the Settings dialog box select Modem as the connection type if it is not already selected NOTE This step is not necessary for internal modems 7 Adjust the following options as needed Internal Modem Settings p Modem 3Com Impact Analog 14 4 0 3Com Impact ISDN 56K 3Com Impact ISDN 56K ML
191. ating accounts in the HotSync Manager m Synchronizing e mail on the handheld with a desktop e mail application m Converting attached files using attachment conversion plug ins 259 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Configuring an account in HotSync Manager Before synchronizing an e mail account you configure the account s settings in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit The settings have to be specified only once unless you need to make changes To start Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit 1 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray 2 Select Custom 3 Select VersaMail in the Conduit list ce Sadusky z Conduit Action ScreenShot Date Book Synchronize the files Address Book Synchronize the files To Do List Synchronize the files Synchronize the files Synchronize the files hronize the files Enahlad Install Garvina Tannlatac 4 Click Change 5 Select Synchronize Active Accounts Eile Help Joe Sadusky z tel D i o VersaMail H Business E Sam Yahoo HotSync Action For YersaMail E Sam IMAP W Sam Syne A P 3 Fh Speakeasy oa Synchronize Active Accounts Attachment Conversion m a C Do Nothing I Set Selection As Default I Enable Informational Logging Current HotSync Configuration For YersaMail Permanent Synchronization Preference Synchronize Active Accounts Temporary Synchronization Preference Synchronize Acti
192. ation options either Always Available or Available only when the Palm Desktop is running 4 Optional To hear an alert sound as well as receive an alert message select the check box Play audible notification with alarm dialog box 5 Click OK Hiding or masking private records You can use Security Preferences to set a password and select whether to mask your private records or hide them completely See Hiding or masking your private records automatically in Chapter 22 for details Installing and removing applications This section explains how to install and remove applications and other files on your handheld or on an expansion card and how to remove Palm Desktop software from your computer Installing files and add on applications Your handheld comes with many applications installed and ready to use During a HotSync operation you can also install additional applications such as games and other software on your handheld or on a card that is seated in the expansion card slot Applications or games that you install on your handheld reside in RAM memory and you can delete them at any time You can also install other files that are associated with an application on your handheld such as Microsoft Office documents photos or audio files Files that are not associated with an application on your handheld may not be installed during a HotSync operation Both applications and files are easy to install during a HotSync operat
193. ave problems using the As Fast As Possible option or a specific speed try using a slower speed m Make sure you are not running another program such as WinFax CompuServe or America Online that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box m Make sure your modem resets before you try again Turn off your modem wait a minute and then turn it back on 457 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions I tried to do a modem HotSync operation but it did not complete successfully continued On a Mac computer check the following Make sure that Internal Modem is selected on the Connection Settings tab in the HotSync Software Setup window You may need to select a different modem type or enter a custom setup string from the Connection Settings tab Most modems have a setup string that causes them to send initial connection sounds to a speaker You can turn on the Modem Speaker option and use these sounds to check the modem connection Make sure you are not running another program such as America Online fax or telephony software or AppleTalk networking that uses the serial port you selected in the Connection Settings tab Make sure your modem resets before you try again Turn off your modem wait a minute and then turn it back on Check the following on your handheld Confirm that the telephone cable is securely attached to your modem Make sure the dialing instruction specifies the correct phone
194. b page you just visited To go back to the last web page you visited m Tap the Back icon V To go back to an earlier page m Tap the Back icon until you return to the page you want The list of visited pages which is limited by your handheld s memory is called the cache See Finding web pages you recently visited for more information on the cache To go forward through the cached pages m Tap the Forward icon 7y TIP You can also press Left on the navigator to go back to an earlier page and Right to go forward through the cache Returning to your home page Your home page is the web page that is displayed first every time you start Web Browser Pro No matter where you navigate on the Internet you can always return to your home page quickly and easily To return to your home page m Tap the Home Page icon in the Web Browser Pro action bar If you want a different web page to be your home page see Changing your home page Downloading a file to your handheld Web Browser Pro can download files such as applications PRCs databases PDBs and query applications PQAs for Palm OS software Downloading a file is much like visiting a web page NOTE Some handhelds do not support POA files 322 Downloading a file to your handheld To download a file by following a link from a web page 1 Tap the link 2 A message appears asking you to confirm the file you want to download If the file is the one
195. bout Date Book Shows version information for Date Book 109 Chapter 8 Using Date Book 110 Using Palm Dialer Palm Dialer is a fast and simple way to use your handheld to dial a telephone number on your mobile phone The Palm Dialer also allows you to speed dial frequently called numbers and log recently called numbers Dialer is a good way to dial phone numbers that are not listed in Address Book To dial numbers in Address Book use Quick Connect For more information see Making connections from Address Book in Chapter 5 IMPORTANT Your mobile phone plan must be a Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phone to use Palm Dialer To open Palm Dialer 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Palm Dialer icon amp TIP The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to assign Palm Dialer to the Favorite icon or to one of the application buttons on the front of the handheld For more information see Buttons Preferences in Chapter 22 Once Palm Dialer is assigned pressing the icon or button opens the Palm Dialer application at the Speed Dial screen see Dialing a speed dial entry later in this chapter Configuring phone preferences and connecting to your mobile phone You need to configure the phone preferences of your handheld and connect your handheld to your mobile phone before you use Palm Dialer For more information on configuring your phone preferences see Chapter 22 For more info
196. bsequent conflicting events appear as a single red bar To see the overlapping events select the Day View Palm Desktop software provides several features that interact with e mail client software on a Windows computer For these features to work correctly the e mail client software must be properly configured Follow these steps to check the configuration 1 Click the Windows Start menu and then select Settings 2 Select Control Panel 3 Select Internet Options and then click the Programs tab 4 Make sure that the E mail field is set to the correct e mail client software 453 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions My vCard or vCal e mail attachment isn t forwarding correctly continued The current date and time are incorrect HotSync problems Problem I cannot perform a HotSync operation What should I check to make sure I m doing it correctly 5 Click OK 6 Start the e mail client software and make sure it is configured as the default MAPI client Consult the documentation for your desktop e mail application for more information The current date and time are tied to the Location setting If you change the date and time without changing the Location setting the current date and time may appear incorrect See Date amp Time Preferences in Chapter 22 for information on setting the current location date and time Solution m Make sure the HotSync cradle cable is connected securely
197. but you can t connect with the server to change the message state Read messages appear in plain text unread messages appear in bold text Setting preferences for getting and deleting e mail VersaMail Preferences determine how the VersaMail application gets sends and deletes e mail To set e mail preferences 1 Tap the Menu icon tap Options and then select Preferences Preferences i General Advanced System Get w Subjects Only Ask Every Time Confirm Deletions O Delete Msgs on Server M Download Attachments Receive Format aigls 2 Select preferences Get Enables you to retrieve the subject only or the entire message Ask Every Time Displays a dialog box for choosing subjects only or entire messages each time you retrieve e mail If deselected messages are retrieved according to the option you select in the Get pick list 257 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Confirm Deletions Delete Msgs on Server Download Attachments Receive Format Signature Displays a confirmation dialog before deleting e mail If selected automatically deletes messages on the server that you have deleted on your handheld If not selected you will be asked each time you delete messages on your handheld whether you want to also delete them on the server Because mailboxes on the server usually have size restrictions we recommend periodically deleting messages on the server
198. cable HotSync operation Windows computers 357 Performing a direct HotSync operation Mac computers 359 Conducting IR HotSync operations s rsnssseewtek sae dp ehews coe ees 361 Preparing your computer for infrared communication 361 Performing an IR HotSync operation lt 600050600 s ee sees eaeedes ves 363 Returning to cradle cable HotSync operations 005 364 Conducting modem HotSync operations 00 cece eee 365 Preparing your computer for a modem HotSync operation 365 Preparing your handheld for a modem HotSync operation 367 Selecting the conduits fora modem HotSync operation 369 Performing a modem HotSync operation 0 0 e eee eee 369 Conducting Bluetooth HotSync operations 0 6 e ee eee ee 370 Preparing your computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation 370 xi Contents Preparing your handheld for a Bluetooth HotSync operation 371 Performing a Bluetooth HotSync operation 00 eee eee 372 Conducting network HotSync operations ic ccs ccc ees ete edaee cs 372 Connecting to your company s dial in server 00000005 373 Performing a network HotSync operation 00 ee eee eee 375 Usine FC EME ray ee deaaeeveereeey es ee eecegay ede tect eas a 375 Creatine a user profile 22i2x caisenveics say er iuie beagle Cirrius wis 376 Performing the first Hot
199. categorize In Address Book only Tap Edit Tap the Category pick list to display the list of available categories Select the category for the record 1 2 3 Tap Details 4 Address Entry Details Show in List w Work Business pow Private ouickList Unfiled 5 6 Tap OK NOTE In Address Book Note Pad Voice Memo and Memo Pad you can select the category name in the upper right corner of the screen to assign the item to a different category To display a category of records 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner of the list screen Tap here Address All Abrams Liz 650 454 6121 Abrams Liz Adams Ben 408 772 1900 Adams Ben Beckman Rachel 510 532 0746 Beckman Rachel Bertolli Marcus 213 422 1363 Bertolli Marcus Bruce Jeremy 408 459 1279 Bruce Jeremy Butler Richard 516 626 1424 Butler Richard 516 626 1424 Cain Cathy 650 235 6222 Cain Cathy 650 235 6222 Carpenter Joan 718 824 1548 Carpenter Joan 718 824 1548 Carter Melanie 212 395 6277 W Carter Melanie 212 395 6277 W Chu Byron 213 343 9801 Chu Byron 213 343 9801 Conner Sandy 301 933 6833 W Conner Sandy 301 933 6833 W LOOK UPS sss LOOK URE ss NOTE Inthe Date Book Agenda view the pick list is in the upper right of the To Do list 2 Select the category you want to view The list screen now displays only the records assigned to that category TIP Pressing an application button o
200. ce Name Discoverable v Yes Enter a name for this device Allow Wakeup vw No gt April s handheld 4 Tap OK 5 Tap Done Setting device discovery Discovery is the process that Bluetooth devices use to find each other when they are within range of each other When you initiate the discovery process you find and select the devices with which you want to connect The discovery process is typically initiated by an application For example when you connect your handheld with a mobile phone using the Phone Link application Phone Link discovers phones equipped with Bluetooth technology within range in order to connect with one of those phones You can use the Discoverable and Bluetooth settings to achieve three discovery states on your handheld The following is a description of setting combinations and the resulting discovery states Bluetooth Off When the Bluetooth setting is off other users cannot discover your handheld This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt a security chain and disabling the door bell When Bluetooth is off you cannot access the Discoverable setting See Turning Bluetooth communication on and off earlier in this chapter for instructions on turning Bluetooth communication on and off m Bluetooth On and Discoverable No When your handheld and Bluetooth are on and the Discoverable setting is set to No you can receive connections only from devices with which you have previously
201. ce tomorrow M Angela Yee 12 09p review comments WBS Travis Washington 12 08p Get Message o Move To 12 07p Mark Read day o Mark Unread 11 41a actions for U Delete Display TIP To mark multiple messages tap the bullets next to the messages you want tap the Menu icon O and then select Mark Read or Mark Unread UGFFT Options Accounts Select All Deselect All New Message Get Message Move To Mark Read Mark Unread Delete Old 4 For IMAP accounts only Tap Handheld to mark the messages as read or unread on your handheld Tap Both to mark the messages on both the handheld and the server Mark Read Would you like to mark the selected messages read on both the handheld and server or on just the handheld 256 Getting sending and managing e mail If you tap Both this message appears Update Server Would you like to update the server now to avoid delays getting and sending mail later Tap OK to connect with the server and immediately mark the messages as read or unread on the server This action also processes any other pending actions on the server such as messages not yet deleted Tap Cancel if you want the messages marked during the next HotSync operation or the next time you connect to the server NOTE Because POP servers do not support the read or unread message feature the message is in bold or regular typeface for POP accounts on the handheld
202. cently visited Bookmark a web page so you can visit it later m Save a web page on your handheld Download files from the Internet m Change how Web Browser Pro accesses saves and displays web pages IMPORTANT To use Web Browser Pro you must first configure and establish a connection with the Internet such as through a mobile phone For more information on connecting to the Internet using a mobile phone see Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 To open Web Browser Pro 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select All in the Category pick list in the upper right corner of the screen 3 Tap the Web Browser Pro icon amp Web Browser Pro may take a moment to load the first page NOTE The rest of the instructions in this chapter assume that you re already running Web Browser Pro and that you ve successfully connected to the Internet 317 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro What Web Browser Pro looks like Title bar Advanced Search Preferences Action icons URL Entry field Web content The Web Browser Pro screen has four parts m The title bar displays the name of the current web page or shows the status of actions such as Searching Saving Receiving and so forth m The action icons allow you to navigate in the browser to refresh pages and to bookmark pages a The URL Entry field allows you to quickly enter web page addresses URL stan
203. cess For information on how to enter or modify these settings manually see Setting Communication Preferences in Chapter 22 and see Network Preferences in Chapter 22 The instructions in this section assume that you already installed the desktop software that came with your handheld and performed at least one HotSync operation To configure a phone connection on your handheld 1 If you are establishing a Bluetooth connection with a phone you must first turn on Bluetooth communication and turn on the Discoverable setting on your handheld See Bluetooth Preferences in Chapter 22 for instructions 2 Tap the Home icon 3 Select the Phone Link icon amp 150 Setting up a phone connection 4 10 Tap the Phone Connection box The Connection Setup screen appears Connection Setup Connection Setup 9 Select a phone to connect to This guide will help you set up Manufacturer Ericsson a connection between your handheld and mobile phone Model w T68 To continue tap Next To exit tap Cancel Tap the Manufacturer pick list and select your phone s manufacturer Tap the Model pick list and select your phone model If your phone model does not appear on the list you either need to download and install a driver for your phone see Updating the phone files on your handheld later in this chapter or your phone is not supported at this time Connection Setup Connection Setup
204. ch products cannot be resumed until no interference occurs after improvement The legal communications mentioned in the above item refer to radio communications operated in accordance with telecommunication laws and regulations Low power radio frequency electric machinery shall resist against interference from legal communications or from industrial scientific and medical radio electric machinery Battery Warning Do not mutilate puncture or dispose of batteries in fire The batteries can burst or explode releasing hazardous chemicals Discard used batteries according to the manufacturer s instructions and in accordance with your local regulations Varning Eksplosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte Anv nd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren Kassera anvant batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion Advarsel Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig handtering Udskiftning ma kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type Lev r det brugte batteri tilbage tilleverand ren Varoitus Paristo voi r j ht jos se on virheellisesti asennettu Vaihda paristo ainoastaan valmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin H vit k ytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti Advarsel Eksplosjonsfare ved feilaktig skifte av batteri Benytt samme batteritype eller en tilsvarende type anbefait av apparatfabrikanten Brukte batterier kasseres i henhold til fabrikantens instruksjoner Waar
205. check box to send a blind copy of any e mail message you send to another e mail address The blind copy e mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e mail account enter that e mail address Sam Sync Outgoing Mail Options Your Name for display only Sam Sync Reply To Address Cif different than current account amp BCC a copy of outgoing msgs to sam samsync com 2 Tap Next 194 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Adding a signature If you want you can add a signature to each e mail message you send For example you can enter your name and telephone number so that they appear on each message you send To add a personal signature 1 Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box and then enter the text of the signature This signature is attached to all your outgoing e mail Outgoing Mail Options IY Attach signature to messages Sam Sync Marketing Director 555 555 5555 Signature lines appear only if check box is selected 2 Tap OK Setting advanced outgoing mail options You can set additional outgoing mail options To set advanced outgoing mail options 1 Optional Select any of the following Port Number The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server adm
206. ck Install 69 Refresh 324 repeating event 102 Stop 323 Tips 20 USB 5 VersaMail e mail 217 Web 317 Idle timeout of ISP or server connection 414 Images changing download preferences in Web Browser Pro 336 compression 336 copying from web pages 326 IMAP adding an account 183 190 197 ESMTP synchronization in 264 root mailbox 289 server options 185 193 199 synchronize an account 264 wireless folder synchronization 300 Importing data 37 40 478 Index Inbox Reminders screen and 215 synchronizing 266 viewing mail 206 Incoming mail server 184 191 197 198 changing 287 Indicator light 13 387 Infrared connections 398 399 HotSync operations 361 364 399 400 port 13 33 361 problems with IR HotSync operations 459 requirements for computer 361 INIT string sending 412 413 Initialization string 400 Installing applications 68 74 conduit to install applications 354 International characters Graffiti 2 writing 30 Internet access 317 340 entering ISP information 411 using non GSM phones to access 402 Internet Protocol address See IP address IP address 341 413 415 IR port 13 See also Beaming and Infrared IR See Infrared IrCOMM 33 361 398 399 IrDA Infrared Data Association 33 361 ISP changing 341 entering ISP information 411 login script 181 requirements for 180 requiring APOP 288 291 293 requiring ESMTP 293 Items See To Do List or Expense J JavaScript enabling and disabling 33
207. col Account Setup i Enter a name for this account e g My Mail and select settings Account Name Sam Yahoo Mail Service Yahoo Protocol v POP O Synchronize Only Account If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected it displays the correct protocol 6 Tap Next Entering the account username and password In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup you enter the username and password for this account The VersaMail 2 5 application provides strong 128 bit AES encryption for your password 183 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To enter the account username and password 1 Enter the username you use to access your e mail This is generally the part of your e mail address appearing before the symbol it is usually not your entire e mail address Sam Yahoo Enter a username and password for this account Username SamYahoo Password 2 Tap the Password box and then enter your password 3 Tap OK The Password box displays the word Assigned to indicate that a password has been entered 4 Tap Next Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server You need to verify your e mail address for the account you are accessing as well as enter the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers To enter mail server settings 1 If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on
208. computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation To prepare your Windows computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation 1 Use the Bluetooth setup software on your computer to open or create a virtual serial port for Bluetooth communication See the documentation included with your computer for instructions on changing port settings or configuring the Bluetooth serial host 2 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray and then select Setup Local USB v Local Serial Modem Network Custom Eile Link View Log About Help Exit aisle SAAD am Click the HotSync Manager icon 3 Click the Local tab General Local Modem Network Serial port Speed As Fast As Possible 7 Select the port from the drop down list 370 Conducting Bluetooth HotSync operations 4 In the Serial port drop down box select the virtual serial port you chose or created in step 1 5 Click OK To prepare your Mac computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation 1 Double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder 2 In the HotSync Controls tab select Enabled 3 Click the Connection Settings tab and select the On check box next to bluetooth pda sync port 600 _HotSyne Software Setup J e On connection Settings bluetooth modem bluetooth mo nown gt modem bluetooth sync port bluetooth pda fast as possible Internal Modem Internal Mode known
209. connection for this e mail account only from your default handheld service connection amp Always connect using Service w WiFi 802 11b 2 Tap the connection type you want from the Services pick list Mail Servers i Account v Sam Yahoo Protocol Synchronize Only i _ AT amp T WorldNet SFrname Compuserve SamYahoo Earthlink P PSINet Select a service connection for Unix this e mail account only Untitled x M Always c UUNet Service Y Verio WiFi 802 11b Canc Windows RAS Password i 3 Tap OK NOTE Select this option only if you want a given e mail account to use a different service from the default service you set for your handheld For example you may have selected a default service that uses the built in Bluetooth radio on your handheld to make a connection with your corporate account through a VPN However for your Earthlink account you may want to switch to the Earthlink service which uses an external modem accessory to make a connection with your e mail service provider To do this tap the Always connect using check box and then select Earthlink from the Services pick list Leave this box deselected if you want to use your default handheld service for this e mail account See Chapter 22 for information on setting connection types and selecting a default service for your handheld See Selecting a different service for a given e mail account earlier in this chapter for details on using a
210. copy e mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e mail account enter that e mail address Sam Yahoo Outgoing Mail Options Your Name for display only Sam Yahoo Reply To Address Cif different than current account O BCC acopy of outgoing msgs to 2 Tap Next Adding a signature If you want you can add a signature to each e mail message you send For example you can enter your name and telephone number so that they appear on each message you send 187 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To add a personal signature 1 Tap the Attach Signature to messages check box and then enter the text of the signature This signature is attached to all your outgoing e mail Sam Yahoo Outgoing Mail Options Attach signature to messages Sam Yahoo Marketing Director 555 555 5554 2 Tap Next Signature lines appear only if check box is selected Setting advanced outgoing mail options You can set additional outgoing mail options To set advanced outgoing mail options 1 Optional Select any of the following Port Number Authentication The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Select the My server requires authentication ESMTP ch
211. corner of any screen Tap the check box to 3 53 pm_Reminders remove a single O Gi IMAP mail account Tap the text to open reminder from the You have 18 new messages the account Inbox or list O GE Yahoo mail account view a detailed error You have 27 new messages message The mail icon tells you that this reminder is for an e mail message If you set up a scheduled auto get mail and you receive new e mail messages they are downloaded into the Inbox As you work with e mail messages in the Inbox the Reminders screen doesn t display a reminder for any new messages that arrive because the messages are already displayed in the Inbox NOTE A broken envelope icon 2 appears next to a message when an auto get mail or automatic send retry fails To respond to the reminders do one of the following m Tap the check box to clear a reminder from the list m Tap the reminder either the mail icon or the text description to go to the Inbox of that account or read a detailed error message m Tap Done to close the Reminders screen and return to whatever you were doing on your handheld before the Reminders screen appeared m Tap Clear All to dismiss all reminders in the Reminders screen When a notification appears in the Account Manager tap the notification to go to the Inbox of that account or launch the VersaMail application and go to that account Once you view a message in the Inbox it is removed from the Reminders screen notifica
212. ction to server Other e mail applications Select this option to synchronize an account by connecting directly with an IMAP server You must enter the information about the server in the VersaMail application on your handheld when you create the e mail account to access the server You will enter information about the incoming IMAP server the outgoing SMTP server your e mail username your password and your e mail address You can change these settings under Handheld Settings in the conduit see the procedure for setting handheld synchronization settings later in this chapter During the HotSync operation the conduit reads the settings you made If the settings do not exist or all server information is wrong an error is reported in the HotSync log file However if the incoming server IMAP is correct the Inbox is synchronized if the option to synchronize the Inbox is selected If the outgoing server SMTP is correct the Outbox is synchronized send e mail if you selected the option to synchronize the Outbox If neither is correct then nothing happens If you want to synchronize e mail for an account that requires ESMTP authentication for example Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication you must select the option to use ESMTP on your handheld See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for details The conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct IMAP Select Microsoft Exchange 5 0 or
213. cy symbol cxis es cea ereeves eb enc een esas 123 Setting Show Options sses sse ssra eee et civ ede sesiune uu 124 Working with Expense data on your computer 000 00 eee 125 Displaying the euro on your computer 0c a eve ea ie eee ecae van 125 Printing the CULO vores eirean aa dee eee see bese acewnennieeat es 125 Using Expense INenus cre ys4ie ere evens i eed eee EA E EAn ys 126 Record mMenu stregen iat ed dS eta SE OS 126 Optinis MENU siosedinirevduw ranie ne Eis edhe ves EE E EE eds 126 Chapter 11 Using Memo Pad 00 00 e ee eee eee 127 Creating Memos 2425 ts etk cele hike ato tis ie Gas tie eek Steet ok 127 Reviewing MEMOS paroa nha rao irona aie E Ra eot i RRP A DRO a SERRE Se 128 Using Memo Pad menus sitayecie tae beet tans bee eh eed eee 129 Record Menus esrerceroreeerror e eeri nei cakes Mae canes 129 Options MENUS rsrsrsr ei reiri ie s kinini eieaa eee ER 129 vi Contents Chapter 12 Using Note Pad 0 00 ee eee eee eee 131 Creating a Note s lt darcer ees i e ne coats ees ins ees eee COR ORR 132 Reviewing Notes sei ccteed wei tdut eet aee ye bie irate ive eg ois ts 133 Changing Note Pad color settings 20 2 5 se0baxtaciveraswsvndesen 133 Setting an alarm for a note 6 ocwnintewwecalewe emi awa teh aire emia 134 Using NOt Pad MENUS 25 viewed vetetae rst EREN EN ET ee ERS einen ad 136 Record MENU sess Servs ed erreguei a Lise els E ede es Cede 136 Options MENUS e irer
214. d items in the To Do List If you turn Items Show Only Due Items Record Completion Date Show Due Dates Show Priorities off this setting your To Do items disappear from the list when you complete check them Items that no longer appear on the list because you turn off this setting have not been deleted They are still in the memory of your handheld You can purge completed items to remove them from memory Shows only the items that are currently due past due or have no due date specified When this setting is active items that are not yet due do not appear in the list until their due date Replaces the due date with the actual date when you complete check the item If you do not assign a due date to an item the completion date still records when you complete the item Displays the due dates associated with items in the To Do List and displays an exclamation mark next to items that remain incomplete after the due date passes Shows the priority setting for each item Show Categories Shows the category for each item 3 Tap OK 175 Chapter 16 Using To Do List Using To Do List menus To Do List menus are shown here for your reference and To Do List features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here Record menu Options menu See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands Delete Item zD Attach Note A Delete Note
215. data to another device with an IR port When someone beams data to my handheld I get a message telling me it is out of memory I cannot send data to another Bluetooth device Solution m Ifyou are beaming to another Palm handheld confirm that your handheld and the other handheld are between ten centimeters approximately 4 and one meter approximately 39 apart and that the path between the two handhelds is clear of obstacles Beaming distance to other devices with an IR port may be different Move your handheld closer to the receiving device Make sure the receiving device has enabled beam receive Your handheld requires at least twice the amount of memory available as the data you are receiving For example if you are receiving a 30KB application you must have at least 60KB free Perform a soft reset See Performing a soft reset in Appendix A for more information Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your handheld and the other device Make sure that the receiving device has a compatible Bluetooth application installed 461 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Phone connection problems Problem My passkey is rejected when I attempt to pair or bond my mobile phone with my handheld Solution Some mobile phones require that you enter the passkey within a specific timeframe Make sure you have a passkey in mind and that you enter it immediately when prompted If
216. der that contains the e mail tap the envelope icon next to the message and then tap Reply on the pick list Speakeas 3 27 Inbox M Joe Sadusky 12 10p out of office tomorrow M Angela Yee 12 09p a review comments MES Travis Washington 12 08p Get Message o Move To 12 07p Mark Read day gt Mark Unread 11 41a v Reply actions for U Forward Delete Display 3 In the Reply Options dialog box select options for replying to the sender only or to all e mail recipients and for including original message text Reply Options M Include Original Text 4 Tap OK The e mail is addressed 5 Enter a reply Reply To Message To Travis Washington Subj re cool site neat Travis Washington lt trwashjr hotmail com gt wrote check this out 7v Sent CE ratte Cana 6 Tap Send to send the message or tap Outbox to send it later NOTE Replies are always sent as text only even if you received the original message in HTML format 240 Getting sending and managing e mail Working with URLs You can tap on a URL in a received message to view the web page or file associated with the URL Tapping the URL opens a browser window using the default browser on your handheld to view the page or file This feature only works with certain types of browsers if you do not have the right type of browser installed on your handheld and set as
217. ders 0O GE IMAP mail account You have 18 new messages O GE Yahoo mail account You have 27 new messages 212 Getting sending and managing e mail Setting notification options You can turn the notification sound on or off to notify you when new e mail arrives You can choose from a variety of sounds such as birds bumble bees or simply an alarm To set notification options 1 From the Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Options N Accounts Preferences R Display Options Notification Auto Get Mail Filters Disconnect About VersaMail 3 Tap Notification 4 Tap the Notify me of new mail and mail alerts check box 6 Notification M Notify me of new mail and mail alerts Notify Sound Alert Tap the Notify Sound pick list and select a sound The handheld plays a brief demonstration of the sound NOTE If you install a custom sound on your handheld it will appear on the Notify Sound pick list Notify me and maila Tap OK You can follow these procedure steps to change the notification sound or to turn the sound on or off at any time 213 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e mail In addition to setting a notification sound you can also choose to have your handheld s indicator light blink or to have your handheld vibrate when you receive
218. devices that are capable of Bluetooth communication or that have an infrared IR port View and edit digital pictures Read books or other documents When you install the software from the Software Essentials CD ROM that comes with your handheld your handheld can also help you connect and collaborate with friends and co workers play video clips and MP3 files expansion card Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld required sold separately and access productivity tools This additional software enables you to use your handheld to do the following m Chat and collaborate with friends and co workers who have Bluetooth devices a Play MP3 audio files expansion card required sold separately NOTE To install some software you may need to download files from the Internet to your computer Check the Software Essentials CD for details Locating handheld components Take a few moments to learn how to access and locate the components of your handheld Opening and closing your handheld When your handheld is open you can access additional controls on the front and back panels You can use your handheld in either the open or closed position To open your handheld m Slide the bottom portion of your handheld away from the screen U O a J 10 Locating handheld components To close your handheld m Slide the bottom portion of your handheld toward the screen
219. different service for a specific e mail account 285 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To change e mail address mail server settings 1 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 2 Tap the Options pick list and select Address Servers Mail Servers i Options Fra eoare Incoming Mail Email Addre Outgoing Mail Advanced Incoming Advanced Outgoing Incoming Manwsoerver Outgoing Mail Server 3 Edit any of the following Email address Incoming mail server Outgoing mail server Mail Servers Enter the e mail address of the account you are accessing such as examplename yahoo com Enter the name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com Enter the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com i Options w Address Servers Email Address SamYahook yahoo com Incoming Mail Server pop mail yahoo com Outgoing Mail Server smtp mail yahoo com 4 Tap OK 286 Going beyond the basics To change incoming mail server settings 1 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 2 Tap the Options pick list and select Incoming Mail Mail Servers ti Options Address Servers Max Messag Advanced Incoming X Get f Incoming Mail a Serine Outgoing Mail X Leave me Advanced Outgoing 3 Select or enter either of the following Get unread mail ONLY Maximum Message Size Mail Serv
220. dle cable double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and then click the Connection Settings tab Make sure the port selection matches the port where your HotSync cradle cable is attached a Ona Windows computer click the HotSync Manager and select Custom Check that the correct conduit is active m Ona Mac computer double click the HotSync Manager icon From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings Select your user name from the User pop up menu and check that the correct conduit is active m Click the HotSync Manager and select Custom Check that the correct conduit is active m Check that the correct conduit is installed Reinstall the HotSync Manager and make sure that the correct conduit is selected m Reinstall Palm Desktop software and select the option to synchronize with Microsoft Outlook If you are using the optional serial cradle cable or if you are performing a HotSync operation using a modem make sure you are not running another program such as America Online that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box a Make a backup copy of your Palm Desktop data and then reinstall Palm Desktop software 455 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions I tried to do a local HotSync operation but it did not complete successfully Make sure your handheld is seated in the cradle cable correctly Check the connection between the HotSync cradle cable and the USB or serial port on
221. ds for uniform resource locator m The rest of the screen is devoted to displaying the content of the web page You can perform other actions by tapping items in menus Like in other Palm OS applications when you select the title bar it is replaced by the menu bar Menu bar Menu items __ GREY Edit Options p OpenURL Bookmark URL View Bookmarks i eae pee antec A View Saved Pages Connect 2 Goce SEOUL Som LULA Y Je Advanced Search Preferences dl Getting help in Web Browser Pro Getting help in Web Browser Pro Help is available in the following locations Most dialog boxes in Web Browser Pro have help about the options in the dialog box To see that information tap the Tips icon O For an onscreen keyboard to help you input text tap the Menu icon tap Edit and then tap Keyboard m For help with drawing Graffiti 2 characters tap the Menu icon O tap Edit and then tap Graffiti 2 Help Disconnecting from and connecting to the Internet While you re working with stored information in Web Browser Pro such as saved pages stored versions of pages and so forth you can disconnect from the Internet in order to reduce usage charges You can connect to the Internet again when you need access again To disconnect from the Internet 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Disconnect in the Page menu Page p Open URL Bookmark URL View Bookmarks i feerastersscncssoat
222. duits are set to synchronize files On a Mac computer double click the HotSync Manager icon From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings Select your user name from the User pop up menu and check that the correct conduit is active Your computer s infrared port may be set to search automatically for the presence of other infrared devices Consult the documentation for your operating system for information about turning off this option In some cases simply moving your handheld away from the computer s infrared port solves the problem If the computer running Palm Desktop software synchronizes with more than one handheld each handheld must have a unique name Assign a user name to your handheld the first time you perform a HotSync operation Be aware that synchronizing more than one handheld with the same user name causes unpredictable results and potentially loss of your personal information Make sure that Bluetooth communication is enabled on both your handheld and your computer When you perform a Bluetooth HotSync operation your handheld attempts to connect to a Bluetooth virtual serial port on your computer First it looks for a Bluetooth serial HotSync port If it cannot find that port it then looks for a generic Bluetooth serial port However some generic Bluetooth serial ports do not support HotSync operations Your handheld may not be able to recognize the virtual serial port on your Windows computer Try val
223. e Help menu in Palm Desktop software m Mac The electronic Palm Desktop Software for the Macintosh User s Guide To access this guide open the Palm folder and then open the Documentation folder Double click the file Palm Desktop pdf Exploring Your Handheld Your Palm Tungsten T2 handheld can help you stay organized on time and up to date with daily tasks while you are away from your desk Use your new handheld to do the following Enter your schedule in Date Book Keep all your contact names addresses and phone numbers in Address Book Prioritize and assign your tasks a due date in To Do List Jot quick notes directly on the screen in Note Pad Record thoughts and listen to them later in Voice Memo Track your expenses and create expense reports in Expense Set alarms from World Clock Date Book Note Pad and Voice Memo to keep yourself on schedule and remind yourself of appointments and notes Set preferences for how you receive alarms hearing a sound seeing a blinking indicator light or feeling your handheld vibrate Choose any combination Synchronize your data with Palm Desktop software on your Windows or Mac computer so you always have a backup copy Insert an SD SDIO or MultiMediaCard expansion card to add more software or memory or to back up your data Connect your handheld with a mobile phone to access the Internet send SMS messages and exchange e mail messages Share information with other
224. e interference by one or more of the following measures Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna Increase the separation between the equipment and receiver Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the receiver is connected Consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help The use of shielded I O cables is required when connecting this equipment to any and all optional peripheral or host devices Failure to do so may violate FCC rules CAUTION Changes or modifications not covered in this manual must be approved in writing by the manufacturer s Regulatory Engineering Department Changes or modifications made without written approval may void the user s authority to operate this equipment Responsible Party Palm Tungsten T2 Product Family Palm Solutions Group 400 N McCarthy Boulevard Milpitas California 95035 Tested to Comply United States of America With FCC Standards 408 503 7500 FOR HOME OR OFFICE USE 467 Product Regulatory Information MPE Maximum Permissible Exposure Statement RF Exposure Compliance In order for this device to comply with FCC rules under the provision of Part 15 247 b c it must operate in a manner that ensures that the public is not exposed to radio frequency energy levels in excess of the Maximum Permissible Limits MPE It is recommended that the antenna of this device be placed at 20 cm or more from its u
225. e you can remove your handheld from the cradle cable Gently tilt your handheld forward in the cradle cable and then lift it up to remove it 358 Conducting cradle cable HotSync operations Performing a direct HotSync operation Mac computers When you installed Palm Desktop software you entered a user name This user name is the connection between your handheld and your computer The first time you perform a HotSync operation the Palm Desktop software does the following m Adds a user name to your handheld m Creates a folder for the user name in the Users folder inside the Palm folder For example if you entered Jane Garcia as your user name a folder named Jane Garcia is created in the Users folder 808 J Users sEm iz A Back View Computer Home A Y Palm User2 amp Conduit Data l gt Conduit Settings gt Files to Install r4 HotSync Log v lt gt Shown with Mac OS X m Creates a file named User Data in your user name folder User names appear in the User pop up menu on the right side of the toolbar You can change users by selecting a new name in the pop up menu Each subsequent time you perform a HotSync operation HotSync Manager reads the user name from your handheld and synchronizes the data in the folder of the same name Be sure you select the correct user name from the User pop up menu before entering data on Palm Desktop or performing a HotSync operation
226. e Cea On eee tee eae eek eke eee ees 136 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos 00 00 e eee eerie 137 Viewing ONCE sie tie nec devewennars Kes oon dintuees eaten teenie 137 Viewing photos in Thumbnail view ssassn eee 138 Viewing photos in List VIEW s ocei oes eee beech eee pero eek es 138 Viewing a slide show sic ciiicis edavesy viet ex vsdet ce eeveveubewes 139 R tating PHOS 24 oye he aneor ke ngs tee eae eee EE EERE 140 Viewing photo information js ity cen aea dea de desde eben ue ennen 140 Organizing PHOS firs aeti ab eran ene kaa A ee RAE aera Kio aa 141 Sorting photos in List VIEW wend tee beed tend ea bee sees bea Se teeue eed 141 Creating an AlDUMi i246 vieetie Ve Gis Pie ens Pie errs CREE eee 142 Filing photos in albums i 7cexccdoctvecaetepnt nee Ree nrnna 142 Copying photos 34 shin eih eset epee be A ee ee ees 143 Renaming or deleting an album eke cnn a nkne eee ben meee een eR 144 BEAMING PUGS i iit ether ia a eee teh Pied Peak a baa tee ks 145 Deleting phOtOS miertoundssdetiie edorntendey mirni tni pii Siekis 146 Working with photos on your computer sssusa s sesser sssr rrn 146 Using Palm Photos menus 432 oi otha sive vad ais bbc dine ae ea rrene 147 Photo mmen v avcnc gst ne eee bart akse wae igs eens bet eau tinea cena 147 Options MENUS 2 554 cede Seo eet ea ek Geet en brane at EE Os 147 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link 0 00 e eee 149 What can you do with a phone connect
227. e Command stroke anywhere in the Graffiti 2 area the Command toolbar appears just above the Graffiti 2 writing area to indicate that you are in Command mode Command 4 Memo 1of5 i Unfiled iUnfiled Undo Cut Copy Paste Beam Delete 49 Chapter 4 Working with Applications The Command toolbar displays context sensitive menu commands for the active screen For example if text is selected the menu icons displayed may be Undo Cut Copy and Paste Tap an icon to select the command or immediately write the corresponding command letter for an appropriate command in the Graffiti 2 writing area For example to select Paste from the Edit menu draw the Command stroke followed by the letter p Command mode is active only for a short time so you must tap an icon or write the command letter immediately to select the menu command Choosing application preferences You can set options that affect an entire application in the application s Preferences dialog box To change preferences for an application 1 Open an application 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Options and then select Preferences NOTE Not all applications have a Preferences command 4 Make changes to the settings 5 Tap OK Performing common tasks The tasks described in this section use the term records to refer to an individual item in any of the applications a single Date Book event Address Book entry To Do List item
228. e Password 432 Setting Personal Preferences Making records private In many applications you can make individual records private Private records remain visible and accessible however until you select the Security setting to hide or mask all private records Masked records appear as gray placeholders in the same position they would appear if they were not masked and are marked with a lock icon Hidden records disappear completely from the screen If you define a password for your handheld you must enter it to display private records Address All Abrams Liz 650 454 6121 Beckman Rachel 510 532 0746 Bertolli Marcus 213 422 1363 x Carpenter Joan 718 824 1548 Carter Melanie 212 395 6277 To hide all private records 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the Current Privacy pick list and select Hide Private Records Preferences Security Password gucsscuesossancisecestisieessanciasnig ant aH Mask Private Records Hide Private Records Help Tap Hide Private Records 3 Tap OK to confirm that you want to hide private records 4 Tap Done 433 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Hide Private Records Done Automatic Help To mask all private records 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security Mask Private Records 4 Tap Done To display all private records 1
229. e application on your handheld and perform a HotSync operation Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the following on your Windows computer See the Palm Desktop software online help for details This feature is not available on Mac computers m Add modify and delete your Expense data m Organize your Expense data by category amount date type or notes a View Expense data in various formats List Large Icons or Small Icons Record individual expenses in various currencies and display the total in one selected currency type m Print Expense reports m Transfer Expense data to other applications such as Microsoft Excel using the Send command or Export command and import data in popular file formats Displaying the euro on your computer When you perform a HotSync operation the euro symbol is transferred to Palm Desktop software like any other piece of data on your handheld The symbol appears in Palm Desktop software however only if you are using fonts that support the euro symbol These fonts are part of the operating system on your computer They do not reside with your Desktop application and they are not produced by Palm Inc For more information refer to the documentation that accompanies your desktop computer s operating system Printing the euro Even with operating system support problems may arise when you print documents that contain the euro When a font is present on both the printer and the
230. e based on the date and time settings in the primary location 346 Adding a location To select the secondary locations 1 Tap the pick list next to the secondary location World Clock A 7 Palo Alto oft 10 31 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 Secondary location ________ w Tokyo London pick list 3 31 pm 6 31am Sun Dec 7 Sun Dec 7 Set Date amp Time 2 Tap the location you want to use as the new secondary location If an appropriate location does not appear in the list see the next section Adding a location Adding a location If an appropriate location does not appear in the Location pick list you can add a new location to the list When you add a location the default Time Zone and Daylight Saving settings are usually correct However you can adjust these settings if necessary When the Daylight Saving options are active the time change automatically occurs at 1 00 AM on the selected start and end dates To add a location 1 Tap a Location pick list 2 Select Edit List 3 Tap Add 4 Select a location that is in the same time zone as the city you want to add 5 Tap OK 6 Optional Tap the Name field and modify the location name 7 Optional Tap the Time Zone box and select a time zone Edit Location i Name Palo Alto Time Zone USA Pacific This location observes Daylight Saving Time Start First Sunday of April End Last Sunday of October 347 Chapt
231. e desktop later in this chapter for configuration information Auto Get Mail To activate the schedule tap Get Mail Or perform a Hot Sync operation now using the VersaMail conduit with accounts active Auto get notifications The auto get mail feature provides three different types of alerts during and after message retrieval m Depending on the connection type a series of status messages may appear during the auto get connection and mail retrieval process m You can choose to have your handheld alert you when a new message arrives in your account The beep or alert sound your hear is called a notification Your handheld also notifies you of a new message s arrival by blinking an indicator light or vibrating if the right preferences are turned on For more information see Making your handheld buzz or blink when you get new e mail later in this chapter NOTE You must turn the Notification option on to have your handheld notify you when new messages are received See Setting notification options later in this chapter for more information If auto get discovers and downloads new messages for a given e mail account a notification appears in the Reminders screen displaying the account name and the number of new messages If auto get is scheduled for more than one account a separate notification appears for each account See Viewing and using the Reminders screen later in this chapter 3 53pm Remin
232. e documentation supplied by the plug in vendor for more information about each E Handheld Settings Account Information Server Settings Attachment Conversion Attachment Conversion Plug In Configuration iy Mic ford doc DataViz Documents To Go z E Microsoft Excel xls xlt Not Selected DataViz Documents To Go DEVIS DECIME ooo e Power Point Presentation ppt a Web Page html htm Not Selected E Adobe Acrobat pdt Not Selected CD Compressed File zip Not Selected ka Sound File wav Not Selected 27 GIF Image gif Not Selected il Bitmap Image bmp Not Selected LAY JPG Image ipeg ipa Not Selected xl Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 2 Active Accounts 2 6 Click save Synchronizing an account To synchronize accounts you must set the HotSync action for the VersaMail application in the HotSync Manager You can however exclude e mail accounts from a HotSync operation TIP If you don t want an account synchronized deselect the check box Select this check box to synchronize this e mail account when you perform a HotSync operation To select which accounts are synchronized during a HotSync operation 1 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray 2 Select Custom 276 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop 3 Select VersaMail in the Conduit list Custom Joe Sadusky ee x Handheld overwrites Desktop
233. e filter check boxes to select the filters you want to use for subsequent e mail transactions IMPORTANT If you deselect a filter listed under Connected be sure that the filter is deselected also under Synchronize 5 Tap OK 282 Going beyond the basics Editing or deleting a filter You can edit a filter to change its name or the criteria in the filter To edit or delete a filter 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Options and then select Filters 3 Tap the name of the filter 4 Do one of the following To edit the filter revise your entry in the Name field and or your selections in the pick lists and revise the text in the edit line Tap OK To delete the filter tap Delete and then tap Yes to confirm the deletion 5 Tap OK Managing mail settings You can configure advanced mail settings such as server information incoming and outgoing mail server options and more for each e mail account To select the account whose settings you want to manage 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options CENT Accounts Preferences R Display Options Pane ee oe Auto Get Mail About VersaMail 3 Select Mail Servers Mail Servers i Account v Sam Yahoo Shows server settings for current account Tap the Account pick list Protocol w POP to edit the account Username SamYahoo Password i O Always connect using 283 Chapter
234. e front panel of your handheld Note Pad opens to display the list of all your records TO Note Pad button TIP Press the Note Pad application button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have records Chapter 12 Using Note Pad Creating a note A record in Note Pad is called a note You can assign notes to categories and mark them private as described in Chapter 4 This section covers how to create a note To create a new note 1 4 Tap New Unfiled 1 16 pm 6 29 A Enter title here Write information Write the information di Tap the pen selector to se unwanted strokes Graffiti 2 writing Tap Done To clear the screen 1 Tap the Menu icon here i Pen selector m Eraser rectly on the handheld screen lect a different pen width or select the eraser to remove Optional Select the time at the top of the screen and then enter a title using 2 Select Edit and then select Clear Note 132 Reviewing notes Reviewing notes To review a note In the Note Pad list select the note title TIP You can also select review and move between notes with the navigator See Using the navigator in Chapter 2 for details Note Pad v All 1 9 26 pm PZ 2 9 32 pm 12 6 Select a note to view Tap Done Changing Note Pad color settings To set the colors 1 In the Note Pad list
235. e installation menu did not appear when I inserted the Desktop Software CD ROM or the Software Essentials CD ROM into my Windows computer I cannot install Palm Desktop software on my Windows computer I cannot install Palm Desktop software on my Mac computer My files didn t install during a HotSync operation I can t add more files to the Palm Quick Install list Solution 1 From the Windows desktop click Start 2 Select Run 3 Click Browse 4 Locate your CD ROM drive and select the Autorun file 5 Click Open 6 Click OK Try the following 1 Disable any virus scanning software on your computer 2 Close any open applications 3 Make sure your computer has at least 50MB of disk space available 4 Delete all temporary files 5 Run ScanDisk or another disk verification tool on your computer 6 Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop software Try the following 1 Disable any virus scanning software on your computer 2 Quit any open applications 3 Make sure your computer has at least 50MB of disk space available 4 Uninstall and then reinstall Palm Desktop software If files do not install after you perform a HotSync operation the file type was not recognized Try launching the associated application from your handheld and then performing another HotSync operation If the files still remain in the list they are not associated with an application on your handheld and
236. e mail service provider in order for the auto get mail feature to work Auto get mail only retrieves mail over an already operating connection For example you must be connected to a service provider through a LAN access point or through your mobile phone using a GPRS or Bluetooth connection If auto get downloads any new messages your handheld notifies you by blinking an indicator light beeping or vibrating The handheld also displays a visual list of notifications called the Reminders screen The auto get feature downloads the first 3KB of each message If a message is larger than 3KB tap the More button on the message screen to download and view the entire message Auto get mail recognizes any filter criteria you have set up for downloading messages to your handheld See Managing mail filters later in this chapter for information Any messages that do not meet the filter criteria will not be downloaded during an auto get To retrieve messages that do not conform to filter criteria perform a manual get with all filters turned off If auto get is taking place and you turn your handheld off or the connection to your e mail service provider is disconnected the auto get fails If you are attempting an auto get over a network from a public location you must be in range of a network access point for the auto get to work 209 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Scheduling auto get mail When setti
237. e on the go with the voice recorder Exchange data with other Bluetooth devices such as handhelds phones PCs printers networks and more other Bluetooth devices sold separately Share data make backups and extend storage capacity with optional expansion cards expansion slot included expansion cards sold separately View clear sharp colorful images on the high resolution screen Stay organized and on time by keeping your appointments contact information and to do items in one place Quickly jot notes or memos on the fly Access the Internet and browse or search your favorite web sites Send receive and compose e mail and SMS messages View and edit digital pictures Read documents on the go To use the Bluetooth communication features you must have a mobile phone that supports infrared or Bluetooth communication For more information see Chapter 14 Web browsing and e mail applications also require Internet access See Internet access requirements later in this chapter for details Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Palm Tungsten T2 Handheld System requirements To install and operate Palm Desktop software your computer system must meet the requirements described in this section Minimum requirements Windows computers The minimum requirements for Windows computers are as follows IBM compatible Pentium class computer One of the following operating systems Windows NT 4 0 Workstation
238. e size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total including attachments IMAP accounts Sam IMAP Incoming Mail Options Incoming Mail Options Get unread mail ONLY M Get unread mail ONLY O Delete messages on the O Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail server when they are deleted in VersaMail Leave mail on server e g to view on desktop later Port Number 110 Port Number 143 O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Secure Connection SSL Maximum Message Size 5 KB Maximum Message Size 5 KB 2 Tap Next Setting outgoing mail options Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts 186 Setting up and managing e mail accounts To set outgoing mail options 1 Optional Do any of the following Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply To Address Enter the e mail address that you want recipients to see and reply to on your e mail messages only if this is different from the e mail address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look as though the e mail came from the address you entered BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e mail message you send to another e mail address The blind
239. e to add it as a trusted device Tap Find More to discover additional devices 5 Tap OK 394 Setting Communication Preferences 6 Enter the same passkey on your handheld and the trusted device Some Bluetooth devices have a built in passkey others enable you to choose the passkey see the documentation included with your Bluetooth device for information In either case you must use the same passkey for both the device and your handheld Many phones also require you to put the phone into a mode where it can accept a key exchange for bonding in a trusted pair See the documentation included with your phone for information Bluetooth Security Enter passkey for Lars T39 7 Tap OK 8 Tap Done to return to the Bluetooth Preferences screen 9 Tap Done again To view details about a trusted device 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap Trusted Devices 3 Select the device you want to view Trusted Devices Li 395 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 4 Tap Details Device Details i Trusted Device Name Lars T39 Remote Device Address 00 80 37 06 64 C4 Most Recent Connection 12 13 01 1 17 pm Type Phone 5 Tap Done to return to the Trusted Devices screen 6 Tap Done again to return to the Bluetooth Preferences screen 7 Tap Done again To delete a trusted device 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Blueto
240. e username and mail service you entered Check the address to verify that it is correct and edit it if necessary If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen enter the e mail address for your account Sam Sync Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address E mail address will be filled in SamSync earthlink net automatically if you chose a Incoming Mail Server preconfigured mail service pop earthlink net 5 Mail servers will be filled in automatically if the VersaMail application knows the names based on the mail service you chose Outgoing Mail Server smtp earthlink net 191 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 2 Enter the name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected the correct server name is displayed 3 Enter the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected the correct server name is displayed 4 Tap Next 5 Do one of the following To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application tap Done After you finish setting up a synchronize only e mail account you need to configure this account on your desktop See Configuring an account in Ho
241. eck box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for information If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a password and then tap OK 188 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Sam Yahoo Advanced Outgoing Options Port Number 25 X My server requires authentication ESMTP Username Password Username and Password fields appear only if Ti od ESMTP check box is selected Tap done to complete setup 2 Tap Done Testing your new account After you finish setting up a new e mail account the Inbox of the account you just created is displayed You can test whether the e mail account is set up and working properly by tapping Get Mail See Getting e mail by subject or getting the entire message later in this chapter for more information Creating a synchronize only account NOTE You must be using a Windows
242. ecognized as an i at the end of the down stroke The i will not be recognized as an i until you enter another symbol that establishes by its shape or position that the down stroke was not part of a two stroke character such as t or k or until a limited time window expires Similarly recognition of a space symbol a horizontal stroke from left to right or a period symbol after a down stroke is dependent upon where the down stroke was drawn a The Graffiti 2 writing area is divided into two parts one for writing lowercase letters and one for writing numbers Capital letters are formed across the imaginary line that divides the two areas The small marks at the top and bottom of the Graffiti 2 writing area indicate the two areas Write letters here Write numbers here o O Q ABC 123 Division marks Write capital letters here To write Graffiti 2 characters 1 Tap the screen where you want your text to appear You need to tap above the Graffiti 2 writing area and you must see a blinking cursor before you write the text 2 Use the tables on the following pages to find the stroke shape for the letter you want to create For example the stroke shown below creates the letter n Lift stylus here Start stroke at heavy dot 3 Position the stylus in the left side of the Graffiti 2 writing area 4 Start your stroke at the heavy dot and draw the first stroke sh
243. ects only the message size author and subject or you can get entire messages immediately If you choose to get message subjects only and want to read a full message you can get more of the message If you choose to get the entire message the body text of the message will be downloaded up to the maximum message size you select See Reading e mail later in this chapter for information Choosing the e mail account and displaying the Inbox To view the e mail in an account you must switch to that account and then get the e mail For example if you want to collect and view the e mail from your Yahoo account you switch to the account created to retrieve e mail from your Yahoo account To display an account and its Inbox 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Accounts 206 Getting sending and managing e mail 3 Select Account Setup Accounts Sam Yahoo 1 Sam IMAP 2 Sam Sync 3 Speakeasy d4 Account Setup 4 Tap the name of the account you want from the list 5 Tap the folders pick list and tap Inbox if the Inbox is not displayed 0 0 Getting e mail by subject or getting the entire message When you get e mail messages you can choose to get the subject only or to get the entire message You can also use the Details dialog box to select options for getting unread e mail only downloading attachments using filters and more To get e mail messages
244. ed port of your computer 363 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 6 Tap the HotSync icon to start the IR HotSync operation Connecting with the desktop using IR to PC Handheld Tap here to start IR HotSync Ay IR to PC Handheld operation Returning to cradle cable HotSync operations It s easy to return to using the cradle cable for HotSync operations If your cradle cable is connected to a USB port you can continue using it while HotSync Manager is configured for infrared communication Use the following instructions to return to Local USB cradle cable HotSync operations only when necessary such as when you have disconnected the cradle cable from the USB port To return to local USB cradle cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer 1 If necessary connect the cradle cable to the USB port of the computer you use for HotSync operations 2 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray and select Local USB if it is not already selected To return to local Serial cradle cable HotSync operations on a Windows computer 1 If necessary connect the cradle cable to the port of the computer you use for HotSync operations 2 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray 3 Select Setup and then click Local 4 Select the COM port where your cradle cable is connected 5 Click OK On a Mac computer the HotSync Manager software monitors all ports at the same
245. ed page you want to edit Tap Edit Edit the information about the saved page Tap the Name field and then enter a new name Tap the Category pick list to change the category or to create a new category Save Page Tap here to enter a new name Tap here to change the category Tap Save A confirmation dialog box appears Tap Yes Tap Done 332 Finding web pages you recently visited Deleting a saved page You can delete saved pages you no longer want in order to make more free space available on your handheld To delete a saved page 1 2 3 Tap the Menu icon Tap View Saved Pages in the Page menu Tap the name of the saved page you want to delete Tap Delete A confirmation dialog box appears Tap OK Tap Done Finding web pages you recently visited Using the Back and Forward icons to browse through the pages you recently visited one page at a time can be tedious Instead you can use the History list to view a list of the pages you visited and go directly to any page in that list The History list contains a record of the last 50 pages you have visited and is saved even when you exit Web Browser Pro Returning to a page you visited To return to a page you visited 1 2 Tap the Menu icon Tap Options and then tap History 3 Tap the name of the web page you want to visit History Palm com Products Servi 10 58 am 333 Chapter 19 Using
246. ee eae es 173 Setting AUS date crits erre cerida nirede Kee Mes pire wie nthe Fad 174 Setting To Do Preferences osc k cs oye ek eee ee toe ee ee 175 Using To Do List MENUS a s dear aee Geman pi tasa Gee eee Goede eRe Te 176 Record Menu n s annan nannan eee ene n teen teen ees 176 Options MCN saae ii Pilate eed RG ie ted Es pees Oe 176 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 177 Palm VersaMail personal e mail software features 177 Getting started with the VersaMail application 045 178 Synchronizing an existing username 6 5015 ibsnissiveeiaee enon ees 178 Upgrading a MultiMail VersaMail database 0 0 178 Setting up and managing e mail accounts 00 eee eee ee 179 Account and connection types niicsu tied cetis ae eiwaeds Mew eade ees 179 Network e mail account prerequisites 0c eee ca eee eee ins 180 Creating a network e mail account 1 0 0c00 cat eves ees eva eee ves 182 Creating a synchronize only account 0 0 189 Editing e mail accounts wiikaeeee dee eadye ts eadewns heteele hele eet ea 196 Deleting an e mail account t14 4 08 icewteeedseds etiwsds eR ede wets 203 Selecting a different service for a given e mail account 204 Troubleshooting account access problems o n annann nnna 206 Getting sending and managing e mail 6 00 cece eee eee 206 Getting email ee srce eke phos uve eeae e
247. ee sede sens cea et 206 Auto get mail with notification 2260s c5e6ee teen seete et eee ee aeas es 209 Inbox icons in the VersaMail application 0 0 e cee eee 217 Reading e mail 64 chad hin cee hw ees deh Peres eke ch eee eee 218 Creating and editing mail Toldets lt viv cencswe cee yea iad aya me eek 228 viii Contents Creating and sending new e mail ai censscee easy var aeed dae eeedas 229 Working with URLS sers e1ddtseeie see poke ee eek eens vat eee ves 241 Working with attachments 2044 24 15 2444 si ehh ve rnrn nren 241 DGleting Messag S 42 iicc i irs ane Pepeeus OC eee eerste a as aaa 251 Emptying the dos ccencwent ep aV exten chert E o eee Vas hehe ine 254 Marking messages as read or unread 2 v coxesveveveevendeanvos os 256 Setting preferences for getting and deleting e mail 257 Adding or updating an Address Book entry directly from a message 258 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop 259 Configuring an account in HotSync Manager 0 000 eee 260 Setting synchronization options and account settings 261 Converting attached files nnan eee ie ies cede as Weds bas OLU 274 Synchronizing an account odie hee bdecnin oaS6 Pha oDoe Rees eH ees 276 Using SSL with the conduit cxciccusedeee val eoed rnnr rnrn erenn 278 Going beyond the basics aiic2 0 20 Kawau teow eee Chee VRE See Sea 278 Managing mail HNCEs ass ascend st
248. een tap Lookup 231 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 3 4 5 On the Address Lookup screen tap the address you want and then tap Add pen Joanna jkwan jkwan net adusky Joe jms510 hotmail com Look Un Optional Repeat steps 2 and 3 for each address you want to add To enter an address in the cc or bec field tap the field name and follow the steps given for the To field Using Smart Addressing to address a message Smart Addressing types ahead and completes a recognized e mail address Smart Addressing automatically fills in fields when the recipient s name and e mail address are in your Address Book By default Smart Addressing is selected in VersaMail Preferences To use Smart Addressing to address a message 1 2 In the New Message screen tap in the To field Start entering the person s name such as Joe Smith Once the name is recognized from your Address Book the name and e mail address are automatically completed on the recipient list For example if you have a Joe Smith and a Joan Smith in your Address Book and no other names starting with J once you type Joe the entry Joe Smith is completed with the correct e mail address If Smart Addressing recognizes more than one name for the typed entry or if the recognized name has more than one e mail address associated with it all of the names or e mail addresses are displayed Nav
249. eens 81 Using Address Book menus 66000 c cece eee 83 Chapter 6 Using Calculator 000 cece eee 87 Performing calculations eresse dud ade ORs SG he ee ee Sea 87 Viewing Recent Calculations iwsvccdegedinceeadd deeds Cavedeadi pee chen 88 Using Calc lator MENUS sei esce s crate sche eter i aes metei nem irea 89 Chapter 7 Using Card Info 22 cc6066606 cccascdvseesaevatedevaecads 91 Reviewing Card Information 20 yack Pees dee bee chs Gene Ee tetas tes 91 Renaming aard rickds ertvu debi ede cies Bees ce Fe rinii rte meei 92 Fo tmat ng ACen viseri rers chactie conde ieee idee tee ere eles eens 92 Managing expansion cards 60 400 iain ewe eww ewe eben Renu ewe aN ioe 93 Using Card Info Menus serike aeeai ea kea ka a ter aad a HEE ese heen Pees 93 Card Men sesser t ahs era Sits dele a aa Cees a aS EAAS EA 93 Chapter 8 Using Date Book 000 e eee eee eee 95 Scheduling an eyent c2 10isu ci deneieiiue Herried enia a he He ine es 96 Selecting aN v t orrei norte rt EEEE ERRETRETA 99 Rescheduling an event nnnsunsnn rnern rsr r rrn rerrr rrer rreren 99 Setting an alarm for an event sunsunsun rreren rrr reren 100 Scheduling repeating or continuous events 2 26 cass vedse cre enss coneses 101 Changing the Date Book View vsivis seine eritadbsad eens ve 103 Contents Working in Week View 24 06erir yee eedaged eae ae rede eames e 104 Working in Month View s vsiys i swtieies eke aw aeier e
250. efault affects only the next HotSync operation Thereafter the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings To use a new setting on an ongoing basis click Make Default Thereafter whatever you selected as the default setting is used for HotSync operations HotSync action for Address Book ees Synchronize the files Be Macintosh overwrites handheld Pa O Handheld overwrites Macintosh BE O Do Nothing Default setting Synchronize the files ne gt Cc o Make Default _ Cancel Cox Shown with Mac OS X 7 Click OK 8 Close the Conduit Settings window 356 Conducting cradle cable HotSync operations Conducting cradle cable HotSync operations The simplest way to synchronize data is to perform a direct HotSync operation by seating your handheld in the cradle cable and pressing the HotSync button Performing a cradle cable HotSync operation Windows computers The first time you synchronize your data you need to enter user information on Palm Desktop software After you enter this information and synchronize with your handheld the HotSync Manager recognizes your handheld and doesn t ask for this information again If you are a system administrator preparing several handhelds for a group of users you may want to create a user profile See Creating a user profile later in this chapter before performing the following steps IMPORTANT You must perform your first HotSync operation with
251. efault setting is to synchronize all files Conduit Setup i Select the conduits to run during Modem HotSync M Address M Applications M Calc M Card Info M Date Book Dial M Expense Applications that do not have a database such as games do not synchronize even if you select the item in the Conduit Setup dialog box Tap OK Performing a modem HotSync operation After you prepare your computer and your handheld and select your Conduit Setup options you are ready to perform a modem HotSync operation To perform a modem HotSync operation 1 2 3 Tap the Home icon Select the HotSync icon Tap the Modem icon to dial the Palm Desktop modem and synchronize the applications Wait for the HotSync operation to complete If you have any problems conducting a successful HotSync operation see HotSync problems in Appendix B 369 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations Conducting Bluetooth HotSync operations If you have a Bluetooth computer running Windows 98 Me NT 2000 or Mac OS X version 10 1 2 or later with the Apple Bluetooth software you can use Bluetooth technology to perform wireless HotSync operations NOTE Go to the web site www palm com support globalsupport for additional information on compatibility with other versions of the Windows operating system Preparing your computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your
252. eld Send Memo Opens a dialog box where you can choose how you want to send the selected memo to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Options menus Record Edit Beatty Font F Phone Lookup L About Memo Pad Options Font F Preferences ZR Security H About Memo Pad Memo screen Memo list Preferences Displays the Memo Preferences dialog box where you define the sort order for memos About Memo Pad Shows version information for Memo Pad 129 Chapter 11 Using Memo Pad 130 Using Note Pad amp Note Pad provides a place to take notes in your own handwriting You can use Note Pad to do everything you might do with a piece of paper and a pencil Use Note Pad to do the following m Take notes draw a sketch or write any kind of message directly on your handheld screen Later you can enter this information into other applications m Set an alarm to use your notes as reminder messages Assign notes to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups m Exchange notes with other devices that have Note Pad 2 x installed and that use SMS or Bluetooth technology a Use Palm Desktop software and HotSync technology to copy and paste notes into popular computer applications like Microsoft Word or to send notes as e mail attachments To open Note Pad m Press the Note Pad application button on th
253. eld can discover The following methods enable you to discover the types of Bluetooth devices that are within range m Using an Internet application Access the Internet using Palm Web Browser Pro See Chapter 19 for details m Using the Send command Connect to a Palm OS handheld or a computer to exchange data or applications See Sending data in Chapter 3 for details on using this method m Using HotSync Manager software Connect to your computer to synchronize data with your handheld See Conducting Bluetooth HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for details m Using a collaborative application Connect to a Palm OS handheld using applications such as BlueBoard and BlueChat included on the Software Essentials CD ROM See the BlueBoard 2 0 Handbook and the BlueChat 2 0 Handbook on the Software Essentials CD ROM to learn more about these applications Other third party applications may be available Visit www palm com intl for information about downloading third party applications and refer to the documentation that comes with these applications for details on using them 397 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application
254. em HotSync operation Be sure to perform these steps before you leave your office so that your computer is ready to receive a call from your handheld To prepare a Windows computer for a modem HotSync operation 1 Confirm that the computer modem is connected and turned on and that no communications applications such as fax or telephony software are running on a COM port Make sure the computer is disconnected from all online services such as America Online AOL This helps to avoid conflicts with the COM port 2 Start HotSync Manager if it is not already running and from the HotSync Manager menu select Modem 365 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 3 Adjust the following options as needed General Local Modem Network Serial Port COM3 X Speed As Fast As Possible hd Modem MEMES EE Setup String ATSO 1M1L0 Serial Port Identifies the port for the modem If you are unsure of the port assignment look at the Modem Properties in the Windows Control Panel Speed Determines the speed at which data is transferred Try the As Fast As Possible rate first and adjust downward if you experience problems This setting allows your handheld to synchronize with your computer at the fastest speed possible Modem Identifies the modem type or manufacturer Refer to your modem manual or faceplate for its type or settings If you re not sure of your modem type or if your modem doesn t match any th
255. en 246 Getting sending and managing e mail When downloading is complete the Attachments dialog box appears showing all downloaded messages Follow the procedure for viewing an attachment presented earlier in this chapter Saving attachments to an expansion card If you have purchased an expansion card that provides extra memory you can save downloaded attachments to the expansion card To save an attachment to an expansion card 1 Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld 2 Follow the procedure for downloading attachments described earlier in this chapter 3 On the Attachments screen tap Save to Card Attachments ac books 2 doc Size 25k Viewer Type MSWc MMWordPlugin 4 Tap OK File Saved To Card The file is saved to the card Attaching files from a handheld application You can attach files on your handheld to e mail messages you send For example you can attach files from the various handheld applications such as any Date Book appointment vcs To Do List tasks vcs or text memos txt NOTE The maximum size message you can send is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total including attachments The maximum number of attachments for any e mail is ten regardless of the attachments total size You can attach the following types of files from a handheld application m vCard vcf m vCal vcs Memo Text txt m PRC prc a PDB pdb 247 Ch
256. en display a single category or all your applications By default your handheld includes system defined categories such as All and Unfiled and user defined categories such as Games Main and System You cannot modify the system defined categories but you can rename and delete the user defined categories In addition you can create your own user defined categories You can have a maximum of 15 user defined categories When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot the expansion card name appears as the last item in the category pick list You can assign applications to the expansion card but you cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card To categorize an application 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Category on the App menu 4 Tap the pick list next to each application to select a category Category Address Main Calc v Main Card Info wv System Date Book wv Main Expense v Main Graffiti 2 v System HotSync v System Memo Pad Main Note Pad Main Photos Main TIP To create a new category tap Edit Categories from the pick list Tap New enter the category name and then tap OK to add the category Tap OK again to close the Edit Categories dialog box 5 Tap Done 44 Changing the Applications Launcher display To display applications by category 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Do one of the following Tap the Home icon
257. ences If you don t periodically empty the trash and delete messages on the server any incoming e mail may bounce back to the sender See Setting preferences for getting and deleting e mail later in this chapter 251 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To delete one or more messages 1 Tap the folders pick list and select the folder that contains the message you want to delete Do one of the following Item to delete Action One message Tap the bullet next to the message s icon Multiple Tap the bullet next to the icon of each message that you want messages to delete A group of Drag the stylus along the left of the message icons To select adjacent another group lift the stylus and select the next group of messages messages Press Right on the navigator to move to and open the Message menu Press Down on the navigator to move to the Delete option and then press Select to delete the message TIP Alternately you can tap the message icon next to a selected e mail message and then tap Delete or tap the Menu icon and then select Delete AGTET Options Accounts Select All Deselect All Tap OK Optional Tap Also delete message s on server if you want to delete the message from the server now Delete Confirmation Delete message s from the hardheid If you selected the setting O Also delete message s Delete Msgs on Server in On Serve
258. encrypts your username and password when traveling over the network Some services require APOP to work properly while others do not work properly if APOP is used If you aren t sure if your ISP or web e mail provider supports APOP check with your e mail provider See Adding APOP to an account later in this chapter for information Enter the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Select this check box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for information If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a password and then tap OK 6 Click the Save icon lm on the toolbar to save the settings for this account 270 Synchronizing e mail between t
259. er and type the new character ShortCuts Preferences The ShortCuts Preferences screen enables you to define abbreviations for entering text with Graffiti 2 strokes This section describes how to create edit and delete a ShortCut Creating a ShortCut You can create a ShortCut for any words letters or numbers All ShortCuts you create appear on the list in the ShortCut Preferences screen All the ShortCuts are available in any of your handheld applications and are backed up on your computer when you perform a HotSync operation To create a ShortCut 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Shortcuts 2 Tap New 440 Setting Personal Preferences 3 6 On the ShortCut name line enter the letters you want to use to activate the ShortCut Preferences Shortcuts ShortCut Entry Li ShortCut Name br Breakfast di Dinner ds Date Stamp ShortCut Text dts Date and Time Stamp lu Lunch me Meeting ts Time Stamp Tap the ShortCut Text area and enter the text that you want to appear when you write the ShortCut characters TIP You may wantto add a space character after the last word in your ShortCut text This way a space automatically follows the ShortCut text Tap OK To use a ShortCut draw the ShortCut stroke followed by the ShortCut characters When you draw the ShortCut stroke the ShortCut symbol appears at the insertion point to show that you are in ShortCu
260. er 20 Using World Clock 8 9 To 1 Tap OK Tap Done set Daylight Saving options From the Edit Location dialog box tap the This location observes Daylight Saving Time check box to select it 2 Tap the Start box Set Start Date ti Jan Feb Mar MA May Jun Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Dec Week First Day Sunday 3 Tap the month when daylight saving begins 4 Tap the Week pick list 5 Select the week when daylight saving begins within the selected month 6 Tap the Day pick list 7 Select the day of the week when daylight saving begins within the selected week 8 Tap OK 9 Tap the End box and repeat steps 3 through 8 to select when daylight saving ends 10 Tap OK Modifying a location If you add a location and later realize you did not use the correct settings you can modify the location To modify a location 1 2 3 A Tap a Location pick list Select Edit List Select the location you want to modify Tap Edit 348 Removing a location 5 Adjust the settings See Adding a location earlier in this chapter for details 6 7 Tap OK Tap Done Removing a location If you no longer need a location that appears in the Location list you can remove it However you cannot remove a location that is currently assigned to the primary location To remove a location 1 2 3 Tap a Location pick list Select Edit List Select the locati
261. er 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Recovering from a forgotten password IMPORTANT Deleting a forgotten password also deletes all entries and files marked as Private If you are not locked out of your handheld and you forgot your password your handheld displays a hint if you entered one to help you remember the password If you are still unable to remember the password you can delete it from your handheld IMPORTANT If you synchronize with your computer before deleting a forgotten password your handheld restores your private entries the next time you perform a HotSync operation but it does not restore the password If you locked your handheld you must enter the exact password to reactivate your handheld If you forget the password your handheld will present the hint you have entered to help you remember the password If you still cannot remember the password you must perform a hard reset to resume using your handheld Performing a hard reset deletes all the records in your handheld however you can restore all synchronized data at the next HotSync operation See Performing a hard reset in Appendix A for more information To delete a forgotten password 1 Tap the Password box 2 Tap Lost Password Preferences Security ___ Tap here Password Please enter your current password Current Privacy Level v Hide Private Records Lock amp Turn Off Tap here 3 Tap Delet
262. er your password if you forget it This is optional 5 Enter a quick password This is optional 6 Tap OK 7 Enter the same password a second time and tap OK 8 Tap Done Changing or deleting a password Once you define a password for your handheld you can change or delete it at any time You must enter the current password before you can change or delete it To change or delete your password 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the Password box 426 Setting Personal Preferences 3 Enter the current password Preferences Security Pas Tap here Password Please enter your Auto Lock Handheld current password ee Current Privacy Level Hide Private Records 4 Tap OK 5 Do one of the following To change the password hint or quick password enter the new information and tap OK To remove the password tap Unassign Text Password i Full Password FERE Hint My dog Quick password He An optional quick password works only on the first entry attempt 6 Tap Done Masking your password entry Masking your password entry secures your password against accidental viewing by another person The password only shows asterisks as you are entering the characters To mask your password entry 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 From the Options menu select Security Options 427 Chapter 2
263. erences 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Buttons 2 Tap More 3 Tap HotSync 4 Tap the pick list next to the button you want to assign HotSync Buttons Customize the HotSync Button on the cradle or optional handheld modem GA HotSync Tap arrow ba l to show Aang pick list w HotSync Modem 5 Select the application that you want to assign to each button The default setting for each button is the HotSync setting which means that the cradle cable and optional modem accessories perform their normal HotSync functions 6 Tap OK twice to return to the Buttons Preferences screen 7 Tap Done 423 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Color Theme Preferences The Color Theme Preferences screen enables you to select a different set of pre defined colors for your handheld screen To select a color theme 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Color Theme Preferences Color Theme Select a Color Theme 2 Select a theme The new colors immediately appear on the screen You can scroll through the various color selections until you find the one you want to use 3 Tap Done Owner Preferences The Owner Preferences screen enables you to update the name company name phone number or any other information that you want to associate with your handheld This information could help someone contact you if you ever lose your handheld and there is sufficient batte
264. erences in Chapter 22 for instructions 2 Download the correct driver for your phone from www palm com support globalsupport 3 Install the phone driver as you would install any other add on application See Installing files and add on applications in Chapter 4 for details 4 Perform a HotSync operation If you need additional information about connecting your phone refer to the Phone Pairing at www palm com support globalsupport Using phone connections After you install the phone files and configure a link between your handheld and your phone you are ready to make connections Depending on the type of link you configured infrared cable or Bluetooth refer to the appropriate set of instructions below By default your handheld disconnects automatically when the connection is inactive for 1 minute If you used the Network Preferences screen to set up multiple network service profiles you can choose a different service when you establish a connection 157 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link See Network Preferences in Chapter 22 for information on setting up multiple network service profiles To make an infrared connection 1 2 3 4 Turn on your handheld and your mobile phone Activate the infrared port on your phone Align the infrared port on your handheld with the infrared port on your phone Launch the application that requires the phone connection For example to access the Inte
265. erforming HotSync Operations 3 If you are using the USB cradle cable you do not need to adjust the settings on the Connection Settings tab for a direct HotSync operation they are set automatically when you perform the first HotSync operation If you are using Mac OS 9 1 and the optional serial cradle cable click the Connection Settings tab and select the port where you attached the cradle cable D HotSync Software Setup H i HotSync Controls Connection Settings On Settings a Mw lt 2 Modem Port Modem Port As fast as possible O lt Palmconnect PalmConnect Mw lt 2 Printer Port Printer Port As fast as possible lt usB USB Settings Shown with Mac OS 9 1 You can set both Modem and Printer port settings and prepare your computer to synchronize with your handheld using the HotSync cradle cable or a modem However choosing both setups prevents you from using either port for other operations such as printing faxing or AppleTalk networking 4 Close the HotSync Software Setup window Customizing HotSyne application settings For each application you can define a set of options that determines how records are handled during synchronization These options are called a conduit By default a HotSync operation synchronizes all files between the handheld and Palm Desktop software In general you should leave the settings to synchronize all files The only reason you m
266. ers NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP e mail account the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them for example on your desktop or on the web and regardless of whether this check box is selected For IMAP accounts retrieves unread e mail only To get all e mail and not just unread e mail deselect Get unread mail ONLY Shows the maximum message size that you can receive li Options Incoming Mail I Get unread mail ONLY Max Message Size 5 X Leave mail on server 4 Tap OK KB 287 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To set additional incoming mail options 1 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 2 Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming Mail Servers i Options Address Servers Port Number Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail Advanced Incoming O Use APOP Advanced Outgoing 3 The incoming mail options are different depending on the connection type you selected and the server protocol POP or IMAP POP accounts Mail Servers IMAP accounts i Mail Servers i Options v Advanced Incoming Options v Advanced Incoming PortNumber 110 PortNumber 143 O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use APOP Port Number Secure Connection Leave mail on server POP only Use APOP
267. es a Use the Palm Desktop software and the cradle cable or infrared communication to synchronize your data b Tap Forgotten Password in Security to remove the password and delete all private records c Perform a HotSync operation to synchronize your data and restore the private records by transferring them from your computer to your handheld I forgot the password and my wm First use the password hint to try to remember the handheld is locked password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you must perform a hard reset to continue using your handheld See Performing a hard reset in Appendix A for more information Technical support If after reviewing the sources listed at the beginning of this appendix you cannot solve your problem go to www palm com support globalsupport or send an e mail to your regional Technical Support office Before requesting support please experiment a bit to reproduce and isolate the problem When you do contact support please provide the following information m The name and version of the operating system you are using m The actual error message or state you are experiencing m The steps you take to reproduce the problem m The version of handheld software you are using and available memory To find version and memory information 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Select Info from the App menu 465 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions
268. es on server Leave mail on server POP account only Port Number Use Secure Connection Maximum Message Size POP accounts Sam Yahoo To delete messages on your provider s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box To get e mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop select the Leave mail on server check box For example if you create an account to receive e mail from your Yahoo account and select this option your old Yahoo e mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo com to access your Yahoo e mail Inbox The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers respectively You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection see the next bullet item If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection select the Use Secure Connection check box See Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL later in this chapter for information on SSL To limit the maximum size of an incoming e mail message enter the size in kilobytes KB for Maximum Message Size The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default but you can enter a smaller size The maximum messag
269. etting Preferences for Your Handheld Graffiti 2 Preferences The Graffiti 2 Preferences screen enables you select an alternate stroke shape for specific characters To select alternate strokes 1 From the General Preferences list select Graffiti 2 2 Tap the letter you want to change Select a character below to tune it Ce Preferences Graffiti 2 Graffiti 2 Tuner y O Use this form of y or y 3 Tap the check box to activate the alternate stroke 4 Tap Done 5 Repeat steps 2 through 4 for other letters 6 Tap Done Power Preferences The Power Preferences screen enables you to set power consumption options You can control when your handheld turns on or automatically turns off and whether to receive beamed information Preferences Power Auto off after v 2 minutes Stay onin Cradle Off Beam Receive On M Power on when opened O Power off when closed 384 Setting General Preferences Auto off after Your handheld has an automatic shutoff feature that turns off the power after a period of inactivity This feature helps conserve battery power in case you forget to turn off your handheld If you find that your handheld shuts itself off before you finish reviewing the information on the screen you can increase the time setting of the automatic shutoff feature To set the Auto off after interval 1 From the General Preferences list select Power 2 Tap
270. ew The time bars show the duration of an event and illustrate event conflicts Compress Day View Controls how times appear in the Day View When Compress Day View is off all time slots appear When it is on start and end times appear for each event but blank time slots toward the bottom of the screen disappear to minimize scrolling Month View settings Applies to the Month View of Date Book You can deselect any or all of these check boxes to hide Timed Untimed or Daily Repeating events in the Month View only Preferences Opens the Preferences dialog box where you can customize Date Book s default time display and alarm settings Preferences Start Time End Time O Alarm Preset Alarm Sound w Alert Remind Me w 3 Times Play Every w 10 minutes Start End Time Defines the start and end times for Date Book screens If the time slots you select do not fit on one screen you can tap the scroll arrows to scroll up and down Alarm Preset Automatically sets an alarm for each new event The silent alarm for untimed events is defined by minutes days or hours before midnight at the beginning of the date of the event Alarm Sound Sets the tone of the alarm Remind Me Defines how many times the alarm will occur after the initial occurrence The choices are Once Twice 3 Times 5 Times and 10 Times Play Every Defines how often the alarm sounds The choices are Minute 5 minutes 10 minutes and 30 minutes A
271. ew 149 150 Phone preferences Dialer 111 main handheld preferences 420 SMS 159 Photos See Palm Photos Pick lists 19 PIM personal information manager using HotSync Manager with 76 Plug in applications 275 418 POP accounts APOP synchronization in 263 POP3 accounts 185 193 199 adding an account 183 190 197 Port number 288 291 Ports IR on handheld 33 361 serial 4 5 363 364 398 USB 4 5 363 364 398 Power button 13 Power preferences 384 386 PPP 413 PQAs 322 PRC application file extension 322 418 Preferences advanced e mail account 294 Bluetooth 389 397 Buttons 111 421 423 choosing 50 Color Theme 424 Communication 379 Connection 398 403 404 cradle setting 385 Date amp Time 381 382 deleting e mail 257 Digitizer 382 Formats 382 General 379 380 388 getting mail 257 Graffiti 2 384 mail databases 299 modem 294 Network 404 420 opening 380 Owner 424 Personal 380 Phone 420 Power 384 386 Security 425 ShortCuts 440 SMS 167 169 482 Index Sounds amp Alerts 386 388 Trash 255 Writing Area 388 Primary DNS 414 Printing expense reports 125 Prioritizing To Do List records 172 175 Private records displaying 434 hiding 433 hiding automatically 435 lost with forgotten password 432 masking 434 masking automatically 435 problems displaying 453 Problems beaming and sending 461 connecting toa phone 462 entering data 452 installing software 450 operating handheld 451 performing HotSync operations
272. example on your desktop or on the web and regardless of whether this check box is selected For IMAP accounts select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld If you don t choose this option and you tap Get amp Send all of your e mail messages on your provider s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox including messages you have already read To get all mail including mail you have already read and not just unread mail deselect Get unread mail ONLY To delete messages on your provider s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box 199 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Leave mail on server POP account only Port Number Use Secure Connection Maximum Message Size POP accounts Sam Yahoo To get e mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop select the Leave mail on server check box For example if you create an account to receive e mail from your Yahoo account and select this option your old Yahoo e mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo com to access your Yahoo e mail Inbox The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers respectively You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection see the
273. fault the full screen pen stroke activates Graffiti 2 Help Graffiti 2 AIBICIDJE I leh JIRILIMINIO P SEFIUIV waz H2 34 5 16 7 8 94 Drag to top of screen To change the pen preferences 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Buttons 2 Tap More Select a feature you can access by dragging your stylus from the writing area to the top of the screen g v Graffiti 2 Help i 3 Tap the pick list and select one of the following settings for the full screen pen stroke Brightness Opens the brightness control dialog box Keyboard Opens the onscreen keyboard for entering text characters Graffiti 2 Help Opens a series of screens that show the complete Graffiti 2 character set 422 Setting Personal Preferences Turn Off amp Lock Turns off and locks the handheld You must assign a password to lock the handheld When it is locked you need to enter the password to use your handheld Beam Data Beams the current record to another device with an IR port 4 Tap OK 5 Tap Done HotSync Buttons Preferences The Buttons Preferences screen also enables you to associate various applications with the HotSync button on the cradle cable and the HotSync button on an optional modem accessory Any changes that you make in the HotSync Buttons dialog box become effective immediately you do not have to change to a different screen or application To change the HotSync buttons pref
274. ff and then review it later You can allow wakeup at any time during specific hours of the day or not at all By default your handheld is set to not wake up For another Bluetooth device or application to wake up your handheld the application must remember your device name The BlueBoard and BlueChat applications on the Software Essentials CD ROM can remember device names however Address Book Memo Pad Note Pad and To Do List cannot remember device names and therefore cannot wake up another handheld NOTE Enabling the Allow Wakeup setting uses battery power even when your handheld is turned off Be sure to monitor your battery level 392 Setting Communication Preferences To enable wakeup 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap the Allow Wakeup pick list and select Yes 3 Preferences Bluetooth Bluetooth v On Discoverable v Yes Allow Wakeup pick list Allow Wakeup Yes Tap Done To enable wakeup during specific hours 1 2 3 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth Tap the Allow Wakeup pick list Select Scheduled Tap the hours box Preferences Bluetooth Wakeup Schedule Bluetooth On Device Name Discoverable Yes i Days 5 Ta s Bluetooth is scheduled to 1 Hours box turn on at 8 00 amon Mon Tue Wed Thu and Fri and turn off at 6 00 pm Tap the From box select the start time and
275. ffects only the next HotSync operation Thereafter the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings To use a new setting on an ongoing basis select the Set As Default box Thereafter whatever you selected as the default setting is used when you click the Default button in the Custom dialog box r HotSync Action for Date Book OK oe Cancel Help o 1 C Desktop overwrites handheld me T Set as default Geo C Handheld overwrites Desktop O28 Donothing Click OK Click Done to activate your settings 355 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations To customize HotSync application settings on a Mac computer 1 Double click the Palm Desktop icon in the Palm folder 2 From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings 3 From the User pop up menu select the appropriate user name 4 Select an application in the Conduit list 5 Click Conduit Settings eee Conduit Settings pr User dkajiyama ka ial Conduit Name Last HotSync Next HotSync Action Address Book 5 1 02 7 33 AM Synchronize Backup 5 1 02 7 33 AM Backup Date Book 5 1 02 7 33 AM Synchronize Install 5 1 02 7 33 AM Install Files Memo Pad 5 1 02 7 33 AM Synchronize To Do List 5 1 02 7 33 AM Synchronize Shown with Mac OS X 6 For each application click the direction in which you want to write data or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application Changing the HotSync setting from the d
276. figuration settings Icon Action Save account settings Saves any changes you have made to an account Add a new account You are prompted to enter the account name and protocol Delete an account You are prompted to select the account to delete from a drop down list Quick Account Reference Lists all accounts and shows whether they are active and the date they were last synchronized Help Displays the Help window with complete online help eee i Verifying handheld account settings before synchronizing accounts Certain settings you configure on your handheld for a given e mail account must be set correctly for the synchronization process as well Before configuring an e mail client on your desktop for synchronization be sure to verify the following settings on your handheld m APOP ESMTP and SSL If you want to synchronize e mail for an account that requires either APOP or ESMTP authentication for example Yahoo accounts require ESMTP authentication or a secure SSL connection for incoming mail you must select the option to use APOP ESMTP or a secure connection on your handheld See Adding APOP to an account Adding ESMTP to an account and Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL later in this chapter for details m Mail filters Any mail filters you have configured for a given e mail account on your handheld also apply during the synchronization process For example if you have set filters to accept o
277. following Select All in the Category box Be sure that the same categories that appear in the imported file also exist in the application If the categories do not exist create them now otherwise the records are imported into the Unfiled category From the File menu select Import Select the file you want to import Click Open If you are importing a vCal or vCard file skip to step 10 You do not have to specify which fields correspond to the imported data To import data into the correct Palm Desktop fields drag fields in the left column so that they are opposite the corresponding imported field on the right If you don t want to import a field click the check box for that field to deselect it Click OK The imported data is highlighted in the application 10 To add the imported data to your handheld perform a HotSync operation 38 Importing data See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting data Using File Link The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad information such as a company phone list to your handheld from a separate external file on your Windows computer You can configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category in Palm Desktop software and on your handheld With File Link you can import data stored in any of the follow
278. formed a trusted pair This is similar to locking your door with a dead bolt and disabling the door bell but any friends who already have the key can enter By default the Discoverable setting is enabled when Bluetooth is on m Bluetooth On and Discoverable Yes When your handheld is on Bluetooth is on and the Discoverable setting is set to Yes you can receive connections from any Bluetooth device You are automatically connected with devices with which you have previously formed a trusted pair but you can refuse invitations to connect with unrecognized devices This is similar to locking your front door with a dead bolt and enabling the door bell Friends who already have the key can 391 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld enter freely and if someone without a key rings the bell to request a connection you can choose to open the door or ignore the request To disable discovery 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap the Discoverable pick list and select No Preferences Bluetooth Bluetooth Discoverable v No Discoverable pick list Allow Wakeup vw No 3 Tap Done Allowing Wakeup When your handheld is off the Allow Wakeup setting determines whether your handheld wakes up when you receive a connection request from another Bluetooth device that knows your device name When this setting is enabled you can receive requested information when your handheld is o
279. from a government agency to operate this product This product has been certified as conforming to technological standards Therefore the following action are punishable by law Disassembly or modification of this product Removal of identification labels on the back of this product 468 Product Regulatory Information ARIB STD T66 Statement Japan This product uses a radio wave in the 2 4 GHz bandwidth This frequency is also used by the microwave ovens industry scientific and medical devices in addition to wireless transmitters for motion detectors such as those requiring licenses used on manufacturing lines or similar radio transmitters It is also used in specified amateur radio stations or small radio stations not requiring licenses all these wireless devices will be called other wireless transmitters below 1 Before using this product confirm that other wireless transmitters are not in use nearby 2 In the unlikely event that there is electronic interference between this product and other wireless transmitters quickly change the operating frequency of this product change the location of operation or stop operating the product cease transmission of a signal 3 If other electrical interference or related problems should occur contact the responsible party Europe R amp TTE Directive Europe Declaration of Conformity Application of Council Directive s 1999 5 EEC R amp TTE EU Directive Standards to
280. from expansion cards to your handheld or send applications from expansion cards to your handheld See Beaming data and Sending data in Chapter 3 for details Selecting copy settings When using the copy feature you can set the following How applications are sorted and listed m Whether to copy only the application or both the application and its data files To select copy settings 1 Tap the Home icon Tap the Menu icon Select Copy on the App menu Tap Settings Settings Options a Sort By or Hame O Copy Applications Only Tap the Sort By pick list and select Name or Size 47 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 6 Tap the Copy Application Only check box to select it if you want to copy only the application files Leave it deselected if you want to copy both the application file and its associated data file s 7 Tap OK NOTE The Sort By setting is in effect each time you use the copy feature Each time you want to copy an application only you must select the Copy Applications Only check box Using menus Menus on your handheld are easy to use Once you have mastered them in one application you can use them the same way in all other applications The menus of each application are illustrated in the chapter that discusses that application To open the menu bar 1 Open an application such as Memo Pad 2 Do one of the following Tap the Menu icon Tap the inverted
281. from the slot and then pull it out of the slot and hold it as you would a pen or pencil Uses infrared technology to transmit data to and receive data from other infrared enabled devices and to perform HotSync operations See Beaming data in Chapter 3 and see Conducting IR HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for more information To adjust the brightness of the backlight 1 Tap the Brightness icon in the upper right corner of the Graffiti 2 writing area TIP You can also press and hold the power button for about two seconds to access brightness control In addition you can assign the full screen pen stroke to access the brightness control See Pen Preferences in Chapter 22 for details 2 Drag the slider to adjust the brightness TIP You can also press Up or Down on the navigator to adjust the brightness 3 Tap Done 13 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld Locating back panel components Reset button Attach points Universal connector Reset button Resets your handheld Under normal use you should not have to use the reset button See Resetting your handheld in Appendix A for information about when and how to use the reset button Attach points Enable you to connect optional accessories to your handheld such as a modem or sled These accessories are sold separately and are typically available from third party developers Universal connector Connects your handheld to the cradle
282. fy an end date for the repeating or continuous event tap the End on pick list and tap Choose Date Use the date picker to select an end date 7 Tap OK After you schedule a repeating or continuous event the Repeat icon amp appears at the far right of the event Changing repeating or continuous events When you make changes to a repeating or continuous event such as deleting or adding notes or changing the time of an event you can decide which of the events you want to change all events in the series just the current event or the current and future events To delete repeating events 1 Select the record you want to delete 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Delete Event from the Record menu Repeating Event Apply the changes to the Current record this amp all Future records All occurrences Ca Ca 102 Changing the Date Book view 4 5 Do one of the following Tap Current to delete only the current event item Tap Future to delete the current and all future event items and reset the end date of the repeating event to the last shown date Tap All to delete all occurrences of the repeating event Tap OK Considerations for repeating or continuous events Keep the following points in mind If you change the start date of a repeating event your handheld calculates the number of days you moved the event Your handheld then automatically changes the end date to maintain
283. g options Sort by Show Date Alert Sound Confirm Deleted Message Tap the pick list to sort messages in one of the following orders Alphabetic Date Phone Number and Status To display dates in list views select this check box Indicates whether new messages trigger an alert and which alert it triggers To trigger a new message alert select this check box Tap the pick list to select one of the following sounds Alarm Alert Bird Concerto Phone Sci fi and Wake up NOTE When a new message triggers an alert sound tap anywhere on your handheld screen to stop the sound Indicates whether a confirmation message appears each time you delete a message or you select the Empty Trash option from the Message menu To display confirmation messages select this check box 167 Chapter 15 Using SMS Delete After Transfer Signature 4 Tap Details Indicates whether data messages are deleted after you accept the data in the appropriate application To keep data messages after you transfer them to the application deselect this check box Enables you to enter a personal signature that you can add to your messages Message Details ti Incoming O Leave Messages on Phone Outgoing Return Receipt Warn Over Expires Message Center w None w 3parts 1Day w Auto 5 Change any of the following options NOTE Outgo ing SMS message settings may depend on the service offered by your S
284. ge If you are viewing the first message in the folder returns you to the folder list view When you return to the list view Inbox or other folder after viewing a message the message you were viewing may or may not be selected in the list according to the following If you pressed Select to view the message the message will be highlighted on the list when you return to the list view Ifyou used the stylus or pressed Right or Left to view the message it will not be highlighted when you return to the list view If you press Select the first message in the list will be selected 303 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software The following sample procedure shows how to use the navigator to read and delete a message To read and delete a message 1 Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll to the message you want to read 2 Press Select to select the message and then press Select again to open the message 3 After reading the message press Select to close the message 4 Optional The cursor should remain on the selected message If not press Up or Down to scroll to the message and press Select to select the message 5 Press Right to open the pop up menu 6 Press Down to scroll to Delete Message 7 Press Select to delete the message 8 Press Select to confirm that you want to delete the message Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application You may purchase an option
285. ged 337 Enabling or disabling cookies i 0 vineeeierwnee c ewree thaws bee eae 338 Enabling or disabling JavaScript o12 0e0seieeeeeeenee eve eewenyanes 338 Changing the size and content of the cache 0 000000 339 Controlling how Web Browser Pro accesses the Internet 340 Changing Network Preferences sos 40 lt eei05 244 eee ee cere eee ean 340 Changing the host server sissies cvexsadeeeeed desde 604 eee eee eee 341 Chapter 20 Using World Clock 000 e eee eee 343 Viewing the TING sisissie teas oad eat bee eee eK eee eae aaeee ee 344 setting the primary location s20 side eevedes exes wen Leneweereus vas 344 Choosing a different primary location 0 ccie e i eae ea eee 346 Setting the secondary locations fo iudesys ee bae en Deere en Renews eee ke 346 PACING alocati s sirraseosrirenia eevee dare Tee Aue eee es 347 Modifying a location oo ine tele Sette Reet eae Sate tebe beeen ee 348 Removing a 1GcatONy 210055 S65 ohio Riw hee Bon pO hee eee eee eben 349 Seting an Alan sopo he ee oad ne he EEES PEE SEREDE eed ee eae ee 349 Using World Clock menus 2 45304 254 6 44 bee eee Ope eee ets 350 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 000005 351 Selecting HotSync setup options s saser tobe wate eevee em yA 351 Customizing HotSync application settings 0 0 cee 354 Conducting cradle cable HotSync operations 0 000200 ee 357 Performing a cradle
286. gs also serve as a point of reference for the secondary locations The following steps show you how to set the location date and time from within World Clock See Date amp Time Preferences in Chapter 22 for details on changing these settings from the Preference screen To set the primary location 1 Tap the primary location pick list Pamer locaton World cioc pick list Palo Alto gl off 10 31 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 v Tokyo v London 3 31 pm 6 31 am Sun Dec 7 Sun Dec 7 Set Date amp Time 344 Setting the primary location 2 Tap the location you want to use as the primary location The location you select is typically a large city in the same time zone as the one where you live If an appropriate choice does not appear in the list see Adding a location later in this chapter to create a new location 3 Tap OK To set the date 1 Tap Set Date amp Time 2 Tap the Set Date box 3 Tap the arrows to select the current year Preferences Date amp Time Location Palo Alto Tap to set date 4 Tap the current month 5 Tap the current date 6 Tap Done To set the time 1 Tap Set Date amp Time 2 Tap the Set Time box Preferences Date amp Time Location Palo Alto Tap to set time _ Tap arrows to select year Tap to select month Set Date 4 2003 gt Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov Hy SM TW
287. gt modem lt PalmConnect PalmConnect lt uss USB aeaoaod On Shown with Mac OS X 4 Close the HotSync Software Setup window Preparing your handheld for a Bluetooth HotSync operation There are a few steps you must perform to prepare your handheld for a Bluetooth HotSync operation To prepare your handheld for a Bluetooth HotSync operation 1 Create a trusted pair with your computer See Adding trusted devices in Chapter 22 for details 2 Create a connection with your computer See Creating Bluetooth connections in Chapter 22 for details 3 Tap the Home icon 371 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations 4 Select the HotSync icon 5 Tap the pick list in the center of the screen and select the connection settings you just created Cradle Cable IR to a PC Handheld Ben s PC A Performing a Bluetooth HotSync operation After you prepare your computer and your handheld you are ready to perform a Bluetooth HotSync operation To perform a Bluetooth HotSync operation 1 Tap the Home icon O 2 Select the HotSync icon 3 Tap the HotSync icon in the center of the screen Conducting network HotSyne operations When you use the network HotSync technology you can take advantage of the LAN and WAN connectivity available in many office environments Network HotSync technology enables you to perform a HotSync operation by using Bluetooth technology or an 802 11
288. gure the service connection settings for this account on your handheld using your handheld s Network Preferences and Connection Preferences screens See Chapter 22 for more information You must also have the appropriate prerequisite for the type of connection you want to make as follows Connection Type Prerequisite Built in Bluetooth radio via a mobile phone Built in Bluetooth radio via a LAN access point PalmModem accessory External modem sled IR to IR phone Direct connection to a phone by means of a physical cable Handheld cradle connected to desktop Using an ISP Active wireless service with a GSM or GSM GPRS carrier and GSM or GPRS mobile phone enabled with Bluetooth technology Note that some GSM carriers require you to order a special data service separate from voice service in order to make a network connection Proximity to a LAN access point PalmModem accessory Wireless modem accessory IR enabled mobile phone Connector cable and mobile phone Handheld cradle and cable Windows users only If you are setting up a new e mail account and have a well known ISP such as Earthlink or Mindspring many of the required settings during the account setup are automatically configured For other ISPs you need the following information m The protocol used for incoming mail such as POP or IMAP m The name of the incoming mail server 180 Setting up and managing e mail accounts
289. h technology A wireless link that enables you to connect to a Bluetooth mobile phone that is within 10 meters approximately 30 feet of your handheld See Bluetooth Preferences in Chapter 22 for additional information on Bluetooth technology Infrared communication A wireless link that enables you to connect to an infrared enabled mobile phone within 1 meter approximately 39 inches of your handheld The infrared ports on the two devices must be aligned and the path between the two devices must be clear of obstacles See Beaming data in Chapter 3 for more information about your handheld s infrared capabilities A serial cable connection A wire based link that connects your handheld to a mobile phone with a physical cable Serial cables and mobile phones that are enabled with infrared or Bluetooth technology are sold separately What can you do with a phone connection When your handheld is linked to a mobile phone and your mobile phone carrier supports the required services you can do the following m Access the Internet Use a high speed wireless data service such as General Packet Radio Service GPRS or data services and an Internet service provider ISP dial up account to access the Internet and browse the web See Chapter 19 for more information m Check and send e mail Use a high speed wireless data service or data services and a dial up connection to access your POP3 or IMAP e mail account See Chap
290. h infrared IR ports Sending data between devices Entering or importing data in Palm Desktop software and then synchronizing with your handheld Using Note Pad Using a portable keyboard accessory sold separately and attached to the universal connector Using the onscreen keyboard You can open the onscreen keyboard anytime you need to enter text or numbers on your handheld You can also use Graffiti 2 writing when the keyboard is open which makes it easy to switch between these two methods of entering data To use the onscreen keyboard 1 2 3 Open any application such as Memo Pad Tap any record or tap New Tap ABC to open the alphabetic keyboard or tap 123 to open the numeric keyboard o Q Tap here for Tap here for alphabetic keyboard numeric keyboard 23 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld 4 Tap the characters to enter text and numbers When a keyboard is open you can tap the abc 123 or Int l boxes to open any of the other keyboards including the international keyboard Tab Backspace Caps lock cap BEGOUOGBaC Carriage return Caps shift Tap here to display alphabetic keyboard International CA E Tee nt Tap here to display Tap here to display numeric keyboard international keyboard After you finish tap Done to close the onscreen keyboard and place the text in the record Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data In this section
291. h speed data dial up connection to service GPRS from your Internet Service your carrier Provider ISP No You will need to enter the settings provided by your ISP Cancel Previous Next Cancel Previous Next 3 Tap Next A screen appears to inform you that you are about to set up a dial up connection for your ISP 4 Tap Next 155 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link 5 Tap the Phone field and enter the phone number you use to connect to your ISP Network Service Setup Enter the phone number and settings for your dial up account Phone 555 2233 Username midyne Cancel Previous Next 6 Tap the Username field and enter the name you use when you log into your ISP account 7 Tap the Password box and enter the password for your ISP account 8 Tap Next Network Service Setup Network service setup for dial up was successful You can now dial up to connect to your Internet Service Provider ISP 9 Tap Done Updating the phone files on your handheld The Phone Link Updater application on your computer guides you through the process of updating the telephony files on your handheld The instructions in this section assume that you have already installed the desktop software that came with your handheld and have performed at least one HotSync operation You will also need Internet access to download the most recent phone files during the installation To install the phone files f
292. hapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Synchronize unread mail only Download attachments Send e mail from Outbox Synchronize incoming e mail Select whether to synchronize all e mail between your desktop and your handheld or unread e mail only By default the check box is unselected meaning that all e mail will be synchronized Select whether to download attachments during synchronization By default the check box is selected if unselected only the body text of any message containing an attachment will be downloaded to your handheld during synchronization Select the check box to send any e mail in the handheld s Outbox during the next HotSync operation Select the check box to synchronize the Inbox during the next HotSync operation Optional If you chose Microsoft Outlook Microsoft Exchange Lotus Notes or Direct IMAP as your mail client click Folder Synchronization Options VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky x Eile Help Joe Sadusky Helka E H a Ej VersaMail Business Sam Yahoo Sam IMAP Sam Sync Speakeasy Mail Client Sync Setup Ads Sync Option E Handheld Settings Attachment Conversion Advanced Sync Options Speakeasy 50 Maximum message size KB Specifies the maximum message size to download during a HotSync operation Mail that is larger than this size will be truncated on your Palm handheld po Days To Synchronize Mail Synchro
293. hapter 8 Using Date Book Scheduling an event A record in Date Book is called an event An event can be any kind of activity that you associate with a day You can enter a new event on any of the available time lines When you schedule an event its description appears on the time line and its duration is automatically set to one hour You can easily change the start time and duration for any event It s possible to schedule events that overlap but Date Book makes it easy to find such conflicts See Spotting event conflicts later in this chapter You can also schedule events in your Date Book that occur on a particular date but have no specific start or end times such as birthdays holidays and anniversaries These are referred to as untimed events Untimed events appear at the top of the list of times marked with a diamond You can have more than one untimed event on a particular date You can also schedule a repeating event such as a weekly meeting and continuous events such as a three day conference or a vacation To schedule an event for the current day 1 Tap the time line that corresponds to the beginning of the event Jul 24 02 ZIGOG GEC aes EEEREN time line m gt Time bar shows duration Enter event 2 Enter a description of the event You can enter up to 255 characters 3 If the event is one hour long skip to step 5 If the event is longer or shorter than an hour tap t
294. hat you want to view or install on your handheld You can download and work with the following attached files vCard vcf This is an address vCal vcs This is usually a calendar appointment or a To Do task 241 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Text txt This is usually a memo or another plain text file HTML html or Usually a web page or a formatted text file Your handheld htm displays HTML attachments with full formatting intact Microsoft Word The formatting is stripped and the text of most Microsoft Word doc documents is shown JPG jpg bitmap These are graphics files You can download these files and view ee TIFF them using the Photo Viewer application on your handheld Other application For other types of application files your handheld may contain les a viewer that allows other applications to pass it a file for viewing For example your handheld may contain an image viewer that allows another application to pass it a GIF attachment for viewing You do not need to do anything different in the steps for downloading and viewing attachments if your handheld contains such a viewer the attachment is automatically opened If your handheld does not contain such a viewer you cannot view the attachment Among the file types that may be supported are GIF MP3 and AAC files NOTE Your handheld requires an expansion card sold separately to store and play MP3 files PRC p
295. he Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap New An Untitled network service profile appears in the Service pick list 3 Tap Done 404 Setting Communication Preferences To select a network service profile 1 2 3 4 From the Communications Preferences list select Network Tap the Service pick list Preferences Network Tap here to display a list of network service profiles v Service Untitled L User Name Password Connection Phone Select the network service profile you want to use Tap Done To duplicate an existing network service profile 1 2 3 From the Communications Preferences list select Network Tap the Service pick list Select the predefined network service profile you want to duplicate Tap the Menu icon Select Service and then select Duplicate A copy of the network service profile is added to the Service pick list Entering a user name The User Name setting identifies the name you use when you log into your ISP or your dial in server Although this field can contain multiple lines of text only two lines appear onscreen To enter a user name 1 2 From the Communications Preferences list select Network Tap the User Name field 405 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 3 Enter your user name Preferences Network v Service My ISP Enter your user User Name name he
296. he Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Display Options Display Options ti Graphics No Images ici Low Quality U ted eo Normal Qualit Visited PERENE 2 3 Select one of the following items from the Graphics pick list No Images All web pages are downloaded without images Low Quality Images are compressed and shown in grayscale rather than color This makes downloading faster but results in reduced image quality Normal Quality Image quality is average This is the default setting and the best compromise between speed and image quality High Quality Image quality is better than average This setting sacrifices some speed for better image quality Best Quality Images are downloaded at their highest quality This may result in longer download times 4 Tap OK 336 Customizing Web Browser Pro Changing link colors You can change the colors that are used to display visited and unvisited links on the web pages you view To change link colors 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Display Options Display Options i Graphics High Quality Unvisited Links Blue Visited Links Purple 3 Change the display colors for visited and or unvisited links The default display color for unvisited links is blue for visited links it is purple 4 Tap OK Enabling or disabling autofill Filling out an order form or application on the web usually requires entering several pieces of
297. he New Message screen tap the word To and enter the address on the Recipient List screen and then tap Done Use the shortcut buttons at the bottom of the screen for quick address entry For multiple recipients type a semicolon or tap the semicolon button at the bottom of the screen and then type a space between recipient names To Recipient List i M Farsi Ang Yee com net org edu gov NOTE Ifyou enter a comma instead of a semicolon it is automatically changed to a semicolon If you enter a space with no punctuation between names semicolons are not inserted and the e mail message is improperly addressed If you want to edit an e mail address that is longer than the line provided in the New Message screen tap the To field and edit the address 2 To send copies tap cc or bcc and enter the recipient s address Copies cc allow recipients to see the addresses of the other recipients but addresses in the blind copies bcc field are hidden from all other recipients TIP To automatically fill in the address as you type see Using Smart Addressing to address a message later in this chapter Addressing a message using Address Book You can enter a recipient s address by using the Lookup screen to select the address The names and addresses in the Lookup screen come from Address Book To use an address from Address Book 1 In the New Message screen tap the word To 2 On the Recipient List scr
298. he correct server name is displayed Optional Enter the new or correct name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected the correct server name is displayed Tap Next 198 Setting up and managing e mail accounts 5 Do one of the following To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application tap Done This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up See Getting sending and managing e mail later in this chapter for information on getting and sending e mail To edit additional mail options tap Next Continue with the next set of procedures VersaMail Setup Tap Done to complete the setup of your Sam Yahoo account and then exit Tap Next to continue to set additional mail options Editing mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol To edit mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account 1 Optional Change any of the following Get unread mail Delete messages on server NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP e mail account the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them for
299. he handheld and the desktop Account information screens Two screens in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit provide summary information on your accounts m The Account Overview screen indicates whether the account is active whether the account has been synchronized and if so the last synchronization date the mail client for this account and whether the mail client and or the incoming mail server has been changed since the last HotSync operation VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky oesau all sls 8 akeasy Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options E Handheld Settings Account Information i Server Settings Attachment Conversion m The Handheld Settings Overview screen lists the server protocol display name e mail address incoming and outgoing mail server addresses and whether APOP or ESMTP authentication is required 6 VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky foesau z lf ls 8 Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options ice d Setting Attachment Conversion 271 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To view the Account Overview screen m Click the selected account name To view the Handheld Settings Overview screen m Under the selected account name click Handheld Settings Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit shortcuts You can use the icons in the toolbar to perform certain tasks quickly such as saving account con
300. he highest most important level If you select another item first however the item you create appears beneath the selected item and is given the same priority as the selected item 172 Checking off a To Do List item To set the priority of a To Do List item 1 Tap the Priority number on the left side of the To Do List item Tap here Select priority 2 Select the Priority number that you want to set 1 is most important Checking off a To Do List item You can check off a To Do List item to indicate that you ve completed it You can set the To Do List to record the date that you complete the To Do item and you can show or hide completed items See Setting To Do Preferences later in this chapter To check off a To Do List item m Tap the check box on the left side of the item TIP You can also highlight the item you want to check off and then press Select on the navigator Completed To Do item Changing To Do List item details The To Do Item Details dialog box enables you to change settings for individual items 173 Chapter 16 Using To Do List To display the To Do Item Details dialog box 1 Tap the text of the item whose details you want to change TIP You can also select an item with the navigator See Using the navigator O in Chapter 2 for details 2 Tap Details To Do Item Details Priority IJ 2 3 4 5 Category w Unfiled
301. he left side of the screen Write numbers anywhere on the right side of the screen Write uppercase letters aligned with the division marks in the Graffiti 2 writing area Write the Punctuation Shift stroke before writing symbols and other special characters Access buttons and other controls that appear on the screen by tapping and holding the control until it activates To temporarily disable the full screen writing area m Tap the shaded box in the lower right corner The shaded box changes to an outline and Writing Area Preferences are deactivated Beaming data Your handheld is equipped with an IR port that is located at the top of the handheld behind the small dark shield The IR port supports the IrCCOMM implementation of the standards for infrared communication established by the Infrared Data Association IrDA This means that you can beam data to any nearby device that supports the IrCOMM implementation of the IrDA standards and that can read the type of data you re beaming For example you can beam an Address Book entry to a Palm OS handheld a mobile phone or a computer that s equipped with an IR port and that can read vCard data 33 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld You can beam the following information between devices The record currently displayed in Date Book Address Book Note Pad To Do List Palm Photos Palm Web Browser Pro or Memo Pad All records of the categ
302. he sounds on or off and to adjust the volume level To set the sound settings 1 From the General Preferences list select Sound amp Alerts 2 Tap Custom 3 Tap the System Sound pick list and select the sound level IMPORTANT When you turn off the System Sounds you also turn off the chime tones associated with the HotSync operation Preferences Sounds amp Alerts System Sound High Game Sound High Alarm Sound High Alarm LED On Alarm Vibrate Off 4 Tap the Game Sound pick list and select the sound level 5 Tap the Alarm Sound pick list and select the sound level 6 Tap Done The Game Sound setting works only with games that are programmed to respond to this setting Older games typically do not respond to this setting Alarm LED and Alarm Vibrate settings You can set alarms in Date Book World Clock Note Pad and Voice Memo to remind yourself of important meetings or notes When you enable the Alarm Vibrate and indicator light settings your handheld vibrates and the indicator light blinks to notify you of alarms This is useful when you want to turn the Alarm Sound off but still be notified by alarms To set the Alarm LED and Alarm Vibrate settings 1 From the General Preferences list select Sound amp Alerts 2 Tap Custom 387 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 3 Tap the Alarm LED pick list and select On or Off Preferences Sounds amp Alerts C
303. he time of the event to open the Set Time dialog box Set Time Start Time End Time 96 Scheduling an event TIP You can also use the Graffiti 2 writing area to open the Set Time dialog box Make sure that no event is selected and then on the number side of the Graffiti 2 writing area write a number for the start time of the event 4 Do one of the following Tap the time columns on the right side of the Set Time dialog box to set the start time and then tap the End Time box and tap the time columns to set the end time Tap All Day to automatically insert the start and end time of the event as defined in your Date Book Preferences Start Time Tap to scroll to highlighted earlier hours Set Time Start Time Tap to change Tap to automatically hours fill the start and end End Time times Tap to change minutes Tap to create an untimed event Tap to scroll to later hours 5 Tap OK 6 Tap a blank area of the screen to deselect the event A vertical line appears next to the time indicating the duration of the event If two or more events have the same start and end time the time appears only once To schedule an event for another day 1 Select the date you want for the event by doing one of the following Tap the day of the week that you want in the date bar at the top of the screen If necessary tap the Previous week or Next week scroll arrows to move to another week
304. he tip of your stylus or an unfolded paper clip or similar object without a sharp tip to gently press and release the reset button 445 Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld 4 5 Wait for the Palm Powered logo to appear then release the power button When a message appears on the handheld screen warning that you are about to erase all the data stored on your handheld do one of the following Press Up on the navigator to complete the hard reset and display the Digitizer screen Press any other button to perform a soft reset NOTE With a hard reset the current date and time are retained Formats Preferences and other settings are restored to their factory default settings To restore your data from a Windows computer after a hard reset 1 7 8 9 Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray bottom right corner of the taskbar You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu bar From the HotSync Manager menu select Custom Select the appropriate user name from the list Select an application in the Conduit list Click Change Select Desktop overwrites handheld for each conduit Changing the HotSync setting from the default affects only the next HotSync operation Thereafter the HotSync Actions revert to their default settings To use a new setting on an ongoing basis select the Set As Default box Thereafter whatever you selected as the
305. held hard reset 445 451 location of reset button 14 445 soft reset 444 Restoring data Mac 447 Windows 446 Returning to a web page 322 to a web page in the History list 333 to your home page 322 S Saving data 43 51 53 e mail databases 299 e mail messages 253 web pages 331 333 Scheduled retrieval of e mail See Auto get mail Scheduling events 95 99 Screen blank 451 brightness 13 calibrating 17 382 caring for 443 touching with your finger 12 Scroll bar 19 SD card 9 See also Expansion Card SDIO expansion card 13 Searching See Finding Secondary DNS 414 Secure Digital card See SD card and Expan sion Card Secure Sockets Layer 302 Security preferences 425 428 Security shortcuts 440 Selecting all text from web pages 326 date for event 97 phone numbers in Address Book 79 text 52 Send retry 234 modifying messages during 236 notifications 235 Sending data from applications 166 data using Bluetooth communication 36 e mail 233 messages in SMS 161 problems with 461 requirements for e mail or SMS communication 37 Serial cradle cable 353 363 364 398 port 4 5 352 363 364 365 366 398 troubleshooting 454 455 456 457 458 459 464 Server deleting messages on 255 258 sent mail folder 289 Service changing in Web Browser Pro 341 selecting for network 404 templates 404 418 Settings See Preferences ShortCuts backing up 354 managing 440 442 menu commands 49 predefined 32 security 440 using 32 Signat
306. i Tap to select photos be nics OU EF v Tap Organize 142 Organizing photos Copying photos The Copy command enables you to make a copy of a photo on your handheld or on an expansion card If the photo is currently located on your handheld it is copied to an expansion card and vice versa Tap Organize Plus signs appear next to the photos that are part of the selected album Tap any photos you want to add to the current album A plus sign appears next to each photo you select Tap any photos you want to remove from the current album The plus signs next to the selected photos disappear Tap Done When you copy a photo from an expansion card to your handheld a number is appended to the photo name If a photo was originally larger than 320 x 320 pixels then the photo is scaled to a maximum of 320 x 320 pixels and the aspect ratio is maintained To copy photos 1 2 3 4 Tap the Menu icon Select Photo and then select Copy Tap the photo s you want to copy A plus sign appears next to the photo s you select TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight press Up Down Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to view the photo Copy to Card Tap to select photos Ee Copying Set4_015 to the card Tap Copy Tap Copy 143 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos Rena
307. ia eee Meter kereta Sree teats 279 Managing mail settings 2 222 skat videsed teeta ee hee ee hing es 283 Adding APOP to an account iscx i0s ccredes be ee eds Exe ves Chbads 291 Adding ESMTP to an account 257 2ysa eek teehee eee ae nrnna 293 Setting advanced account preferences sf lt u e ni edeecin Sea edaw tale vases 294 Cutting and copying text from an e mail message for use in other Ap pMCAHONS sii kee eee ey ey ee ens ahha tee eyes Reena RE ER 296 Using the command Dar 22st siiedes etr rer sine Ses cine Sane 297 F mail header details oee cay es i4ee ie sewed agement nrm nimani tai 298 Backing up mail databases 3 524 awed aw wh ee ee eee 299 Wireless IMAP folder synchronization 0 0 eee 300 Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL a 210seseeiuedseveaiels erie ees een 302 Five way navigation in the VersaMail application 302 Keyboard shortcuts in the VersaMail application 304 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo 0000 cece eee eeeee 307 Creating a Voice MeMO sceri pene tidseir na eee eee EE E E E 308 Recording a voice memo s 2 20 cae suns narnr norr r renr eee gee ees 308 Pausing and resuming a voice memo recording 005 309 Storing voice memos on an expansion card 00 cece eee eee 311 Listening to voice MeMOS ss cdrn alee sadi ia Rae eR BEER Rtas bee RUS 312 Setting an alarm for a voice Memo s006s 0x8 wees ees eieke hen ees baa ed oe 313 Contents Using
308. ications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap Disconnect to terminate the connection between your handheld and your service 3 Tap Done LAN access points A LAN access point enabled with Bluetooth technology provides an entry point into a local area network You can log onto these networks from your handheld to access services such as e mail and the Internet LAN access points can be located in private corporate or in public areas In some cases there may be a fee to use a LAN access point To access a LAN access point from your handheld you must set your Network Preferences as described in the sections that follow Accessing the Internet with a Bluetooth phone or LAN access point With your handheld s built in Bluetooth technology you can connect to the Internet using a Bluetooth mobile phone or a LAN access point To connect to a Bluetooth mobile phone or LAN access point you must be within range of these devices If you have a GSM mobile phone and subscribe to high speed wireless data services with your mobile phone carrier you can use these services to connect to the Internet when you are within range of the high speed wireless data network You can also configure Internet access with a GSM phone or high speed wireless data network using the Phone Link application We recommend using Phone Link to enter these settings See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 for details Use the steps described in this section
309. idating the virtual serial port you re using or create a different virtual port and change the HotSync Manager settings to use the new virtual port Refer to the documentation that came with your computer operating system for instructions 460 Beaming and sending problems I can t perform a Bluetooth HotSync operation continued I receive an authentication error when I try to perform a HotSync operation using Bluetooth and a wireless LAN access point When I try to perform a HotSync operation using Bluetooth and a wireless LAN access point it connects but nothing happens Some computers have a dedicated virtual serial port number such as COM5 and other computers enable you to choose a port number such as COM8 or COM12 Refer to the documentation that came with your computer for information on dedicated versus flexible virtual ports If the virtual serial port you want to use is used by other applications exit those applications before setting up your computer for a Bluetooth HotSync operation Make sure you entered the correct user name and password for the selected network service profile in the Network Preferences screen See Network Preferences in Chapter 22 for details Make sure that Network is selected on the HotSync Manager menu on your computer Contact your system administrator to make sure you network computer is properly set up Beaming and sending problems Problem I cannot beam
310. ies Enter a new category name 5 Tap OK TIP You can group the records within two or more categories into one category by giving the categories the same name For example if you change the name of the Personal category to Business all records formerly in the Personal category appear in the Business category Finding information Your handheld offers several ways for you to find information quickly All applications that reside on your handheld Find locates any text that you specify always starting with the current application However Find does not search through applications on expansion cards m Date Book To Do List Memo Pad SMS Phone Lookup displays the Address list screen and enables you to add to a record the information that appears in this list m Address Book The Look Up line enables you to scroll immediately to a name when you enter the first letters of that name For more information see Looking up Address Book records next You can also use Quick Connect and Tap to Connect in Address Book to dial a phone number listed in an Address Book record or to create an e mail message addressed to an Address Book contact For more information see Making connections from Address Book in Chapter 5 m Expense Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record 58 Performing common
311. igate or tap to select the name e mail address you want New Message Send Garbox Grafs Cane Tap Done 232 Getting sending and managing e mail Turning Smart Addressing on or off You can turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences By default Smart Addressing is turned on To turn Smart Addressing on or off in VersaMail Preferences 1 In the Inbox tap the Menu icon 2 3 Tap Options Select Preferences Tap Advanced Preferences i General Advanced System X Enable Smart Addressing I Auto Empty Mail from Trash v Older Than 1 Week Timeout 45 secs O Auto Disconnect amp Disconnect on Exit Modem Wait 0 secs 5 Tap the Enable Smart Addressing check box if it is not selected A checkmark means it is turned on 6 Tap OK Composing and sending e mail After you enter your recipient addresses you can compose the rest of the e mail message To compose the rest of the e mail and send it 1 Tap the Subject field and enter the subject of your e mail New Message Sam Yahoo Marketing Director 555 555 5555 Send Gatbox ratte Cana 233 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 2 Tap the area below the Subject line and enter the text of your e mail New Message Subj Payroll dates Have been changed to the 5th and tthe 19th because of the holiday Sam Yahoo Market
312. ight corner of the screen 3 Tap Main 4 Tap the SMS icon amp Configuring phone preferences and connecting to your mobile phone You need to configure the phone preferences of your handheld and connect your handheld to your mobile phone before you use SMS Whenever you send or receive messages in SMS your handheld must be connected to your mobile phone For more information on configuring your phone preferences see Chapter 22 For more information on connecting your handheld to your mobile phone see Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 159 Chapter 15 Using SMS Using the navigator in SMS You can use the navigator on your handheld to work in SMS To navigate in SMS list screens m Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll an entire screen of messages m Press and hold Up or Down to scroll quickly m Press Select to insert a highlight m When a message is highlighted the navigator works as follows Press Select again to view the selected message Press Up or Down to scroll to the previous or next message Press Left to remove the selection highlight To navigate in message screens m Press Up or Down to scroll within the current message m Press Right or Left to scroll to the previous or next message m Press Select to return to the list screen Creating messages When you create a message the title bar indicates the number of characters the message contains NOTE Try to kee
313. ight want to change these settings is to overwrite data on either your handheld or Palm Desktop software or to avoid synchronizing a particular type of file because you don t use it In addition to the conduits for Date Book Address Book To Do List Memo Pad Note Pad Voice Memo and Palm Photos Palm Desktop software includes System and Install conduits The System conduit backs up the system information stored on your handheld including Graffiti 2 ShortCuts The Install conduit installs add on applications on your handheld 354 Customizing HotSync application settings To customize HotSync application settings on a Windows computer 1 7 8 Click the HotSync icon in the Windows system tray bottom right corner of the taskbar You can also click the HotSync command on the Palm Desktop software menu bar From the HotSync Manager menu select Custom Select the appropriate user name from the list Select an application in the Conduit list Click Change pd Address Book Synchronize the files To Do List Synchronize the files Memo Pad Synchronize the files Expense Synchronize the files NotePad Synchronize the files Install Enabled Install Service Templates Enabled Install To Card Enabled For each application click the direction in which you want to write data or click Do Nothing to skip data transfer for an application Changing the HotSync setting from the default a
314. igure the account on your desktop Editing e mail accounts From time to time you may need to edit information about one of the e mail accounts you set up To select the account to edit 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Accounts 3 Select Account Setup 4 Tap the name of the account to edit and then tap Edit Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Sam Yahoo 196 Setting up and managing e mail accounts To edit an account 1 On the Account Setup screen change any of the following Account Name Enter a descriptive name for this account such as My Yahoo Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting Select Other if your ISP is not listed Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP Most mail providers use the POP protocol If the VersaMail application knows the protocol for the mail service you selected it displays the correct protocol Account Setup i Enter a name for this account e g My Mail and select settings Account Name Sam Yahoo Mail Service v Yahoo Protocol v POP O Synchronize Only Account 2 Tap Next Changing the account username and password In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup you can change the username and or password for this account The VersaMail 2 5 application provides strong encryption for your password To edit the account userna
315. il 3 Select Auto Get Mail 210 Getting sending and managing e mail 4 Select the Get mail automatically check box Auto Get Mail Get mail automatically Every v 1 Hour Start Time End Time Days S TS S 5 Set schedule options Interval Tap the Every pick list and select the time interval from 15 minutes to 12 hours See Resource issues with auto get mail later in this chapter for information on setting the interval Start Time Tap the Start Time box tap to enter the start time hour and minute and tap to enter AM or PM Tap OK Start Time Lie gt mm End Time Tap the End Time box tap to enter the end time hour and minute and tap to enter AM or PM Tap OK Days Tap the days you want the schedule to be active You can choose any number of days but you can set up only one schedule per a given e mail account 6 Tap OK 7 Optional Tap Get Mail You should perform a manual Get Mail after setting up scheduled auto get This ensures that only new messages will be retrieved during auto get 211 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software TIP Alternately if you have configured an e mail account to synchronize messages between your handheld and your desktop you can perform a HotSync operation after setting up a scheduled auto get to ensure that only new messages will be retrieved during auto get See Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and th
316. in to display these messages Viewing the Network Log If viewing the expanded Service Connection Progress messages does not give you enough information to find out why you cannot connect to your ISP or dial in server take a look at the Network Log The Network Log lists all of the communication that occurs between your modem and your dial in server during the login procedure The information in the Network Log can help your ISP or your system administrator pinpoint where the login procedure communication fails and why To view the Network Log 1 From the Network Preferences screen tap the Menu icon O N Select Options and then select View Log w Tap the up and down arrows of the scroll bar to see the entire Network Log A Tap Done 419 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Adding a DNS number If your ISP or dial in server requires a DNS number and you did not enter that information in the Network Preferences screen it will appear that you successfully logged into your network When you try to use an application or look up information however the connection fails If this occurs try adding a DNS IP address Ask your ISP or your system administrator for the correct primary and secondary DNS IP address Phone Preferences The Phone Preferences setting enables you to configure your handheld to exchange SMS messages and dial phone numbers when your handheld is connected to a GSM mobile phone sold se
317. ines how long your handheld waits before dropping the connection with your ISP or dial in server when you switch out of a TCP IP application To set the Idle timeout 1 Tap the Idle timeout pick list and select one of the following options 1 minute Waits one minute for you to open another application before it drops the connection 2 minutes Waits two minutes 3 minutes Waits three minutes Never Keeps your PPP or SLIP connection until you turn off your handheld or until it times out 2 Tap OK Defining primary and secondary DNS The domain name system DNS is a mechanism in the Internet for translating the names of host computers into IP addresses When you enter a DNS number or IP address you are identifying a specific server that handles the translation services Each IP address has four sections separated by periods In the Details dialog box you enter each section separately Each section of an IP address is made up of a number from 0 to 255 numbers are the only allowable characters in this field Ask your ISP or system administrator for the correct primary or secondary DNS IP address Many systems do not require that you enter a DNS IP address If you are not sure leave the DNS field blank 414 Setting Communication Preferences To enter a primary and secondary DNS 1 Tap the Query DNS check box to deselect it 2 Tap the space to the left of the first period in the Primary DNS field and then enter
318. ing Bluetooth communication or by using e mail or SMS communication 3 Optional Tap the category pick list and select a category for the incoming information You can also create a new category or leave the information unfiled Do you want to accept Accessories into Address Category Unfiled Tap Yes You can set the full screen pen stroke to beam the current entry See Pen Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information You can draw the Graffiti 2 Command stroke to activate the Command toolbar and then tap the beam icon You can use the Graffiti 2 Command stroke B to beam the current entry In Palm Photos you can select and beam multiple photos at the same time See Beaming photos in Chapter 13 for details Sending data using Bluetooth communication If you enable Bluetooth communication you can send data to other Bluetooth devices The Bluetooth device must be discoverable and within 10 meters approximately 30 feet of your handheld For more information on enabling Bluetooth communication and Bluetooth settings see Bluetooth Preferences in Chapter 22 To send data using Bluetooth communication 1 Open the application you want to send data from 2 Select the record or category you want to send 36 Using your computer keyboard 3 Select the Send command from the application For example in Address Book tap the Menu icon tap Record and then tap Send Address
319. ing Director 555 555 5555 Send Gatbox ratte Cana To access the editing features available on the Edit menu tap the Menu icon The first character of each sentence is automatically capitalized for you 3 Optional Tap the Options menu and select Add Attachments See Attaching files from a handheld application later in this chapter 4 Tap one of the following to send the e mail Send Sends the e mail immediately Outbox Stores e mail in the Outbox so you can compose e mail offline and then send all e mail during one connection with the server To send your e mail later tap Get amp Send A connection is made to the mail server and all the e mail in the Outbox is delivered TIP You can also tap Drafts to save this message in the Drafts folder rather than send it Send retry When you tap Send on the message menu the VersaMail application automatically attempts to send the message If the send attempt fails for any reason for example your handheld is out of range or the application cannot connect to the mail server you can choose to have the application move the message to the Outbox and continue to try to send the message at 30 minute intervals a maximum of three times If you put a message in the Outbox you must perform a manual send to send the message on the first attempt The VersaMail application attempts automatic send retry only after a manual send attempt fails If automatic send retry s
320. ing e mail later in this chapter for information on getting and sending e mail To set up additional mail options tap Next Continue with the next set of procedures VersaMail Setup Tap Done to complete the setup of your Sam Yahoo account and then exit Tap Next to continue to set additional mail options Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account 1 Optional Select any of the following Get unread mail NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP e mail account the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them for example on your desktop or on the web and regardless of whether this check box is selected For IMAP accounts select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld If you don t choose this option and you tap Get amp Send all of your e mail messages on your provider s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox including messages you have already read To get all mail including mail you have already read and not just unread mail deselect Get unread mail ONLY 185 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Delete messag
321. ing formats Comma separated csv a Memo Pad archive mpa m Address Book archive aba m Text txt For information on how to set up a file link see the Palm Desktop online Help Importing data from a Mac computer Palm Desktop software can import data from any applications that can export the data in any of the following file formats m Tab delimited file m Text a Palm Desktop software for Mac m vCal vcs vCard vcf For example you can export tab delimited files from applications such as FileMaker Pro Meeting Maker Now Contact and Now Up to Date To import data from a Mac computer 1 Open Palm Desktop software 2 From the File menu select Import 3 Select the file you want to import 4 Click Open 5 If you want to change the order of the fields you re importing point to a field wait for the cursor to change to a double arrow and then drag the field to anew location 6 If you do not want to import a field click the arrow between the field names 7 From the Fields pop up menu select the appropriate field 39 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld 8 From the Delimiters pop up menu select the appropriate delimiter 9 Click OK 10 To add the imported data to your handheld perform a HotSync operation See Palm Desktop online Help for more information on importing and exporting data Using Note Pad In addition to using Graffiti 2 characters and the onscreen keybo
322. ings See Setting the primary location in Chapter 20 for details To set the location 1 From the General Preferences list select Date amp Time 2 Tap the Location pick list and select the location you want to use as your primary location The location you select should be a large city in the same time zone as the one where you live If an appropriate choice does not appear in the list see Adding a location in Chapter 20 to create a new 3 Tap Done location When you travel changing the primary Location setting automatically resets the date and time on your handheld based on the local time zone but it does not change the time of appointments set in Date Book To set the date 1 From the General Preferences list select 2 Tap the Set Date box 3 Tap the arrows to select the current year Preferences Date amp Time Tap arrows to select Location Palo Alto year Set Date Set Time gt Tap to select month 74 Tap to set date _ 4 Tap the current month 5 Tap the current date 6 Tap Done Date amp Time Set Date Jul Aug Sep Oct Nov BER T 4 11 14 15 16 18 F S 5 12 13 19 20 21 22 23 25 26 27 28 29 30 _Tap to select date 381 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld To set the time 1 From the General Preferences list select Date amp Time 2 Tap the Set Time box EF gt vi 3
323. inistrator Authentication Select the My server requires authentication ESMTP check box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for information If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a password and then tap OK 195 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Advanced Outgoing Options Port Number 25 X My server requires authentication ESMTP Username Username and Password fields appear only if ESMTP check box is selected Password i 2 Tap Done Configuring your synchronize only account After you finish setting up a synchronize only e mail account you need to configure this account on your desktop See Configuring an account in HotSync Manager later in this chapter for information You will not be able to synchronize e mail between your handheld and your desktop until you conf
324. installed This can happen if your handheld is too full to install the file or if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation If files are unrecognized try launching the associated application from your handheld and then performing another HotSync operation If the files still remain in the list they are not associated with an application on your handheld and cannot be installed Expansion cards may also hold files that are not Palm application files To use the right click menu to send the file to Palm Quick Install 1 Copy or download the application s or file s you want to install onto your computer From My Computer or Windows Explorer right click the file s or folder that you want to install Select Send To and then select Palm Quick Install Palm Quick Install displays a confirmation dialog box that shows whether the files will be installed on your handheld or on an expansion card Click OK The selected files are placed in the Handheld or Expansion Card file list based on the file extension Perform a HotSync operation to install the files See Chapter 21 for details Any unrecognized files are not installed Palm Quick Install tips The following tips can help you use Palm Quick Install most effectively Audio files are automatically placed in the expansion card file list If you attempt to place audio files in the handheld file list a No symbol appears By default video files are
325. ion 0 00 eee eee ee 149 Setting Up a phone connection c cxicdes bis cee codes de stoy eedenbescs 150 Configuring network service settings for your phone 153 Updating the phone files on your handheld 156 Using phone connections so vidoe ever vided see sser erens erreren 157 Chapter 15 Using SMS saaannaaaaaaaa naaa 159 Configuring phone preferences and connecting to your mobile phone 159 Using the navigator in SMS vsecicvecden iy eleendsetraieee pig eleva 160 Creating Messages lt i c2025454 cies nite E oe eee eee teed seks 160 vii Contents Sending and receiving messages aioyn ceed ee hele eee ae Gad eee 161 Viewing MESSAGES otouaigatsniguds orita e veld terre atric E Ae e8 162 Working with draft messages 0 egee inh hehe eed eee hee ede 164 Adding a signature to a message 00 cece cece eee eee 165 Sending data from another application 10 0 c0wsav eaend en teen va agend Fe 166 Setting SMS Preferences iu iedutra yee eda t KERREN ER E TA ARR es 167 Using SMS MENUS 3h vcacicda she aes eel i ii E E EN ees 169 Chapter 16 Using To Do List 0 00 cece es 171 Creating list Items s lt 6p kc ea tenras ie exe ied KRESS ae Coed ee coe dec 172 Setting priority teGavedetacew untae Views doit e e s eee aa vee tee aaa 172 Checking off a To Do Listitem oii wcckdebe veer enw abiee kee ween oes 173 Changing To Do List item details i 405 icnscedtednkad eon e
326. ion QBPhotoCapture pre 44 32KB Palm Application 2 Photos pre 200 83KB Pain Application Glhelictionwitersqui 382KB Pam Database PB babypics JPG 60 28KB JPG File F BB_Cnuisin Tunes 258MB MP3 Format Sound FBRose006 po 282 30KB JPG File unise 625 78KB JPG File 222MB MP3 Format Sound z Hide Details Add button Status bar 1 tem 71 17 KB 3 In the User drop down list select the name that corresponds to your handheld 4 Click Add TIP To install a folder open the File menu and select Add Folder 5 Select the application s or file s that you want to install If you do not see the application s or file s in the default folder navigate to the folder that contains the application s or file s that you want to install 6 Click OK 71 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 7 If you need to change the destination of the application you are installing drag the files to move applications between the handheld and expansion card file list The status bar shows the number of files selected and their total size However since some file types are compressed during synchronization they may actually require less space than the amount shown in the file size column or status bar Perform a HotSync operation to install the selected application s See Chapter 21 for details NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were not
327. ion You can install the following types of files a Palm OS file types including PRC and PDB m Image files including BMP and JPG a Microsoft Office files such as Word Excel and PowerPoint documents 68 Installing and removing applications a Audio files including MP3 requires the audio application from the Software Essentials CD ROM and audio files must reside on an expansion card which is sold separately NOTE To install some software you may need to download files from the Internet to your computer Check the Software Essentials CD for details m Kinoma video files requires the Kinoma application from the Software Essentials CD ROM There are a variety of third party applications available for your handheld To learn more about these applications go to the web site www palm com intl NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application Installing applications and files on a Windows computer Palm Quick Install makes it easy to install applications and files during the next HotSync operation You can even install compatible files directly from a Zip file Depending on
328. is a unique identifier that enables secure data exchange between two Bluetooth devices that have formed a connection with one another The passkey is stored on both devices You must enter the same passkey on both your handheld and phone If Phone Link is unable to validate the same passkey on both your handheld and your phone an error message appears and you are given the option to try connecting again If you need additional information about connecting your phone refer to the Phone Pairing Handbook at www palm com support globalsupport Connection Setup fy Your handheld is ready to create a trusted connection Bluetooth Security Enter passkey for T68 Make up a temporary passkey number to enter on both your handheld and phone Tap Next to continue Cancel Previous Next 152 Setting up a phone connection 7 When prompted to create a trusted connection tap Next 8 Enter a passkey for this connection on your handheld and then tap OK 9 When the Confirmation dialog box appears tap Yes IMPORTANT If you tap No in the Confirmation dialog box the link between your phone and handheld will not work Connection Setup Phone connection Confirmation setup was successful Would you like this to be You can now dial directly the default connection from your handheld s for your phone address book and send applications and receive SMS messages 10 Tap Done The Network Service dialog bo
329. is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application Connection Preferences The Connection Preferences screen enables you to define the settings used to connect your handheld to other devices The screen displays a list of available configurations that are ready to be further defined the list varies depending on the kind of software you ve added to your handheld For example a modem connection appears on the list If you have this modem you need only to specify the phone setup and network connection if required to complete the configuration You can also create custom configurations which include the following Phone to Bluetooth A connection between your handheld and a Bluetooth phone TIP For Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phones use Phone Link to quickly establish a connection with a Bluetooth GSM phone For more information see Chapter 14 LAN to Bluetooth A connection between your handheld and a Bluetooth Local Area Network PC to Bluetooth A connection between your handheld and a Bluetooth computer or laptop PC to Cradle Cable A local HotSync connection the direct connection between your handheld and your desktop computer Your handheld is connected by its universal connector to the cradle cable and the cradle cable is attached to a USB port of your desktop computer If you are u
330. is chapter for details Network Preferences You can use your handheld s Bluetooth technology and the software that is included in the handheld operating system to connect with Internet service providers ISPs or dial in remote access servers using a mobile phone or optional modem accessory Your mobile phone must be equipped with one of the following an IR port Bluetooth technology or a serial cable that connects to your handheld s universal connector You also need an ISP account or corporate remote access account and a mobile phone carrier account that supports dial up connections or a mobile phone carrier account with high speed wireless data network services 403 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld You can also use your handheld s Bluetooth technology and the software that is included in the handheld operating system to connect with a LAN access point To use the e mail or web browser software included with your handheld you must create a configuration in Connection Preferences and then create Network Preferences settings See Connection Preferences earlier in this chapter for a complete explanation of how to define Connection configurations that enable your handheld to communicate with remote devices After you configure both the Connection and Network Preferences you can establish a PPP Point to Point Protocol connection with your ISP or dial in server You can do this either by using menu comm
331. iss dniuh pei vie oe ere Aaa O a en a a i 464 Password probl m Sousi ceis cirreieciseninidte ebesi cobs var Eibekts 465 Technical support essiri parenii eaan i EEE A EEE E e EEE NA 465 Product Regulatory Information 000 e eee eee ee eee 467 INGEN 214 t2e Leet Nid pb adorada eter eelnieR eri teeeteenwereesar as 471 xiii Contents xiv About This Book Congratulations on your purchase of a Palm Tungsten T2 handheld This handbook is designed to quickly familiarize you with your handheld It describes all you need to know about how to use your handheld and the applications that come with it It guides you through Locating all the parts of your handheld m Viewing and entering data m Setting up Bluetooth features and wireless communication features m Working with expansion cards m Using your handheld with your computer m Personalizing your handheld with your own preference settings After you become familiar with the basic functionality of your handheld you can use the rest of this handbook as a reference guide for less common tasks for maintenance of your handheld and for any problems that might arise as you operate your handheld About This Book Setting Up Your Palm Tungsten T2 Handheld Your new Palm Tungsten T2 handheld enables you to do the following Access your data and view or look up information with one hand using the navigator Capture thoughts while you r
332. ith Reply To Enter the e mail address that you want recipients to see and Address reply to on your e mail messages only if this is different from the e mail address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look as though the e mail came from the address you entered BCC Select the BCC check box to send a blind copy of any e mail message you send to another e mail address The blind copy e mail address is not seen by the other recipients of the message For example if you want a copy of all messages you send from your handheld to be sent to your corporate e mail account enter that e mail address Sam Yahoo Outgoing Mail Options Your Name for display only Sam Yahoo Reply To Address Cif different than current account O BCC acopy of outgoing msgs to 2 Tap Next Editing a signature If you added a signature to the e mail messages you send you can edit the signature For example you can change your name or the telephone number that appears in each message you send 201 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To edit a personal signature 1 Optional To add a signature select the Attach Signature to messages check box and then enter the text of the signature To edit an existing signature name phone
333. ithout coverage you will lose your network connection with no notice If your network connection drops unexpectedly check your phone to see if a high speed wireless data network is active and available for the area you are in If a high speed wireless data network is available reconnect to the network using the preceding steps If a high speed wireless data network is not available you must switch your phone to a standard non GPRS phone connection and access the Internet using your ISP You can do this only if you have previously created a standard connection with your phone For instructions on creating a standard connection see Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 Adding detailed information to a network service profile If you are using one of the predefined network service profiles you probably need to enter only your user name password and telephone number If you are creating a new network service profile you may need to provide additional information to your ISP or dial in server You use the Details dialog box to add more information to a selected network service profile To add connection details 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the service field 413 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 3 Tap Details Details Connection type PPP Idle timeout w 1 Minute Query DNS f IP Address MY Automatic Idle timeout The Idle timeout setting def
334. k box to select it Phone Setup Li Select this a you D Dial prefix 3 _ ate ie need to use Disable call waiting 1170 prenz hele a prefix O Use calling card 4 Enter the prefix 5 Tap OK 6 Tap Done Disabling Call Waiting Call Waiting can cause your session to terminate if you receive a call while you are connected If your telephone has Call Waiting you need to disable this feature before logging into your ISP or dial in server To disable Call Waiting 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Phone box 3 Tap the Disable call waiting check box to select it Phone Setup Li Select this eal Enter your disable disable Call O Use calling card code here Waiting PRI a AAAA 408 Setting Communication Preferences 5 6 Enter the code to disable Call Waiting on the Disable call waiting line Each telephone company assigns a code to disable Call Waiting Contact your local telephone company for the code that is appropriate for you Tap OK Tap Done Using a calling card The Use calling card field enables you to use your calling card when dialing your ISP or Intranet server Keep in mind that there is usually a delay before you enter your calling card number When you define your calling card number you need to add commas at the beginning to compensate for this delay Each comma delays transmission of your calling card number for two seconds To use a calling
335. l Gaeta aes veh 105 Working in Agenda View a lt ivecdvodesoe oie Sehr tee Sel eke eteeets 106 Spotting event conflicts 254 jusdansGaveeh soe kaa eee RRS reek ea 107 Using Date Book MENUS scs aris sses irt ataoa i iiae p ewe cet as 107 Record mentieesssgeraenrae tae ensen e cna E a Ei e ea 108 Options MENU 1255 22bsenge eine ee eii ie ei iene a EA E ea ia ees 108 Chapter 9 Using Palm Dialer 0 00 e eee eee eee 111 Configuring phone preferences and connecting to your mobile phone 111 Dialing da NUmMDer coven ep toeaina tasie Enei ENE iA RE da babes 112 Redialing the most recently dialed number 0000s eee 112 Using Speed Glial wii eriertentaiiir neran t PEE E EEA EEEE ee 113 Adding a speed dial entry siaiciestronryeder eeveder eee waw eoaewds 113 Dialing a speed dial entry iv vce dyer nets te eee hee eee Ie 114 Editing a speed dial entry ceegs tes ceee deen see debi eee tenn 115 Dialing a number from the Call History list 00022000 116 Chapter 10 Using Expense 0 00 eee eee eee 119 Adding expe s items crests ends es i cede REEERE bel ees oes een ed 120 Changing the date of an Expense item ie ccicrencviesessved lt oie ves 121 Entering rec iptdetails 2s in 528 8 ori oii Or SE TEE RETE ee eee 121 Customizing the Currency pick list n ce iu eee w eee awd ewe e ee 122 Changing the default currency spine ece en ineeGe hee eer ewe eeu Law 123 Defining a custom curren
336. l Preferences category enables you to access screens where you can modify Date amp Time Digitizer Formats Graffiti 2 Power Security Sounds amp Alerts and Writing Area settings This section provides details about each of these screens To open the General Preferences screens 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Prefs icon amp 3 From the General Preferences list select the name of the Preferences screen you want to view TIP You can also press Left Right Up and Down on the navigator to highlight a Preferences screen name and then press Select on the navigator to open that Preferences screen Preferences General T Digitizer Formats Graffiti 2 Power Sounds amp Alerts Writing Area Communication Bluetooth Connection Network Phone Personal Buttons Color Theme i 380 Setting General Preferences Date amp Time Preferences The Date amp Time Preferences screen enables you to choose a primary location and to set the date time and time zone for that location You can also indicate whether this location observes daylight saving time and the dates daylight saving time starts and ends All of these settings also appear as the primary location in the World Clock application and are used by all the applications on your handheld Although you can change the primary location settings from the Date amp Time Preferences screen we recommend that you use the World Clock application to change these sett
337. l in either of the following two situations m Your company s wireless LAN network is located outside the firewall m Your company s wireless LAN network is located inside the firewall but you are trying to access the network from outside the firewall for example from a public location or at home Check with your company s server administrator to see if a VPN is required to access the corporate network NOTE You cannot use auto get mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of e mail with accounts that use a VPN connection See Auto get mail with notification and Send retry later in this chapter for information Creating a network e mail account You create a new account in Account Setup which guides you through the process To create a network e mail account 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Accounts 3 Select Account Setup Accounts Sam Yahoo Sam IMAP Sam Sync Speakeasy Account Setup 182 Setting up and managing e mail accounts 4 Tap New Account Setup To setup an account tap New or select an account to edit Sam Yahoo 5 Enter the following Account Name Enter a descriptive name for the account such as My Yahoo Mail Service Tap the Mail Service pick list and select the provider to which you are connecting Select Other if your ISP is not listed Protocol Tap the Protocol pick list and select POP or IMAP Most e mail providers use the POP proto
338. lade to the vet i 2 00 10 00 3 00 12 00 4 00 Event 5 00 2 00 conflict as 4 00 6 00 EE 2 Qew Osta TD 4 5 6 7 8 9 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 Using Date Book menus Date Book menus are shown here for your reference and Date Book features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about choosing menu commands 107 Chapter 8 Using Date Book Record menu Options menu Cece Edit Options New Event Delete Event Attach Note Delete Note Beam Event Send Event Purge Opens a dialog where you can choose which old events to purge from your handheld and whether you want to archive purged events on your computer Send Event Opens a dialog where you can choose how you want to send the selected event to another device The options available depend on the software installed on your handheld Record Edit RTI O About Date Book Display Options Opens the Display Options dialog box where you can change the appearance of Date Book s Day View and control which type of events appear in Month View Display Options Li Day View Show Time Bars Compress Day View Month View Show Timed Events Show Untimed Events amp Show Daily Repeating Evts 108 Using Date Book menus Show Time Bars Activates the time bars that appear in the Day Vi
339. lar type for example Word doc then multiple company names appear on the list If no company is currently supplying a plug in of a particular type then the only option that appears on the list is Not Selected 275 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Do one of the following Item Action To deselect a plug in Click the right column next to the plug in type name and then select Not Selected from the drop down list To select a plug in Click the right column next to the plug in type name and then select the name of the company supplying the plug in from the drop down list To change the Click the right column next to the plug in type name and company supplying a then select the name of the company you want to supply plug in of a particular the plug in from the drop down list type VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky x Eie Help ice soausky 7 ajes VersaMail Business Sam Yahoo Sam IMAP Sam Sync When receiving messages to the Palm handheld the plug in will convert the incoming attachment to Speakeasy it s Palm compatible file type When sending messages from the Palm handheld through the conduit the plug in will convert the outgoing attachment to it s desktop compatible file type The Attachment Conversion form is used to configure plug ins for use during the HotSync operation for all accounts Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Sync Options Please refer to th
340. lays the title creation date and duration of each voice memo If you did not assign a title to a voice memo the title appears as the time you created the voice memo This makes it easy to locate and listen to your voice memos To listen to a voice memo 1 In the Voice Memo list select the voice memo title TIP You can also select a voice memo with the navigator See Using the navigator in Chapter 2 for details The voice memo begins to play after a few seconds To start playing immediately tap Play Tap arrows to scroll to next and previous voice memos Voice Memo v All Selecta 4 1of2 gt Unfiled 1 groceries Eman voice groceries 7 8 2 directions 7 11 00 09 memo to hear 00 00 00 00 00 12 2 Tap the arrows at the top of the screen to listen to the next or previous voice memo TIP You can also press Right or Left on the navigator to listen to the next or previous voice memo 3 Tap Done To adjust the volume 1 In the V Memo screen tap the Speaker icon 2 Drag the slider or press Up or Down on the navigator to adjust the volume 3 Tap Done TIP When a voice memo is playing you can also press Up or Right on the navigator to increase the volume or press Down or Left to decrease the volume Setting an alarm for a voice memo To play a portion of a voice memo 1 In the Voice Memo list select the voice memo title 2 Drag the slider to the portion you want to hear
341. le try a lower Speed setting on the Connection Settings tab If you are using the optional serial cradle cable make sure you aren t running a program such as America Online fax or telephony software or AppleTalk networking that uses the serial port you selected in the Connection Settings tab 456 HotSync problems I tried to doa modem HotSync Check the following on your computer operation but it did not m Make sure your computer is turned on and that it does not complete successfully shut down automatically as part of an energy saving feature a Make sure the modem connected to your computer is turned on and is connected to the outgoing phone line m Make sure the modem you are using with your handheld has an on off switch Your handheld cannot wake up a modem that has an auto off feature m Make sure the modem is connected properly to your computer and is connected to the incoming phone line On a Windows computer check the following m Make sure that Modem is selected in the HotSync Manager menu Confirm that the Setup String in the Setup dialog box configures your modem correctly You may need to select a different Modem Type or enter a custom setup string Most modems have a setup string that causes them to send initial connection sounds to a speaker You can use these sounds to check the modem connection Confirm that the Speed setting in the Setup dialog box works for your modem If you h
342. learn how to configure these settings To make a connection with Tap to Connect 1 Open the Address entry to which you want to connect 2 Tap an item For example to dial a phone number tap the number you want to dial To address an e mail message tap an e mail address 3 Optional Tap the number to edit it Address gt Business 0 For example you might want to add an area code a 1 or a country code before a phone number Using Address Book menus Address Book menus are shown here for your reference and Address Book features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands The Record and Options menus differ depending on whether you re displaying the Address list screen or the Address view screen 83 Chapter 5 Using Address Book Record menus Beam Category Send Category Beam Business Card Address list Duplicate Address Connect Send Category Send Address Gir Edit Options Duplicate Address ZT CEU Edit Options Delete Address Duplicate Address Beam Address Send Address Attach Note Delete Note Select Business Card Beam Business Card Address view Makes a copy of the current record and displays the copy in Address Edit so you can make changes to the copied record The copy has the same category and attached notes as the original record
343. lect Options and then select Custom Currencies 3 Tap one of the four Country boxes Custom Currencies Create your own custom currencies by tapping on the country name below Tap a Country box 123 Chapter 10 Using Expense 4 Enter the name of the country and the symbol that you want to appear in Expense Currency Properties 5 Tap OK to close the Currency Properties dialog box 6 Tap OK NOTE Ifyou want to use your custom currency symbol as the default for all Expense items select the symbol in the Preferences dialog box If you want to use your custom currency symbol only for a particular Expense item select the symbol in the Receipt Details dialog box associated with that item Setting Show Options Show Options defines the sort order and other settings that relate to your Expense items To open the Show Options dialog box 1 In the Expense list tap Show 2 Select any of the options 4 14 Taxi 4 14 Lunch Show Options i 4 14 Hotel 4 14 Car Rental Sort by w Date Distance w Miles Show currency Sort by Enables you to sort expense items by date or type Distance Enables you to display Mileage entries in miles or kilometers Show currency Shows or hides the currency symbol in the Expense list 3 Tap OK 124 Working with Expense data on your computer Working with Expense data on your computer After you enter your expenses into the Expens
344. lect it Expense Select the category you want to purge All data in the selected category will be purged and there is no archive option 4 Tap OK or in Expense tap Purge If you chose to save a copy of the purged records your handheld transfers them to an archive file on your desktop the next time you perform a HotSync operation NOTE Purging does not happen automatically You must select the command to make it happen 54 Performing common tasks Categorizing records You can categorize records in the Address Book To Do List Note Pad Voice Memo Memo Pad and Expense applications so that they are grouped logically into categories and are easy to review In Palm Photos categories are called albums As we refer to categories throughout this section we are also referring to albums unless otherwise noted When you create a record your handheld automatically places it in the category that is currently displayed If the category is All your handheld assigns it to the Unfiled category You can leave an entry as Unfiled or assign it to a category at any time When you have an expansion card properly seated in the expansion card slot the last item in the category pick list becomes the name of the expansion card You cannot otherwise categorize applications that reside on an expansion card The expansion card serves as its own category To further categorize records the records must reside on your handheld By default yo
345. lect the area pick list and select your mobile phone carrier s location 5 Tap the Select your carrier pick list and select your mobile phone carrier Network Service Setup Select the area where your phone service is registered v USA Select your carrier w VoiceStrm USA GPRS Cancel Previous Next If your mobile phone carrier does not appear on the list you either need to download and install the settings for your mobile phone carrier see Updating the phone files on your handheld later in this chapter or your carrier is not supported at this time 154 Setting up a phone connection 6 Tap Next Network Service Setup Network service setup Q for high speed data service was successful You can now use it with your web browser and e mail applications 7 Tap Done To configure a dial up connection 1 After completing step 11 of the To configure Bluetooth settings for your phone connection procedure tap Next on the Network Service Setup screen If you do not see the Network Service Setup screen tap the Home icon O select the Phone Link icon amp and then tap the Network Service box Network Service Setup OO amp This guide will help you set up a network service to connect to the Internet and use e mail 2 Tap No when asked if you subscribe to a high speed data service Network Service Setup Network Service Setup Do you subscribe to You will now set up a hig
346. lect the font you want Select Font Font v ETECO 2 Segoe MT Size Sabon MT Style Thorndale MT g Palm Sample This is a sample 222 Getting sending and managing e mail 4 Tap the Size pick list and select the font size you want Select Font Font Gill Sans MT Size 6_ 9 Style w Tiun Sample This is a sample 5 Tap the Style pick list and select the font style you want Select Font Font v Gill Sans MT Size v 9 Style aD Sample This is a sample 6 Tap OK To select colors for read and unread mail 1 Tap Display 2 Tap the Unread pick list and then tap the color you want to use to display unread messages 3 Tap the Read pick list and then tap the color you want to use to display read messages Display Options Sort by v Date v Descend Red Font Maroon Unread Read Purple 4 Tap OK In the list view itself you can also change the size of the columns 223 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To change the size of a column in the folder s list view NOTE Changing column size is available for one line message view only 1 Tap and hold the stylus on the column divider 2 Drag the column divider to change the width of the column Speakeas 3 18 Inbox M out of of Joe Sad 12 10p Mreview c Angela 12 09p lo S these ar Travis 12 08p lo M lunch meet Joe Sadu lo M FW
347. lor Theme Owner Security shortcuts O OOOO O O O A Buttons Preferences The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to assign a frequently used application to the Favorite icon and to associate various applications with the buttons on the front and side of the handheld Preferences is assigned to the Favorite icon by default But if you use Memo Pad more frequently you can assign Memo Pad to the icon so that you don t have to scroll through the Applications Launcher whenever you want to use Memo Pad Any changes you make in the Buttons Preferences screen become effective immediately you do not have to change to a different screen or application If you assign a different application to a button you can still access the original application using the Applications Launcher To change the Buttons Preferences 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Buttons 2 Tap the pick list next to the button you want to reassign Preferences Buttons Select an application to customize each button Date Book Memo Pad Address v Prefs Tap arrow to ToDo List show pick list wv Voice Memo 421 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 3 Select the application that you want to assign to the button To restore all the buttons to their factory settings tap Default 4 Tap Done Pen Preferences The Buttons Preferences screen enables you to change the assignment of the full screen pen stroke By de
348. maximum message size If the downloaded message either body text alone or body text plus any attachments exceeds your maximum message size you see a message showing that the message and or attachments were too large and asking if you would like to continue downloading them Get Message The remaining message and or attachment is 392K Do you want to continue to download it For example if the maximum message size is 5KB and you download a body of 2KB then any attachment under 3KB is also downloaded and any attachment over 3KB is not See Downloading large attachments later in this chapter 2 Click the red paper clip icon in the upper right corner If the attachment is not downloaded a paper clip icon will not appear even though the message was sent with an attachment You must download the attachment for the paper clip icon to appear 243 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Inbox 4 10f7 gt IE Tap red paper clip icon to view From Joe Sadusky a attachment lt jms510 hotmail com gt Subj files for your review please see attached and get back to me by COB SaaS photos to your e mail with MSN 8 Get 2 months FREE Ef 3 Your options for working with a downloaded attachment vary according to the file type Type Action Viewable file Tap the name of the attachment you want to view and then text Word doc tap View If there are multiple viewers registered on
349. me and password 1 Optional Enter a new username for accessing your e mail This is generally the part of your e mail address appearing before the symbol it is usually not your entire e mail address Sam Yahoo Enter a username and password for this account Username SamYahoo Password 197 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 4 Optional Tap the Password box and then enter a new password The Password box displays the word Assigned to indicate that a password has been entered Tap OK The Password box displays the word Assigned to indicate that a password has been entered Tap Next Editing the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers If your e mail address or the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers have changed or have been entered incorrectly you can edit the address or the server names To edit mail server settings 1 Optional Enter a new e mail address for the account you are accessing such as examplename yahoo com Sam Yahoo Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address SamYahoo yahoo com Incoming Mail Server pop mail yahoo com Outgoing Mail Server smtp mail yahoo com Optional Enter the new or correct name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected t
350. ming or deleting an album You can rename or delete any of the albums that you create You cannot rename or delete the Unfiled album For information about renaming an expansion card see Renaming a card in Chapter 7 When you delete an album all the photos in that album are reassigned to the Unfiled album To rename an album 1 2 6 7 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner Select Edit Albums Edit Albums i Tap Rename Select the album you want to rename Tap Rename Enter the new name Tap OK Tap Done To delete an album 1 2 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner Select Edit Albums Edit Albums i Tap Delete 144 Beaming photos 3 Select the album you want to delete 4 When the confirmation dialog box appears tap Delete 5 Tap Done Beaming photos The Beam command enables you to beam photos to other devices that are enabled with infrared technology The receiving device must have an application that can display photos For instructions on beaming a single photo see Beaming data in Chapter 3 Follow the steps below to beam multiple photos To beam photos 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Photo and then select Beam Tap to select photos id a ci oP Searching Tap Beam 3 Tap the photos you want to beam A plus sign appears next to the photos you select navigator to insert the highlight press Up Do
351. mpany s dial in server network modem instead of connecting to a computer modem see Conducting network HotSync operations later in this chapter 6 Enter the telephone number to access the modem connected to your computer 7 If necessary enter a dial prefix such as 9 to access an outside line and then tap the Dial Prefix check box TIP You can enter a comma in the field to introduce a pause in the dialing sequence Each comma equals a two second pause 8 If the phone line you re using for the handheld has Call Waiting select the Disable call waiting check box to avoid an interruption during the modem HotSync operation 9 If you want to use a calling card to place the call select the check box and enter the calling card number 10 Tap OK 368 Conducting modem HotSync operations Selecting the conduits for a modem HotSync operation The Conduit Setup dialog box on your handheld enables you to define which files and or applications synchronize during a modem HotSync operation You can use these settings to minimize the time required to synchronize data with a modem To change the Conduit Setup for a modem HotSync operation 1 2 3 6 Tap the Home icon Select the HotSync icon Tap the Menu icon Select Conduit Setup on the Options menu Tap the check boxes to deselect the files and applications that you do not want to synchronize during a modem HotSync operation The d
352. n Bluetooth radio in your handheld enabling wireless e mail connectivity Enhanced use of color fonts styles and user selected display options Basic HTML formatting display for e mail messages received in HTML format Increased number of file types supported for being sent and received as attachments Scheduled retrieval of new e mail with notification Improved message addressing capabilities Enhanced security 177 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Getting started with the VersaMail application To start using the application simply tap the VersaMail icon amp in the Applications Launcher on your handheld If you are using a Windows computer the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit is installed automatically when you install the Palm Desktop software See Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop later in this chapter for information on using the conduit Synchronizing an existing username If you plan to synchronize your Palm Tungsten T2 handheld with an existing username by performing a HotSync operation you must do so before you enter your e mail account information in the VersaMail application If you enter the e mail account information first and then synchronize your handheld to an existing username the e mail account information you entered is overwritten Upgrading a MultiMail VersaMail database If you have previously used a Palm personal e mail application s
353. n HTML or in plain text format 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options 3 Select Preferences Preferences i General Advanced System Get v Subjects Only amp Ask Every Time M Confirm Deletions O Delete Msgs on Server X Download Attachments Receive Format ahg 4 Tap the Receive Format pick list and select HTML or Plain Text The default is HTML 5 Tap OK 219 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Viewing other folders When you get new e mail it appears in the account s Inbox folder You can move an e mail message from one folder to another and then view it in the destination folder To view other folders 1 Tap the folders pick list in the upper right corner of the screen 0 0 Available folders 2 Tap the folder you want to view Managing display options in the folder s list view You can customize the way in which messages appear in the list view of your mail folders The options you choose apply to all folders The display options you can customize and the default settings are as follows Option Default Sort by Date Sort order Descend Summary view Two line view Summary view columns Sender Date Subject Font Palm 9 Unread message color Black Read message color Black 220 Getting sending and managing e mail To change the sort order 1 Tap Display 2 Tap the Sort by pick list and then tap the column name Display O
354. n an online Tips icon in the upper right corner Online tips anticipate questions you might have in a dialog box provide shortcuts for using the dialog box or give you other useful information 19 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld To display an online tip 1 Tap the Tips icon 2 After you review the tip tap Done Keyboard There are three ways to access the onscreen keyboard 1 Tap the dots in the corners of the Graffiti 2 writing area to activate the numbers or letters fst pae T 7 keyboards abe Int l 2 The Keyboard command Using the navigator When you work with most applications the navigator on the front panel of your handheld makes it easy for you to navigate among and select your entries You can use the navigator to perform tasks without the stylus using one hand Look for the navigator icon to find navigator tips throughout this guide See Chapter 4 and Chapter 5 for additional information about using the navigator with Address Book and Chapter 8 for additional information on using the navigator with Date Book To navigate in list screens do any of the following m Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll an entire screen of records m Press and hold Up or Down on the navigator to accelerate the scrolling m Press Select the middle button on the navigator to insert the selection highlight When the selection highlight is present you can do the following Press Up or Dow
355. n card You can copy applications from your handheld to an expansion card or from an expansion card to your handheld To copy an application to an expansion card 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select Copy on the App menu Copy From v My Card To Handheld 13 9M Free 6K CaveRibbon Cloak MineHunt Puzzle ScreenShot SubHunt 4 Tap the Copy From pick list and select Handheld 5 Tap the Copy To pick list and select the card name The Copy To pick list appears only if there are multiple cards available 6 Tap an application to copy 7 Tap Copy 8 Tap Done You can install applications to a card that is seated in the expansion card slot during a HotSync operation See Installing files and add on applications later in this chapter for details NOTE If you view your applications on the card using a Card Reader on your Windows or Mac computer the actual file names may differ from those displayed in the Applications Launcher To copy an application from an expansion card 1 Tap the Home icon O 2 Tap the Menu icon 46 Selecting copy settings 3 Select Copy on the App menu Copy From v Handheld To BMy Card 22 7M Free 36K FlashCard Graffiti 2 24K ScreenShot 125K Tap the Copy From pick list and select the card name Tap the Copy To pick list and select Handheld Tap the application you want to copy Tap Copy Tap Done You can also beam applications
356. n on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next records Press Select again to view the selected record Press Left on the navigator to remove the selection highlight To navigate in record screens 1 Press Up or Down on the navigator to scroll within the current record 2 Press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to the previous or next record This feature is not available in Address Book 3 Press Select on the navigator to return to the list screen 20 Tapping and typing To navigate in dialog boxes m While a pick list is open press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight an item and then press Select on the navigator to select the item m Press Select on the navigator to close a dialog If there is only one button pressing Select activates that button Ifthere are two buttons pressing Select activates the action button instead of Cancel such as OK Yes or Delete If there are multiple buttons Select activates affirming buttons such as OK Yes or Done IMPORTANT Read dialog boxes carefully Sometimes selecting a single button OK or Yes results in canceling an operation or deleting data 21 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld 22 Entering Data on Your Handheld This chapter explains several ways to enter data on your handheld and it covers the following topics Using the onscreen keyboard Using Graffiti 2 writing Beaming data between devices wit
357. n your handheld scrolls through all the categories of that application except for Unfiled This feature is not available in Date Book 56 Performing common tasks To define a new category 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner of the screen or list Tap here Address AI Abrams Liz Adams Ben Beckman Rachel Bertolli Marcus Bruce Jeremy Butler Richard Cain Cathy Carpenter Joan Carter Melanie Chu Byron Conner Sandy Tap New 650 454 6121 408 772 1900 510 532 0746 213 422 1363 408 453 1279 516 626 1424 650 235 6222 718 824 1548 212 395 6277 213 343 9801 301 933 6833 4 Enter the name of the new category and then tap OK Edit Categories Enter a new category name 5 Tap OK You can assign any of your records to the new category To rename a category Abrams Liz Adams Ben Beckman Rachel Bertolli Marcus Bruce Jeremy Butler Richard Cain Cathy Carpenter Joan Carter Melanie Chu Byron Conner Sandy 516 626 1424 650 235 6222 718 824 1548 212 395 6277 213 343 9801 301 933 6833 Ao 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner of the screen or list 2 Select Edit Categories 57 Chapter 4 Working with Applications 3 Select the category that you want to rename and then tap Rename Edit Categories i 4 Enter the new name for the category and then tap OK Edit Categor
358. ndheld or expansion card file list If a No symbol appears when you attempt to drag a file onto a file list that file is not supported on that destination The status bar shows the number of files selected and their total size However since some file types are compressed during synchronization they may actually require less space than the amount shown in the file size column or status bar 5 Perform a HotSync operation to install the files See Chapter 21 for details NOTE Files that remain in the list after you perform a HotSync operation were not installed This can happen if your handheld is too full to install the file or if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation If files are unrecognized try launching the associated application from your handheld and then performing another HotSync operation If the files still remain in the list they are not associated with an application on your handheld and cannot be installed Expansion cards may also hold files that are not Palm application files To use the command buttons in the Palm Quick Install window 1 Copy or download the application s or file s you want to install onto your computer 2 Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop Palm Quick Install File Edt View Heb User drop down list Handheld 2 5 8 ree se ot lact HotSync operation Type QMukMail pre 489 79 KB Palm Application Palin Reader pre 220 67 KB Paln Applicat
359. ne An IR enabled mobile phone A mobile phone with a cable that connects to your handheld A modem accessory for your handheld A Bluetooth network connection with Internet access m An account with an ISP or Internet service provided by your company NOTE A data connection service may also be required by some mobile phone network providers Upgrade information If you already own a Palm OS handheld go to the web site www palm com support globalsupport for upgrade instructions Step 1 Connect the HotSyne cradle cable to the computer a Locate the USB icon and ports on your computer b Plug the USB connector into a USB port on your computer c Connect the adapter cable to the back of the cradle cable NOTE Your adapter may connect to the back of the USB connector not to the cradle itself d Plug the adapter into a working electric outlet Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Palm Tungsten T2 Handheld e Windows NT users cannot use a USB cradle cable and port You must use a cradle with a serial port connection sold separately USB icon USB port USB connector Step 2 Charge your handheld a Place your handheld in the cradle cable for at least two hours for an initial charge Your handheld s indicator light glows steady green when it is charging b After is it is charged remove the handheld from the cradle cable by gently tilting it forward and then lifting i
360. next bullet item If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection select the Use Secure Connection check box See Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL later in this chapter for information on SSL To limit the maximum size of an incoming e mail message enter the size in kilobytes KB for Maximum Message Size The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default but you can enter a smaller size The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total including attachments IMAP accounts Sam IMAP Incoming Mail Options Incoming Mail Options Get unread mail ONLY Get unread mail ONLY O Delete messages on the O Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail server when they are deleted in VersaMail Leave mail on server e g to view on desktop later Port Number 110 Port Number 143 O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Secure Connection SSL Maximum Message Size 5 KB Maximum Message Size 5 KB 2 Tap Next 200 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Editing outgoing mail options Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts To edit outgoing mail options 1 Optional Change any of the following Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Sm
361. nfiguring connection settings To select a connection 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Connection pick list Preferences Network v Service My ISP User Name mynetname Password f Connection Tap here to display a Phone list of available connections 3 Select the connection you want to use 4 Tap Done Adding telephone settings The Phone field enables you to store the telephone number you use to connect with your ISP or dial in server You can also define a prefix disable Call Waiting and give special instructions for using a calling card To enter your server phone number 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Phone box 3 Enter the phone number for your ISP or dial in server Phone satup il Enter your ISP phone number here O Dial prefix O Disable call waiting 1170 O Use calling card 4 If youneed to enter a prefix or to disable Call Waiting skip to those procedures Otherwise tap OK 5 Tap Done 407 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Entering a prefix A prefix is anumber that you dial before the telephone number to access an outside line For example many offices require that you first dial 9 to dial a number outside the building To enter a prefix 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Phone box 3 Tap the Dial Prefix chec
362. ng Graffiti 2 See Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data in Chapter 3 to learn how to write Graffiti 2 characters Power button Expansion brightness control card slot Stylus IR port 12 Locating handheld components Indicator light Power button brightness control Expansion card slot Stylus IR port Adjusting screen brightness If lighting conditions make it difficult for you to see the information on your handheld you can adjust the brightness of the screen backlight Serves as an alert for Date Book World Clock Note Pad or Voice Memo alarms It also indicates the battery charging status when your handheld is in the cradle cable Turns your handheld on or off If your handheld is turned off pressing the power button turns the handheld on and returns you to the last screen you viewed If your handheld is turned on you can turn it off by pressing the power button You can also press and hold the power button down for about two seconds to access brightness control For more information see Adjusting screen brightness later in this chapter Accepts SD SDIO or MultiMediaCard MMC expansion cards Expansion cards enable you to back up data add more memory add wireless communication features or use additional applications Expansion cards sold separately Slides in and out of the slot on the top of your handheld To use the stylus gently press the top of the stylus to release it
363. ng Card Info amp Card Info enables you to review general information about an expansion card Use Card Info to do the following m Review card contents m Rename a card Format a card Reviewing Card Information You can view the card name type available storage space and a summary of its contents To review Card Information 1 2 3 Tap the Home icon Tap the Card Info icon amp Review Card name Type and Size Review card contents summarized by directory Card info a Card v D My Card Type MultiMedia Card Size 3MBFreeof 3MB Application Directory Review summarized 3 Applications 105 KB card contents Review card information 91 Chapter 7 Using Card Info Renaming a card Formatting The expansion card name appears in the Category pick list and in other lists that enable you to choose where to store information on your handheld You can assign a name to each expansion card that indicates its contents To rename a card 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Card Info icon amp 3 Tap the Menu icon 4 Select Rename Card from the Card menu 5 Enter the new name for the card Rename Card New Card Name 6 Tap Rename a card Formatting a card destroys all its data and prepares it to accept new applications and data To format a card 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Card Info icon B 3 Tap the Menu icon 4 Select Format
364. ng records 55 conduit for synchronizing 354 creating records 50 deleting records 52 102 dragging memos into other applications 127 fonts 66 menus 89 129 opening 127 overview 127 private records 435 reviewing memos 128 sorting records 63 453 Memory amount of free 465 for beaming 461 Calculator 88 limitations on History list 322 regaining 54 451 Memos See Memo Pad Menus 48 50 169 452 Address Book 83 Calculator 89 choosing 49 command equivalents Graffiti 2 writing 49 command toolbar 50 Date Book 107 350 Edit menu 51 52 Expense 126 Memo Pad 89 129 136 menu bar 18 48 Network preferences 419 Note Pad 136 Palm Photos 147 SMS 169 To Do List 176 Voice Memo 315 World Clock 350 Microsoft Exchange 5 0 262 Microsoft Outlook connecting to 455 synchronizing with 262 Microsoft Outlook Express configuring for e mail 273 selecting as mail client 262 Mobile phone See Phone Modem auto disconnect 295 HotSync operations via 365 369 457 458 initialization string 400 initializing 296 preferences 294 sled prerequisite for connection 180 timeout 295 wireless 296 Monday to start week 383 Month Date Book view 105 109 MPA Memo Pad archive file 38 MultiMediaCard 9 See also Expansion Card Multi part messages in SMS 160 Multiple addressees 231 N Navigator 12 20 160 deleting bookmarks 330 editing bookmarks 330 in VersaMail 302 480 Index returning to web pages you ve
365. ng up a schedule you select the interval for retrieving mail the start and end times for retrieving mail and the days on which scheduled e mail retrieval should take place You can set up different schedules for each of your e mail accounts but you can set up only one schedule for a given account For example if you set up a schedule for mail retrieval on weekdays for your Yahoo account you cannot set up a separate schedule for weekends on the same account If more than one scheduled auto get takes place at the same time for example for two separate e mail accounts the retrievals take place in the following order m Any past due auto get for example a retry of an earlier failed auto get Current retrievals according to the order of e mail accounts 1 2 and so on NOTE The auto get feature is not supported for VPN or SSL connections It is also not supported if you have configured the security preferences on your handheld to encrypt databases on the handheld For some nonsupported connection types the Options menu does not display the auto get mail option for others if you try to set up an auto get schedule an error message appears Get Mail Alert Auto Get Mail is not available for accounts that use SSL To set up a scheduled auto get mail 1 On the message screen Tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options N Accounts Preferences R Display Options gee ccna Auto Get Mail About VersaMa
366. nize Only Account check box Account Setup i Enter aname for this account e g My Mail and select settings Account Name Sam Sync Mail Service v EarthLink Protocol v POP X Synchronize Only Account Select check box for a i synchronize only account 7 Tap Next 190 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Entering the account username and password In the next part of the VersaMail Account Setup you enter the username and password for this account The VersaMail 2 5 application provides strong 128 bit AES encryption for your password To enter the account username and password 1 4 Enter the username you use to access your e mail This is generally the part of your e mail address appearing before the symbol it is usually not your entire e mail address Enter a username and password for this account Username SamSynd Tap the Password box and then enter your password Tap OK The Password box displays the word Assigned to indicate that a password has been entered Tap Next Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server You need to enter your e mail address for the account you are accessing as well as the names of the outgoing and incoming mail servers To enter mail server settings 1 If you chose a preconfigured service from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen the e mail address field is completed automatically based on th
367. nize mail that has been on the server for the specified number of days or less with your Palm handheld M Synchronize unread mail only I Download attachments during HotSync Send mail that is in the Outbox on your Palm handheld during the HotSync operation I Synchronize all Inbox mail on your Palm handheld with mail in the Inbox of your desktop mail application or mail server Folder Synchronization Options Business Account Security Settings I Enable Key Expiration Expire security key every F days Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 2 Active Accounts 2 266 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop Set folder synchronization options as follows Click the name of the folder you want Folder Synchronization Options x Server Folder Synchronize Inbox Yes E2 Refresh List Cancel Click in the Synchronize column to the right of the folder name Click the arrow to open the drop down list and click Yes or No to synchronize the folder or not Folder Synchronization Options x Server Folder Synchronize Refresh List Cancel 8 Click OK You can now set synchronization options for your handheld for the selected account 267 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To set handheld synchronization settings 1 Under the selected account name click the plus sign to the left of Handheld Settings Click plus
368. nless the cursor is in the title line Entering text For information on how to enter text using Graffiti 2 writing the onscreen keyboard or the keyboard attached to your computer see Chapter 3 For information on entering text in Note Pad see Creating a note in Chapter 12 Using the Edit menu The Edit menu is available with any screen where you enter or edit text In general commands available in the Edit menu apply to text that you select in an application 51 Chapter 4 Working with Applications To select text in an application 1 Tap the beginning of the text that you want to select 2 Drag the stylus over the text to highlight it in yellow NOTE You can also double tap to select a word or triple tap to select a line of text You can also drag across the text to select additional words or drag down to select a group of lines The following commands may appear in an Edit menu Undo Cut Copy Paste Select All Keyboard Graffiti 2 Help Deleting records Reverses the action of the last edit command For example if you used Cut to remove text Undo restores the text you removed Undo also reverses deletions you made using backspace Removes the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory of your handheld You can paste the text you cut into another area of the current application or into a different application Copies the selected text and stores it temporarily in the memory
369. nly e mail containing the subject words Current Software Project only those same messages are synchronized between your desktop and your handheld Be sure to turn mail filters off if you want to synchronize all messages between your desktop and your handheld See Turning filters on and off later in this chapter for details 272 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop Configuring Microsoft Outlook You can synchronize Microsoft Outlook 97 98 2000 XP with a VersaMail e mail account but you must set Microsoft Outlook as the default e mail handler You must check your username and password To configure Microsoft Outlook 1 In the Control Panel click Internet Options NOTE For Windows XP click Network and Internet Connections and then click Internet Options 2 Click the Programs tab 3 Select Microsoft Outlook as the default e mail program 4 Click OK NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Microsoft Outlook Configuring Microsoft Outlook Express You can synchronize a VersaMail e mail account with Microsoft Outlook Express 5 5 or 6 0 but you must set Outlook Express as the default e mail handler NOTE Make sure your username and password are set up correctly within Outlook Express To configure Outlook Express 1 In the Control Panel click Internet Options NOTE For Windows XP click Network and Internet Connections and then click Internet Options
370. not view the entries that you want to protect Use the security feature to do the following Lock and turn off your handheld so that it does not operate until you enter the correct password Mask all records that you mark as private so that the information appears grayed out Hide all records that you mark as private so they do not appear on any screen Encrypt records 425 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld You can mask and hide private records with or without a password Without a password private records are hidden or masked until you set the Security Preference to show them With a password you must enter the password to view the private entries Assigning a password You can assign a password to protect your private records and to lock your handheld You can mask the password from accidental viewing To quickly log in you can also assign a short quick password that works only at your first login attempt and for a limited amount of time You can set the amount of time you need to enter the quick password To assign a password 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Security 2 Tap the Password box Preferences Security Text Password i Full Password Tap here Hint 7 Quick password Current Privacy Level An optional quick password works Show Private Records only on the first entry attempt 3 Enter a password 4 Enter a hint to help you rememb
371. notification options 213 notifications 212 Reminders screen 215 resource issues 217 scheduling 210 VPN connections 182 Autofill enabling or disabling 337 Automatic fill in Expense 126 Automatic sending of messages See Send re try Auto off delay 385 Autotext See Graffiti 2 shortcuts for entering text B Background sending of messages See Send retry Backing up e mail databases 299 See also Archive files and HotSync Battery conserving power 385 disposal 470 gauge 41 life and use 444 recharging 6 recycling 444 warning 470 Bcc field 230 See also Blind copies Beaming information 33 36 location of IR port 13 pen stroke to activate 423 problems with 461 URLs 327 See also Infrared Beep for new e mail 212 Blind copies 187 188 194 195 201 202 231 290 Blinking asterisk 215 Bluetooth entering passkey 152 462 HotSync operations 370 372 making connections 397 phone connection 149 158 preferences 389 398 Bold font for text 66 Bookmarking web pages 329 331 Brightness control 13 18 422 Broken envelope icon 215 Browsing the web 320 322 Business card for beaming 34 Buttons preferences 111 421 423 C Cache 339 Calculator buttons explained 87 88 memory 88 overview 87 recent calculations 87 88 Calibration 17 382 Call Waiting disabling 368 408 Calling card using in phone settings 368 409 Capital letters Graffiti 2 writing 28 472 Index Card Info 91 Caring for the handheld 443 Categories 16
372. ns onlinebroker Then get mail and move to Finance 279 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software IMPORTANT If you create a filter only messages that meet the filter criteria are downloaded to your handheld You do not see any other messages that have been sent to you even in your Inbox To avoid this you must set up two filters as described in the following procedure Using the example above the first filter would have all mail containing onlinebroker in the From field moved to the Finance folder For the second filter you should specify that all mail NOT containing onlinebroker in the From field should be moved to the Inbox or other folder you designate If you do not create this second filter then only messages containing onlinebroker in the From field are downloaded to your handheld To create a filter 1 From the Inbox or another folder tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options and then select Filters CENT Accounts Preferences R Display Options ee ancy enna Auto Get Mail About VersaMail 3 Tap New 4 Enter a short description of the filter in the Name field Filter Editor i Name Quotes Ifthe From v Contains onlinebroker Then get mail and move to Finance 5 Use the If the pick lists to create criteria for the filter The three pick lists and the edit line combine to create a statement tha
373. ns the message so you can modify the contents Moves the message to the Trash category 163 Chapter 15 Using SMS To view messages in your Trash 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner 2 Tap Trash 3 Tap the message you want to view To 14085551212 Date 8 1 02 11 44am When is the flight to Austin Done Restore 4 Tap one of the following Done Returns to the list view without moving or changing the message Restore Moves the message back to the category it was in before you deleted it Working with draft messages When you create a message you can save it as a draft message SMS does not send draft messages when you transmit the messages in your Outbox You can store draft messages for as long as you like and review and edit them before you send them To place a message in the Draft category 1 Create or open the message you want to store in the Draft category 2 From the Message view tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Draft from the Message menu To view or edit draft messages 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner 2 Tap Draft 3 Tap the message you want to edit 164 Adding a signature to a message 4 In the message view tap Edit New Message iter Length 18 Send Outbox Cancer 5 Edit the message 6 Tap one of the following Send Sends the message now Outbox Moves the message to the Outbox to be sent later
374. number and so on edit the information on the signature lines To remove a signature deselect the Attach Signature to messages check box This signature is attached to all your outgoing e mail Sam Yahoo Outgoing Mail Options I Attach signature to messages Sam Yahoo Marketing Director 555 555 5554 2 Tap Next Editing advanced outgoing mail options You can change additional outgoing mail options To edit advanced outgoing mail options 1 Optional Change any of the following Port Number The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Authentication Select the My server requires authentication ESMTP check box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for information If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a p
375. number of new messages you received To send all messages in your Outhox 1 Connect to your phone See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 2 From any SMS list view tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Send from the Message menu To download all messages from your phone 1 Connect to your phone See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 2 From any SMS list view tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Check from the Message menu 161 Chapter 15 Using SMS Viewing messages SMS stores your messages in five different categories Inbox Outbox Trash Archive Draft Stores messages downloaded from your phone Stores messages waiting to be sent Stores messages you deleted You can restore deleted messages to their original category Files messages you want to keep S tores messages you want to change or review before you send them In the Inbox and Outbox icons appear next to the message to indicate whether it has been read or sent In the Inbox additional icons indicate whether the message is incomplete and whether it contains data other than text that requires another application to read it To view text messages in your Inbox 1 Tap the category pick list in the upper right corner 2 Tap Inbox Unread Message contains data message from an application fi v Inbox Message 4d 40f4 gt Read e 14085556337 Staff meeting C From 14085556397 A 14085556397 Yep Date 6 2
376. o Go version 5 is included on the Palm Desktop software that came with your handheld You must install the software and perform a HotSync operation in order to use Documents To Go See the Documents To Go Getting Started Manual for more information When you receive a message with an attachment on your handheld the file is converted to the DataViz format on the handheld when you perform a HotSync operation You can then read and edit the file in Documents To Go on the handheld In the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit you can turn off DataViz Documents To Go plug ins or select other plug ins To turn off attachment conversion plug ins 1 Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray 2 Select Custom 274 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop 3 Select VersaMail in the Conduit list ce Sadusky x Conduit Action ScreenShot Handheld overwrites Desktop a Date Book Synchronize the files Address Book Synchronize the files To Do List Synchronize the files Memo Pad Synchronize the files Expense Synchronize the files Note Pad Synchronize the files S nize the files Install Enable Install Garvine Tamnlatae Enabled 4 Click Attachment Conversion Eile Help Joe Sadusky uH VersaMail H Business E Sam Yahoo E Sam IMAP E Sam Syne When receiving messages to the Palm handheld the plug in will convert the incoming attachment to E Speakeasy it s Palm com
377. o List This deletes To Do List items and past Date Book events from the memory of your handheld See Purging records in Chapter 4 You must perform a HotSync operation to recover the memory Delete unused memos and records If necessary you can save these records See Deleting records in Chapter 4 You must perform a HotSync operation to recover the memory If you have installed additional applications on your handheld remove them to recover memory See Removing applications in Chapter 4 Your handheld is designed to turn itself off after a period of inactivity This period can be set at 30 seconds or at one two or three minutes Check the Auto off after setting on the Power Preferences screen See Power Preferences in Chapter 22 451 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions My handheld is not making any sounds My handheld s indicator light is not blinking when alarms occur My handheld does not vibrate when alarms occur My handheld has frozen Check the System Alarm and Game Sound settings See Sounds amp Alerts Preferences in Chapter 22 Check the Alarm indicator light setting See Alarm LED and Alarm Vibrate settings in Chapter 22 Check the Alarm Vibrate setting See Alarm LED and Alarm Vibrate settings in Chapter 22 If a network connection was improperly terminated your handheld may appear to be frozen for up to 30 seconds If it is still frozen after 3
378. o see if any of the account settings have changed Make sure you have chosen the same settings for the account on both your handheld and your desktop For example if the account is set up on the handheld to use the POP protocol check the HotSync manager on the desktop to make sure that POP is selected as the protocol for that account Solution Confirm that your handheld is firmly connected to the cradle cable Confirm that your recharger cable is properly connected to the back of the cradle cable s USB or serial port connector that plugs into your computer Confirm that your recharger is plugged into an AC outlet that has power If you have not used your handheld for a long period such as an extended vacation the battery may not contain enough charge to power the indicator light After your handheld has recharged the indicator light will function normally 464 Password problems Password problems Problem Solution I forgot the password and my am First use the password hint to try and remember the handheld is not locked password If this doesn t help or if you do not have a password hint you can use Security to delete the password but your handheld deletes all entries marked as private However if you perform a HotSync operation before you delete the password the HotSync process backs up all entries whether or not they are marked private Then you can follow these steps to restore your private entri
379. o someone to remind them to add a meeting to their calendar If the recipient receives the message on a Palm OS handheld they can transfer the message directly to the appropriate application If the recipient receives the message on another device the data will appear as text NOTE Not all applications include a send command To send data from another application 1 Open the record you want to send 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Send from the Record menu The name of the menu may be different depending on which application you re sending data from For example tap Send from the Note menu in Note Pad 4 If necessary tap SMS to send the data using SMS rather than Bluetooth technology and then tap OK Jun 27 02 KIBO GEC 8 00 9 00 10 00 11 00 aes 12 00 Sending Staff meeting 1 00 Via SMS 400 6 00 hE J New Details Go To 166 Setting SMS Preferences 5 Tap To to select from a list of recent recipients or tap Lookup to select a number from your Address Book 6 Tap Send Setting SMS Preferences The SMS Preferences screen enables you to customize several of the settings in the SMS application To view or change SMS Preferences 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences SMS Preferences i Sort by Date O Show Date O Alert Sound Alarm M Confirm Deleted Message M Delete After Transfer Signature 3 Change any of the followin
380. of your handheld You can paste the text that you copy into another area of the current application or into a different application Inserts the text that you cut or copied at the selected point in a record The text you paste replaces any selected text If you did not previously cut or copy text Paste does nothing Selects all of the text in the current record or screen This enables you to cut or copy all of the text and paste it elsewhere Opens the onscreen keyboard After you finish with the onscreen keyboard tap Done Opens screens that show all the Graffiti 2 character strokes Use this command anytime you forget a stroke for a character To delete a record 1 Select the record you want to delete 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Select the Delete command on the Record menu In Voice Memo the delete command is on the VMemo menu In Palm Photos the delete command is on the Photo menu Date Book Delete Event Address Book Delete Address 52 Performing common tasks To Do List Delete Item Note Pad Delete Note Voice Memo Delete V Memo Palm Photos Delete Photo Memo Pad Delete Memo Expense Delete Item In SMS the delete command is available when you have a message open In Palm Web Browser Pro the delete command is available from the View Saved Pages dialog box A confirmation dialog box appears If you want to save a copy of the deleted item to an archive file in Palm Desktop software be sure that the
381. oice memos with other people when you use the Send or Beam commands Conserve space on your handheld by storing voice memos on expansion cards To open Voice Memo Press the Voice Memo application button on the side panel of your handheld Voice Memo opens to display the list of all your voice memos Speaker Voice Memo button ce Microphone 307 Chapter 18 Using Voice Memo Creating a voice memo To record a voice memo you can use the Voice Memo application button or the onscreen controls To pause and resume while recording a voice memo you must use the onscreen controls After you finish recording a voice memo you cannot add to or change the content but you can assign the voice memo to a category or change the voice memo title To conserve storage space on your handheld you can also store your voice memos on an expansion card Recording a voice memo This section covers how to record a voice memo using the Voice Memo application button To record a voice memo on your handheld 1 Press and hold the Voice Memo application button IMPORTANT Continue holding the Voice Memo application button until you finish recording If you are recording a long voice memo and don t want to continue holding the Voice Memo application button see Pausing and resuming a voice memo recording later in this chapter to make a recording with the onscreen controls For optimum results hold your handheld within 3
382. oints in mind m Tap a day in the Month View to display that day in the Day View m Tap the scroll arrows in the upper right corner or press Left or Right on the navigator to move forward or backward a month m Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight and then press Left or Right on the navigator to scroll to a specific day Press Select on the navigator to display that day in the Day View 105 Chapter 8 Using Date Book Working in Agenda View The Agenda View shows you your untimed events appointments and To Do items in one screen When you tap on an untimed event or appointment in the Agenda View the Day View appears so that you can see more detailed information about the event You can tap the check box next to a To Do item to mark it as completed When you tap a To Do item your To Do list appears To return to the Agenda View press the Date Book button NOTE Which To Do items appear and how you can change them depend on the settings in your To Do Preferences See Setting To Do Preferences in Chapter 16 for more information To display the Agenda View 1 Tap the Agenda View icon 2 Tap the navigation controls to move forward or backward a day at a time or to display more events and To Do items events on the selected day or press Right or Left on the navigator to scroll to TIP You can also press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the the next or previous day q Tue
383. omatic send retries have been attempted for that account If automatic send retry fails after the third attempt you must send the message manually 235 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software NOTE If you perform a HotSync operation or a soft reset during automatic send retry the retry cancels You must manually send any messages in the Outbox after the soft reset Modifying messages in the Outbox A message in the Outbox waiting for the next automatic send retry can be edited moved or deleted However if you edit the message you will need to perform a manual send in order to send the message If the manual send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to await the next automatic send retry During automatic send retry any message that the VersaMail application is attempting to send is in a locked state and cannot be edited moved or deleted If you try to modify a message in the locked state an error message appears Sending Mail VersaMailis trying to send this message it cannot be accessed at this time If a send retry fails after the third attempt the message is stored in the Outbox in the error state You can send the message again manually or edit move or delete the message However if you edit the message you will need to perform a manual send in order to send the message If the manual send fails you can choose to store the message in the Outbox to await the
384. on is set to Local with the option IR to PC Handheld m Be sure the IR port of your handheld is aligned directly opposite to and within a few inches of the infrared device of your computer m IR HotSync operations do not work after you receive a low battery warning Check the battery power of your handheld Recharge the internal battery My handheld appears to freeze Move your handheld away from the computer s infrared port when I place it near my computer When I press the HotSync m Make a copy of your Palm folder Uninstall and then button on the cradle cable reinstall Palm Desktop software nothing happens on Palm Desktop software and my handheld times out Turn on your handheld and tap the Home icon Select the HotSync icon and then tap Local 459 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions When I perform a HotSync operation my information does not transfer to Palm Desktop software My handheld displays the message Waiting for sender when it s near my computer s infrared port I want to synchronize my computer with more than one handheld I can t perform a Bluetooth HotSync operation If you have performed a HotSync operation successfully but you cannot find the data from your handheld on Palm Desktop software check to see that you have the correct user name selected for viewing data On a Windows computer click the HotSync Manager and select Custom Check that all con
385. on you want to remove Tap Remove Tap OK to confirm the deletion Tap Done Setting an alarm In addition to setting and displaying the date and time World Clock also provides a convenient travel alarm feature You can set an alarm to sound during the next 24 hour period To set an alarm 1 Tap the box next to the Alarm icon to open the Set Alarm dialog box World Clock Palo Alto 8 10 31 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 v Tokyo v London 3 31pm 6 31 am Sun Dec 7 Sun Dec 7 Set Date amp Time Set Alarm Time 2 Tap the time columns to set the hour and minute 3 Tap OK 349 Chapter 20 Using World Clock 4 When the alarm reminder message appears do one of the following Tap OK to permanently dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen Tap Snooze to dismiss the reminder and return to the current screen An attention indicator blinks in the upper left corner of the screen to remind you of the pending alarm and the reminder message appears again in five minutes When the reminder message reappears the current time appears in the Reminder bar and the alarm time appears on the screen Tap Go To to open World Clock and to dismiss the alarm 4 35pm Reminder 9 4 35 pm a 4 35 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 Using World Clock menus World Clock menus are shown here for your reference and World Clock features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here
386. onds that the modem uses to initialize itself If you have a modem tap and enter a number of seconds for the wait The typical setting for a wireless modem is 3 and the typical setting for most normal modems is 0 Cutting and copying text from an e mail message for use in other applications You can copy any text from an e mail message either from one you have composed or have read or from an attachment you have downloaded and opened such as a Word doc for use elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another application Text you can select and copy includes Aname m An e mail address m Body text of an e mail message or a downloaded attachment To copy and paste text from an e mail message 1 Select the text by dragging the stylus over it 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Edit and select Copy To paste the text elsewhere in the VersaMail application or in another application 1 Go to the new location and tap the Menu icon O 2 Tap Edit and select Paste You can also cut or copy text from a Word document that you download as an attachment and view on your handheld You can then paste this text in another part of the Word document another Word document or another application on your handheld To cut copy and paste text from within a Word document 1 Select the text by dragging the stylus over it 2 Tap the Menu icon O 3 Tap Edit and select Cut or Copy 4 To paste the text in another location go to the new loca
387. only M Download attachments during HotSync Send mail that is in the Outbox on your Palm handheld during the HotSync operation I Synchronize all Inbox mail on your Palm handheld with mail in the Inbox of your desktop mail application or mail server Folder ey nehranieation iptone Business Account Security Settings Te Enable hep Evpration E days Expire security key every Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 3 Active Accounts 1 6 Enter the synchronization options you want Enter the maximum message size from 1 to 2048KB If the message exceeds the maximum size the conduit truncates the message For example the maximum message size might be 50KB and the message might have the following Message header 1KB m Body 20KB m Attachment 140KB m Attachment 20KB In this case the conduit puts the message header body and attachment 2 totaling 41KB on the handheld Attachment 1 is removed because adding it to the message causes the message to exceed the maximum Set how many days of e mail between 0 and 999 that e mail should be synchronized A value of 0 synchronizes all e mail in the Inbox during the next HotSync operation For other values the conduit synchronizes e mail for today and the number of days preceding today For example if you enter a value of 2 e mail is synchronized for today and yesterday but if you enter 3 e mail is synchronized for today yesterday and the day before 265 C
388. ons to enter other characters commonly used in web addresses Open URL URL www com net org More Optional Tap buttons to complete the web address 320 Browsing the web on your handheld 3 Tap Go During the short delay while the new page is being downloaded the title bar displays information about the download process lells you what Web Browser Pro is doing receiving data sending data Indicates how much data has been downloaded so far in kilobytes Activity icon shows you that Web Browser Pro is busy Receiving 44k R E To visit a web page using the URL Entry field 1 Tap the URL Entry field at the top of the screen Select the URL field and enter the URL 2 Enter the URL in the field 3 Tap Go TIP If autofill is enabled when you enter the first few letters of a URL that you ve entered before in the URL Entry field Web Browser Pro completes the URL for you For more information on autofill see Enabling or disabling autofill Following a link Many web pages contain links which are text or pictures that when clicked take you to another web page or to another part of the same page Like many other web browsers Web Browser Pro highlights these links by underlining them Links Advanced Search a Preferences To follow a link m Tap the link 321 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Returning to a we
389. or more information on turning system sounds on and off To remove a card 1 Push lightly against the card with your thumb When the card is released you hear the system sound 2 Slide the card out of the expansion slot For complete information about working with expansion cards see Chapter 7 16 Tapping and typing Tapping and typing Like using a mouse to click elements on a computer screen using the stylus to tap elements on your handheld screen is the basic action you use to get things done on your handheld The first time you start your handheld the setup instructions appear on the screen These instructions include a calibration screen Calibration aligns the internal circuitry of your handheld with its touch sensitive screen so that when you tap an element on the screen the handheld can detect exactly which task you want to perform IMPORTANT Always use the point of the stylus for tapping or for making strokes on the handheld screen Never use an actual pen pencil or other sharp object to write on the handheld screen as this will scratch the screen With your handheld turned on you can tap the handheld screen to perform many operations such as the following m Open applications m Select menu commands m Initiate a Find operation to search through applications installed on your handheld for specific text Find operations do not search through applications on expansion cards m Select o
390. or with a Handheld preview Drag photos onto the Palm Quick Install icon or the Palm Photos desktop window to install them on your handheld or on an expansion card during the next HotSync operation Modify and delete your photos 146 Using Palm Photos menus m Organize your photos and add notes m Transfer photos to other applications using the Send command or Export command and import data in popular file formats For information on working with photos on your Mac computer open the Palm folder open the Documentation folder and double click the Photo and Audio Readme file Using Palm Photos menus Palm Photos menus are shown here for your reference and Palm Photos features that are not explained elsewhere in this book are described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands The Photo menu varies slightly when you re viewing the Palm Photos list or thumbnails and an individual photo Photo menu Delete Photo Rotate Photo Thumbnail and List view Photo view Options menus Preto id Preferences Photos Help About Photos About Photos Shows version information for Palm Photos 147 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos 148 Using Phone Link Phone Link helps you configure a connection between your handheld and a compatible mobile phone You can connect to a compatible mobile phone using any of the following methods Bluetoot
391. ord and password your Lotus Notes ID username and password or something else Check with your company s server administrator to obtain the correct username and password The VersaMail 2 5 application provides strong 128 bit AES encryption for your password Protocol Most corporate mail servers use the IMAP protocol for retrieving mail In rare cases your company server may use the POP protocol Check with your company s server administrator to verify the protocol Incoming and Check with your company s server administrator to obtain outgoing mail server settings these s ettings See Creating a network e mail account later in this chapter for steps for inputting your username password protocol and incoming and outgoing server settings when you set up your corporate e mail account 181 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software With a corporate e mail account you can access the following types of mail servers among others m Microsoft Exchange Lotus Domino m Sun iPlanet VPNs If you want to access e mail on your handheld using your corporate e mail account you may need to set up a virtual private network VPN on your handheld A VPN enables you to log in to your corporate mail server through the company s firewall security layer Without a VPN you cannot break through the firewall to gain access to the mail server You need to set up a VPN to access corporate e mai
392. orming a network HotSync operation After you prepare your computer and your handheld and select your Conduit Setup options you are ready to perform a network HotSync operation To perform a network HotSync operation m Tap the modem HotSync icon to begin the operation Welcome Modem Using File Link The File Link feature enables you to import Address Book and Memo Pad information onto your handheld from a separate external file such as a company phone list HotSync Manager stores the data in a separate category on your Palm Desktop software and your handheld You can configure the File Link feature to check for changes to the external file when you perform a HotSync operation 375 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations With File Link you can import data stored in any of the following formats Comma separated csv a Memo Pad archive mpa m Address Book archive aba m Text txt For information on how to set up a file link see the Palm Desktop online Help NOTE The File Link feature is not available in Palm Desktop software for Mac Creating a user profile A user profile enables you to install the same set of data onto multiple Palm OS handhelds before each handheld is individualized with a specific user name and data file A handheld that is preconfigured with a user profile can be given to anyone because the handheld is not yet identified by a unique user name The handheld acquire
393. ort photos in the List view file photos in albums and copy photos to an expansion card Sorting photos in List view In List view you can sort photos in ascending or descending order by name or date To sort photos in List view 1 Tap a column heading to sort the photos based on that item Tap here t comes Tap here t oo te ae ae _ ae ae y Set4_005 10 05 02 Y Set4_006 10 05 02 Set4_007 10 05 02 Set4_008 10 05 02 Set4_009 10 05 02 Bet4_010 10 05 02 Set4_011 10 05 02 Set4_012 10 05 02 Set4_013 10 05 02 Set4_014 10 05 02 R Slide Show 2 Tap the column heading to sort the photos in reverse order 141 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos Creating an album The process for creating a new photo album is identical to creating a new category in your other handheld applications To create an album 1 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner 2 Select Edit Albums Edit Albums i New Album Enter an album name Tap New 3 Tap New 4 Enter a title for the album 5 Tap OK 6 Tap Done Filing photos in albums You can organize the photos on your handheld by filing them into different albums Since each expansion card is viewed as its own album you cannot file photos stored on an expansion card in albums To file photos in albums 1 Tap the Album pick list in the upper right corner and select the album to which you want to add photos Photos Friends Organize Friends
394. ory currently displayed in Address Book To Do List Note Pad or Memo Pad or all photos in the currently displayed album in Palm Photos A special Address Book record that you designate as your business card containing information you want to exchange with business contacts An unlocked application installed in RAM memory An unlocked application installed on an expansion card that is seated in the card slot TIP You can also perform HotSync operations using the IR port See Conducting IR HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for more details To select a business card 1 Create an Address Book record that contains the information you want on your business card Tap the Menu icon O Tap Record and then tap Select Business Card Tap Yes To beam a record business card or category of records 1 Locate the record business card or category you want to beam NOTE The procedure for beaming photos and albums is slightly different from the procedure for beaming other records and categories See Chapter 13 for details Tap the Menu icon O Tap one of the following from the Record menu The Beam command for an individual record In Address Book only Beam Business Card In Note Pad only If you are beaming to someone using an earlier version of Note Pad tap Compatibility and then tap Beam Beam Category TIP You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly
395. oth 2 Tap Trusted Devices 3 Select the device you want to delete 4 Tap Details Trusted Devices Li 5 Tap Delete Device Device Details Li Trusted Device Name Lars T39 Remote Device Address 00 80 37 06 64 C4 Most Recent Connection 12 13 01 1 17 pr Type Phone 396 Setting Communication Preferences 6 Tap OK 7 Tap Done to return to the Bluetooth Preferences screen 8 Tap Done again Enabling disabling the user cache When you enable or disable the user cache you control whether or not your handheld retrieves the names of remote devices each time the discovery process takes place By default the user cache is enabled This means that the names of devices found during one round of discovery are stored in your handheld s user cache The next time your handheld discovers a device that is listed in the user cache the device name appears very quickly Using cached names saves time because it eliminates the extra step of retrieving a name remotely Disabling this feature is useful only if the name of a remote device has changed because it forces your handheld to retrieve the new device name To disable the user cache 1 From the Bluetooth Preferences screen tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Disable device name cache from the Options menu Making Bluetooth connections There are several ways you can make Bluetooth connections The method you use determines the types of devices your handh
396. ow Tap to read M Angela Yee 12 l these are funny M Joe Sadusky 12 07p lunch meeting today Micki Hickox 11 41a review comments 88 Travis Washingt 12 08p FW Revised Instructions for U Nen cermai Ospa Alternately you can use the navigator for one hand message viewing To read a message using the navigator 1 Press Select on the navigator to highlight the first message displayed on the screen and then press Up or Down to scroll one message at a time to the message you want to read 2 Press Select to open the message 3 After reading the message press Select to close the message If you chose to get messages by subjects only tap the More button M to view the body of the e mail message plus any attachments up to the maximum message size you select If the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size only a partial message is displayed Tap the More button to view the entire message See Getting e mail by subject or getting the entire message earlier in this chapter If you chose to get entire messages the body of the e mail message is displayed However if the downloaded message exceeds your maximum message size only a partial message is displayed Tap the More button to view the entire message 4 1of10 gt El From Joe Sadusky lt jms510 hotmail com gt Subj for your review see attached Join the world s largest e mail service with MSN Hotmail
397. ower on setting 1 From the General Preferences list select Power 2 Tap the check box Power on when opened to deselect it 3 Tap Done To change the power off setting 1 From the General Preferences list select Power 2 Tap the check box Power off when closed to select it 3 Tap Done Sounds amp Alerts Preferences You can choose from three Sound amp Alert profiles Custom Configure this profile with your own personal settings Silent Select this profile to use the vibrate and indicator light alerts without sound All Off Select this profile to turn off all sounds and alerts TIP When you connect a headset to your handheld the external speaker is automatically silenced the Sounds amp Alerts settings are maintained and all volume levels are automatically adjusted for use with a headset To select a profile 1 From the General Preferences list select Sound amp Alerts 2 Tap the Custom Silent or All Off profile box TIP You can also press Right or Left on the navigator to select a profile box Preferences Sounds amp Alerts Custom silent aiot H Profile boxes System Sound v High Game Sound v High Alarm Sound v High Alarm LED On Alarm Vibrate v Off 3 Tap Done 386 Setting General Preferences System Sound Game Sound and Alarm Sound settings Your handheld uses a variety of sounds The System Sound Game Sound and Alarm Sound settings enable you to turn t
398. p o X these ar Travis 12 08p MA lunch meet Joe Sadu 12 07p 11 41a 10 55a 11 36p 11 02p 10 33p lo i 4 54p i 2 48p l en 4 Tap the folders pick list and select a destination folder EEE 2 18 Inbox EEE 2 18 Inbox v Inbox M review c Angela 12 09p o B these ar Travis 12 O8p WM lunch meet Joe Sadu 12 07p lo out of of Joe Sad 12 10p 4 o TEASED kad cki Hic 11 41a lo ayne H 10 55a nkeSOF 11 36p lo arch R 11 02p inna M 10 33p Edit Folders vong Li 4 54p Me Bluetoo Kwong Li 2 48p New GetMail_ Display 5 Tap OK 227 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Creating and editing mail folders You can also create new folders so that you can store e mail messages by subject person or project The VersaMail application has certain existing folders such as Inbox Outbox Drafts and Trash The procedure for creating and editing folders varies slightly between POP and IMAP e mail accounts as described in the following procedure To create and edit e mail folders 1 Tap the folders pick list in the upper right corner of the screen and then tap Edit Folders 2 On the Edit Folders or Edit IMAP Folders screen select any of the following POP accounts IMAP accounts Edit Folders i Edit IMAP Folders i To create a new
399. p Advanced Sync Options Configure your incoming mail server settings E Handheld Settings Account Information Incoming Mail Server mail speakeasy net Soren Solas Port Number mo Server Settings Speakeasy Attachment Conversion T My incoming mail server requires authentication to get mail APOP Configure your outgoing mail server settings Outgoing Mail Server mail speakeasy net Port Number 25 I My server requires authentication ESMTP Username Password Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 2 Active Accounts 2 5 If you are using an account that is already configured on your handheld the account information will already be entered If not enter the following NOTE You do not need to fill in these fields if the account is a synchronize only account and the mail client is not Direct POP or Direct IMAP 269 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Incoming Mail Server Incoming Mail Server Port Number Whether this account requires APOP authentication POP accounts only Outgoing Mail Server Outgoing Mail Server Port Number Whether this account requires ESMTP authentication Enter the name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com The default is 110 for POP and 143 for IMAP servers respectively If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator Selecting this check box
400. p an account in the VersaMail application you are given the option of selecting SSL for incoming mail See Setting up and managing e mail accounts earlier in this chapter for instructions The VersaMail application supports SSL for incoming mail only for example if AT amp T is your e mail service provider you can receive messages over a secure SSL connection You cannot send messages over a secure connection However there is a way that you can make it appear as though messages are being sent over a secure connection To send messages so that they appear to have been sent over a secure connection 1 Set your outgoing mail SMTP server to the correct server for your e mail account See Entering the name of the outgoing and incoming mail server earlier in this chapter for information on entering the outgoing mail server 2 Set the reply to address to an e mail address from an e mail service provider that supports sending messages over a secure connection for example AT amp T See Setting outgoing mail options earlier in this chapter for information on entering a reply to address If you set up an account that uses an SSL connection on Outlook Outlook Express or Eudora then SSL is supported in the Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit when you synchronize with that account as well NOTE You cannot use auto get mail with notification or scheduled sending retry of e mail with accounts that use an SSL connection See Au
401. p track of vendors companies and people involved with each expense m Log miles traveled for a particular date or expense category m Sort your expenses by date or expense type m Send or export your expense information to popular computer applications such as Microsoft Excel or Microsoft Word using Palm Desktop software and HotSync technology on a Windows computer To open Expense 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select the Expense icon amp Expense All 474 Breakfast 4 4 Dinner 4 4 Hotel 474 Mileage mi 4 74 Taxi Business Meals 119 Chapter 10 Using Expense Adding expense items A record in Expense is called an item You can sort your Expense items into categories or add other information that you want to associate with the item To add an expense item 1 Tap New Expense All Expense All MAE Expense type n Cursor of new item Tap New TIP You can also create a new Expense item by writing on the number side of the Graffiti 2 writing area while in the Expense list screen The first number you write begins the amount of your new Expense item 2 Enter the amount of the expense 3 Tap the Expense type pick list and select a type from the list As soon as you select an expense type your handheld saves your entry If you do not select an expense type it does not save the entry Expense All Expense All Expense type 20 00
402. p your messages shorter than 160 characters If a message exceeds 160 characters it is split into multiple messages When the recipient receives the message it is reassembled into a single message provided the recipient s SMS software supports assembling multi part messages To create a message 1 From any SMS list view tap New 2 Tap To sms 0 unread w Inbox New Message ttt Length 0 Tap To e ea Tap New Tap Send Tap Outbox 160 Sending and receiving messages 3 Tap the recipient s name and then tap Add TIP To send a message to someone who isn t in your Address Book enter their mobile phone number on the To line 4 Enter the message text 5 Connect to your phone See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 6 Tap Send to send the message now or tap Outbox to send the message later NOTE Tapping Send does not send any of the other messages in your Outbox It sends only the current message Sending and receiving messages You can send all the messages in your Outbox and retrieve all the new messages from your mobile phone at the same time To send and receive messages at the same time 1 Connect to your phone See Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 2 From any SMS list view tap Send amp Check sms 0 unread w Inbox Tap Send amp Check When the transmission finishes a message appears indicating the
403. parately To use this feature you must first install the appropriate files for your carrier and phone For more information see Chapter 14 To set Phone Preferences 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Phone 2 Tap the Connection pick list Preferences Phone Select the connection for your phone applications Connection v Sony ET68i 3 Select the appropriate connection for your phone If you do not see a connection for your phone see Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 for instructions 4 Tap Test to confirm that the selected driver works properly with your phone 5 Tap Done Setting Personal Preferences The Personal Preferences category enables you to access screens where you can customize the buttons owner information and Graffiti 2 shortcuts on your handheld This section provides details about each of these screens To open the Personal Preferences screens 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the Prefs icon amp 420 Setting Personal Preferences 3 From the Personal Preferences list select the name of the Preferences screen you want to view TIP You can also press Left Right Up and Down on the navigator to highlight O a Preferences screen name and then press Select on the navigator to open that Preferences screen AA o s Formats Graffiti 2 en s Power Sounds amp Alerts Writing Area Communication Bluetooth Connection Network Phone Personal Co
404. patible file type when sending messages from the Palm handheld through the conduit the plug in will convert the outgoing attachment to it s desktop compatible file type The Attachment Conversion form is used to configure plug ins for use during the HotSync operation for all accounts Mail Client Sync Setup Advanced Syne Options Please refer to the documentation supplied by the plug in vendor for more information about each E Handheld Settings Ay t Informati EE i Attachment Conversion Plug In Configuration Attachment Conversion e Microsoft Word doc DataViz Documents To Go Ea Microsoft Excel xls xlt DataViz Documents To Go e Power Point Presentation ppt DataViz Documents To Go Web Page html htm Not Selected TE Adobe Acrobat pdf Not Selected E Compressed File zip Not Selected 4 Sound File wav Not Selected Sf GIF Image cif Not Selected fea Bitmap Image bmp Not Selected ay JPG Image jpeg ipg Not Selected x Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 2 Active Accounts 2 5 Plug in types are listed in the left column If the plug in is selected the right column shows the name of the company supplying the plug in If a plug in is not selected the right column reads Not Selected NOTE The drop down lists in the right column display only the companies currently supplying plug ins for a particular type If more than one company supplies a plug in of a particu
405. plication category 41 Chapter 4 Working with Applications To open an application on your handheld 1 Tap the Home icon oS Bo L z Memo Pad Note Pad ib Link 2 Tap the icon of the application that you want to open If you have many applications installed on your handheld tap the scroll bar to see all your applications Other ways to open applications You can also open applications on your handheld in either of the following ways m Press and hold Select on the navigator to open the Applications Launcher Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight Press Up Down Right and Left on the navigator to highlight the icon of the application you want to open Press Select on the navigator to open the application m Inthe Applications Launcher write the Graffiti 2 character for the first letter of its name The Applications Launcher scrolls to the first application with a name that begins with that letter Opening expansion card applications When an expansion card is properly seated in the expansion card slot your handheld responds based on the contents of the card and the application that is active when you insert the card In some cases the application on the card opens automatically upon insertion or if you insert a card containing data from the current application the application displays the data on the card In other cases the Applications Launcher switches to the card and displays its conten
406. plication that can read the data To open Address Book Press the Address Book application button on the front panel of your handheld Address Book opens to display the list of all your records Address Book button 77 Chapter 5 Using Address Book TIP Press the Address Book application button repeatedly to cycle through the categories in which you have records You can also press and hold the Address Book application button to instantly beam your business card to another device with an IR port The receiving device must also have an application that can read the Address Book data Creating an Address Book entry A record in Address Book is called an entry You can create entries on your handheld or you can use Palm Desktop software or Microsoft Outlook to create entries on your computer and then transfer the entries to your handheld with your next HotSync operation Palm Desktop software also has data import capabilities so that you can load database files into Address Book on your handheld See Importing data in Chapter 3 and Palm Desktop online Help for more information To create a new Address Book entry 1 Press the Address Book application button 22 on the front of your handheld to display the Address list 2 Tap New Cursor at Last Address w All rane Address Edit Abrams Liz 650 454 6121 L Hostname Adams Ben 408 772 1900 First name Beckman Rachel 510 532 074
407. ppears and highlights the first record that begins with Wi m For selected text Drag to highlight the text and then write the Phone Lookup Command stroke L Your handheld replaces the selected text and adds the name and its associated information Looking up names to add to Expense records In Expense Lookup displays the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field You can add these names to a list of attendees associated with an Expense record To add names to an Expense record 1 Tap the Expense record to which you want to add names 2 Tap Details Receipt Details Category w Unfiled Type w Lunch Payment w Unfiled Currency Vendor City Attendees ccoem 62 Performing common tasks 3 Tap Who Attendees Receipt Details Category w Unfilled Foo 2 00 pe Type w Lunch Payment w Mastercard Currency vw f Vendor Rosie s Cafe City Attendees TOR nO eE i t Tap Lookup The Attendees Lookup screen displays all the names in your Address Book that have data in the Company field Select the name you want to add and then tap Add The name appears in the Attendees screen Repeat steps 4 and 5 to add more names Tap Done Tap OK Sorting lists of records You can sort lists of records in various ways depending on the application Sorting is available in applications that have list screens Address Book To Do List Note
408. pplications 9 Close the Conduit Settings window 10 Perform a HotSync operation 447 Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld 448 Frequently Asked Questions If you encounter a problem with your handheld do not call Technical Support until you have reviewed the frequently asked questions in this appendix and you have also reviewed the following m The readme file located in the folder where you installed the Palm Desktop software on your Windows computer or on your installation CD for Mac users a The Palm Desktop online Help m The Palm Desktop software for the Macintosh User s Guide located in the Documentation folder on your installation CD m The Palm Knowledge Library accessible at www palm com intl in the Support section a The most recent Palm Tungsten T2 handheld HelpNotes on your regional web site If you are still having problems contact Technical Support or go to www palm com support globalsuppoort NOTE Palm works with developers of third party add on applications to ensure the compatibility of these applications with your new Palm handheld Some third party applications however may not have been upgraded to be compatible with your new Palm handheld If you suspect that a third party application is adversely affecting the operation of your handheld contact the developer of the application 449 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions Software installation problems Problem Th
409. pt Details Category w Unfiled Type w Lunch Payment w Unfiled Currency Vendor OE Caneel Dae g 3 Select any of the following options Category Opens a pick list of system and user defined categories See Categorizing records in Chapter 4 for more information Type Opens a pick list of expense types 121 Chapter 10 Using Expense Payment Currency Vendor and City Attendees 4 Tap OK Enables you to choose the payment method for the Expense item If the item is prepaid such as airline tickets supplied by your company you can choose Prepaid to place your expense in the appropriate company paid cell of your printed expense report Enables you to choose the type of currency used to pay the Expense item The default currency unit is defined in the Preferences dialog box You can also display up to four other common types of currency See Customizing the Currency pick list later in this chapter for more information Enables you to record the name of the vendor usually a company associated with the expense and the city where the expense was incurred For example a business lunch might be at Rosie s Cafe in San Francisco See Looking up names to add to Expense records in Chapter 4 for more information Customizing the Currency pick list You can select the currencies and symbols that appear in the Currency pick list To customize the Currency pick list 1 Tap the C
410. ptions i Saat v Descend Sender Date ax Size Unread Black Read Black 3 Tap Descend or Ascend to change the sort order Display Options ti Sort by v Subject Show v 2line vie Descend M Date O Size Unread Black Read Black 4 Tap OK To select a one line or two line view 1 Tap Display 2 Tap the Show pick list and then tap the view you want Display Options i Sort by w Subject v Descend Show 1 line view 2 line view O Size Font j Unread v Black Read v Black 3 Tap OK 221 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To display or hide a column in a folder s list view 1 Tap Display 2 Tap the check box for each column that you want to show The column options will change depending on whether you choose a one line or a two line view Display Options i Sort by v Date v Descend Show v 1 line view M Date O Size M Subject Unread Black Read Black NOTE If you select Date the Date column displays the message time for any messages received today that is any message received after 12 01 A M Otherwise the Date column shows the date the message was received 3 Tap OK To change the font 1 Tap Display 2 Tap in the Font field Display Options ti Sort by v Date v Descend Show v 2line view O Date O Size Font i in Tap here Unread Black Read Black 3 Tap the Font pick list and se
411. ptions in dialog boxes m Open the onscreen keyboards Just as you can drag the mouse to select text or move objects on your computer you can drag the stylus to select text You can also use the stylus to drag the slider of any scroll bar 17 Chapter 2 Exploring Your Handheld Elements of the handheld interface There are many common elements in the handheld interface These elements are described in this section EEZ Edit Options Menu New Memo bar Delete Memo Beam Memo Menu bar Use the menu bar to access a set of application specific commands Not all applications have a menu bar Icons Tap the icons to open applications menus and a favorite application and to find text anywhere in your data 9 See Opening applications Using menus and Finding information in Chapter 4 and see Buttons Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information about using these icons Brightness control Tap the Brightness icon to open the Adjust Brightness dialog box See Adjusting screen brightness earlier in this chapter for instructions on adjusting the brightness Clock Tap the Clock icon to display the current time and date The display closes automatically after two seconds ABC With the cursor in an input field tap ABC to activate the alphabetic keyboard 123 With the cursor in an input field tap 123 to activate the numeric keyboard 18 T
412. quire an infrared device attached to a physical COM port Laptops are likely to have a built in IR port so no external device is necessary m Your computer must have an installed infrared driver m If you have an external infrared device attached to your computer a driver is probably included with the device Consult the documentation included with the device for information on installing the required driver Check your computer s documentation to learn if the computer supports infrared communication To configure HotSync Manager for infrared communication on a Windows computer m Click the HotSync Manager icon in the Windows system tray and make sure that Infrared is selected If you have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu and that option is selected skip to Performing an IR HotSync operation If you do not have an Infrared option on the HotSync Manager menu complete the following steps a b c e Make sure that Local Serial is selected on the menu From the HotSync Manager menu select Setup Click the Local tab In the Serial Port drop down box select the simulated port that your computer uses for infrared communication General Local Modem Network Serial Port COM4 v Speed SRR ieee See the documentation for your operating system for instructions on finding the simulated port This information is usually located in the Control Panel Click OK
413. r s mail server are downloaded to your Inbox including messages you have already read To get all mail including mail you have already read and not just unread mail deselect Get unread mail ONLY To delete messages on your provider s mail server when they are deleted in the VersaMail application select the Delete messages on the server when they are deleted in VersaMail check box To get e mail on your handheld but also leave it on the server so you can view it later on your desktop select the Leave mail on server check box For example if you create an account to receive e mail from your Yahoo account and select this option your old Yahoo e mail is still visible the next time you visit Yahoo com to access your Yahoo e mail Inbox The port number setting defaults to 110 for POP and to 143 for IMAP servers respectively You may need to change the port number if you choose to retrieve incoming mail over a secure connection see the next bullet item If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator To retrieve incoming mail over a secure Secure Sockets Layer or SSL connection select the Use Secure Connection check box See Using Secure Sockets Layer SSL later in this chapter for information on SSL To limit the maximum size of an incoming e mail message enter the size in kilobytes KB for Maximum Message Size The maximum size of an incoming message is 5KB by default bu
414. r VersaMail Preferences this check box is selected The selected messages move to the Trash folder and are deleted from your handheld when you empty the trash If you set the preference to automatically empty the trash the messages are deleted when the trash is emptied By default 252 Getting sending and managing e mail the trash auto empties all deleted e mail older than one week See Emptying the trash later in this chapter for more information IMPORTANT If you delete a message on the server you cannot retrieve it and view it again later To delete messages before a certain date 1 Tap the Menu icon and then select Delete Old from the Message menu AGTET Options Accounts Select All Deselect All New Message Get Message Move To Mark Read Mark Unread Delete Old Empty Trash 2 Tap the Folder pick list and select the folder that contains the messages you want to delete Delete Old Messages Delete all messages in the Folder Older than aae Displays the current Drafts 3 folder for deleting Sent Favorites messages 3 Tap the Older than pick list and then tap One Week One Month or Choose Date Delete Old Messages Delete all messages in the Folder inbox Older than eins Choose Date 253 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software If you tap Choose Date you can select a date from the calendar Choose Date 4 200
415. rc This is a Palm OS application that you can install and run on your handheld PDB pdb This is a file that works with specific Palm OS applications Among the types of attachments you can receive are the following handheld application files m Address Book entries m Date Book appointments m To Do list items m Text memos You can also save downloaded files to an expansion card See Saving attachments to an expansion card later in this chapter for information NOTE The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total including attachments If the attachment is too large it cannot be downloaded to the handheld 242 Getting sending and managing e mail To download an attachment 1 In the Inbox tap the message with the attachment A paper clip icon appears on the message s icon if the message has an attachment that has been downloaded Speakeas 3 22 v Inbox M Joe Sadusky 12 10p F out of office tomorrow Paper clip icon M Angela Yee 12 09p fn review comments indicates ________e8 Travis Washingt 12 08p downloaded these are funny attachment M1 Joe Sadusky 12 07p lunch meeting today lo M Micki Hickox 11 41a FW Revised Instructions for U ew GetMail_ Display If you choose to get messages by subject only you must tap More for each downloaded message in order to view the body of the e mail message plus any attachments up to the
416. re NOTE Most dial in servers do not accept spaces in the user name 4 Tap Done Entering a password The Password box identifies the password you use to log into your server or ISP Your entry in this field determines whether your handheld prompts you to enter a password each time you log into your network m Ifyou do not enter a password your handheld displays the word Prompt in this field and asks you to enter a password during the login procedure If you are concerned about security select the Prompt option m If you enter a password your handheld displays the word Assigned in this field and does not prompt you to enter a password during the login procedure To enter a password 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Network 2 Tap the Password field 3 Enter the password you use to log into your server Preferences Network v Service My ISP User Name mynetname 4 Tap OK Enter password here Password Enter a password _ Tap here If you do not assign a password you will be asked for one when you connect The word Assigned appears in the Password field 5 Tap Done 406 Setting Communication Preferences Selecting a connection Use the Connection setting to select the method you want to use to connect to your ISP or to a dial in server See Connection Preferences earlier in this chapter for information about creating and co
417. re described here See Using menus in Chapter 4 for information about selecting menu commands Message menu DERT Edit Options CERT Options Archive 1 Send Ss Draft lt D Check H 7 Empty Trash E Message view List view Send Sends all messages in the Outbox Check Retrieves all messages stored on the phone Empty Trash Permanently removes all messages in the Trash category from your handheld Archive Moves the current message to the Archive category 169 Chapter 15 Using SMS Options menu Message Edit Cy Phone Lookup Font Preferences Options BS Font F Preferences R About SMS Add signature About SMS List view New Message view Phone Lookup Opens the Phone Lookup dialog box where you can select a mobile phone number where you want to send a message Font Opens the Font dialog box where you can choose different fonts for the list and message views About SMS Shows version information for the SMS application 170 Using To Do List 4 To Do List is a convenient place to create reminders and prioritize the things you need to do Use To Do List for the following Make a quick and convenient list of things to do Assign a priority level to each task Assign a due date for any or all of your To Do List items Assign To Do List items to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups Sort your To Do List items by due date priority
418. references Connection Available Connections Palm Modem US Canada IR to a PC Handheld Infrared to GSM Phone Serial to GSM Phone BT to Sony E T68i 3 Tap Edit 399 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 4 Tap Details Edit Connection i Details Name Infrared to GSM Speed v 19 200 bps Phone Connect to v Phone Via Infrared Init String EOV1 CMEE 1 CSCS GSM CMGF 9 Model Standard GSM 5 Tap the Speed pick list and select the appropriate speed 6 Enter the initialization string supplied by the documentation for the modem in your mobile phone if necessary 7 Tap OK 8 Tap OK again to save the configuration After you create the configuration you need to set up the HotSync Manager of your Desktop application and the HotSync application of your handheld to perform a modem HotSync operation Creating Bluetooth connections You can use the Connection Preferences screen to create connections to the following types of Bluetooth devices m GSM mobile phones See Connecting to non GSM phones later in this chapter for information on connecting to other mobile phones TIP For Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phones use Phone Link to quickly establish a connection with a Bluetooth GSM phone For more information see Chapter 14 Computers m LAN access points m High speed wireless data networks such as a General Packet Radio Service GPRS network
419. rences s i106 ki Gece biveeseeieleeie ei i 425 Locking your handheld 2 acctit hn404 4 ete ent eden teens oid 429 Recovering from a forgotten password 0 00000 c cece eee 432 Making records private covekwncw deren rear se uae Rene rensat ion irs 433 ShortCuts Preferences so sna os eee eke ed ed na eee eee 440 Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld 443 Carine for your handheld c2 stci lt cvedes tuvedoscedevds eeveedeunew wes 443 Prolonging battery fle cc4 civ wes oye Penh Sia Pee cee Pes 444 Resetting your handheld sn indestne hc dante eeais fe ceere rreren 444 xii Contents P rforming 4 Stl reset sole acnvenevs ane oes vee ceded ded esse 445 Performing a hard resets costae tic te vei tseusts saree sere ves 445 Appendix B Frequently Asked Questions 00000005 449 Software installation problems 4 lt 22c sess ekce ete Shee ees ote esi ets 450 Operating problems woceceycrednes irekita naea pe Gey aseh ay es DE a 451 Tapping and writing problems 615 eee diese eee eed ee cow ede ewer es 4 452 Application problems a3 i2 4 8 sensi eS orc ee Rs etek beeen See 453 HotSync problems ii erdo x cde vee bbe tioa niri hoes teeter tbs seerti ees 454 Beaming and sending problems ccc cence ede vente cere ceed eee eet ees 461 Phone connection problems stu iww igkvewe FAW we eee eeD hen een Nas 462 VersaMail probl MS sisse wete cestri c mnie mete bene rekon eRe 463 Recharging problems s
420. rform a HotSync operation were not installed This can happen if your handheld is too full to install the file or if the file type was not recognized during the HotSync operation If files are unrecognized try launching the associated application from your handheld and then performing another HotSync operation If the files still remain in the list they are not associated with an application on your handheld and cannot be installed Expansion cards may also hold files that are not Palm application files To drag and drop applications or files onto the Palm Quick Install window 1 Copy or download the application s or file s you want to install onto your computer 2 Double click the Palm Quick Install icon on the Windows desktop Handheld file list 4 Palm Quick Install File Edt View Help Type QMukiMail pre 489 79 KB Pam Application Palm Reader pre 220 67 KB Pakn Application QPhotoCapture pre 44 32 KB Palm Application Photos pee 200 89KB Palm Application Pihefictionvnitersgui 382KB Paln Database Size Type 60 28KB JPG File 358MB MP3 Format Sound 282 30KB JPG File ey 625 78KB JPG File 222MB MP3 Format Sound x 1 Rem 71 17 KB Expansion card file list Status bar 3 From My Computer or Windows Explorer select the file s or folder that you want to install 70 Installing and removing applications 4 Drag and drop the file s or folder onto the ha
421. rk name Category Unfiled Tap here to choose a category URL http waw i Tap here to change the URL 3 Tap Save Visiting a bookmarked page Use your list of bookmarks to visit a particular page again 329 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro To visit a bookmarked page D 2 Press Select on the navigator Bookmarks i Press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the list of bookmarks and then press Select to visit the bookmarked page you ve chosen Editing information about a bookmark You can edit the name and URL of a bookmark and change its category To edit information about a bookmark com Press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the list of bookmarks to Press Select on the navigator the bookmark you want to edit Tap Edit Edit the bookmark Tap the Name field and then enter a new name Tap the URL box to change the address Tap the Category pick list to change the category or to create a new category Tap Save A confirmation dialog box appears Tap Yes to confirm your changes Tap Done Deleting a bookmark You can delete bookmarks that you no longer want To delete a bookmark 8 Press Select on the navigator Press Up and Down on the navigator to scroll through the list of bookmarks to the bookmark you want to delete 330 Saving pages 3 Tap Delete A confirmation dialog box appears 4 Tap OK 5 Tap
422. rmation on connecting your handheld to your mobile phone see Setting up a phone connection in Chapter 14 111 Chapter 9 Using Palm Dialer Dialing a number Palm Dialer allows you to directly dial a number from your handheld To dial a number 1 Tap the telephone number on the keypad TIP You can also enter the telephone number using your onscreen keyboard or Graffiti 2 writing Digits display in the numeric display Enter phone number and tap Dial Tap Clear to delete digit from numeric display Tap and hold to clear entire numeric display Tap and hold the 0 key to add a plus to the number sequence 2 Tap Dial The number is dialed and added to the Call History list You are now ready to communicate over your mobile phone Redialing the most recently dialed number You can quickly redial the most recently dialed number from the Dialer screen To redial the most recently dialed number 1 Tap Dial when the numeric display is empty Numeric display is empty Tap Dial 112 Using speed dial 2 Tap Dial again The number is dialed and added to the Call History list You are now ready to communicate over your mobile phone The most recently dialed displays Tap Dial Using speed dial Speed dialing allows you to quickly dial your most commonly used numbers You can enter up to 10 numbers into the Speed Dial screen Adding a speed dial entry To
423. rnet launch a web browser application To make a cable connection 1 2 3 Connect the cable to your handheld and mobile phone Turn on your handheld and your mobile phone Launch the application that requires the phone connection For example to access the Internet launch a web browser application To make a Bluetooth connection 1 2 3 Turn on your handheld and your mobile phone Activate Bluetooth on your handheld and phone Make sure your phone is within 10 meters approximately 30 feet of your handheld Launch the application that requires the phone connection For example to access the Internet launch Palm Web Browser Pro 158 Using SMS SMS enables you to send and receive short text messages using your handheld and a Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phone SMS allows you to do the following m Create SMS messages using Graffiti 2 characters or the onscreen keyboard on your handheld rather than your mobile phone keypad m Send and receive SMS messages m Receive records associated with other applications such as Date Book events Memo Pad memos and so forth You can add such records to the associated application or view the information as a text message IMPORTANT Your mobile phone plan must be a GSM phone and must include the ability to send and receive SMS messages in order to use SMS To open SMS 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Tap the pick list in the upper r
424. rns you to the Message screen Downloading large attachments Downloading and viewing a message with a single attachment that exceeds your maximum message size or a message with multiple attachments whose total size exceeds your maximum message size requires some extra steps To determine if a message has an attachment or multiple attachments that exceed the maximum message size m Inthe Inbox tap the message title 4 ioftd gt E From Joe Sadusky a lt jms510 hotmail com gt Subj for your review see attached Join the world s largest e mail service with MSN Hotmail http as hotmailcom More button indicates that message vi Done Reply Fwd Delete H plus any attachments exceeds maximum message size If the message plus attachments exceeds the maximum message size the More button appears on the Message screen In the case of multiple attachments if some of the attachments were downloaded completely you see both the red paper clip icon indicating fully downloaded attachments and the More button indicating incompletely downloaded attachments To download a single attachment that exceeds the maximum message size 1 Tap the More button 4 1of10 gt El From Joe Sadusky a lt jms510 hotmail com gt Subj for your review see attached Join the world s largest e mail service with MSN Hotmail http www hotmail com v Done Tap More 245 Chapter
425. rom your Windows computer 1 If you are establishing a Bluetooth connection with a phone you must first turn on Bluetooth communication and turn on the Discoverable setting on your handheld See Bluetooth Preferences in Chapter 22 for instructions 2 From the Windows Start menu select Programs select Palm Desktop and then click Phone Link Updater 156 Using phone connections 3 Follow the instructions on the screen and click Next and Back to navigate between the screens as you do the following a Download phone driver updates from the Internet b Select your phone s manufacturer and model If your phone is not listed you cannot create a connection to your phone at this time try running Phone Link Updater again at a later date to see if anew driver is available c Select the region where you are located d Select your mobile phone carrier service e Select your handheld s user name 4 When prompted perform a HotSync operation After the HotSync operation is complete the phone files are now installed on your handheld 5 Click Finish If you need additional information about connecting your phone refer to the Phone Pairing at www palm com support globalsupport To install the phone files from your Mac computer 1 If you are establishing a Bluetooth connection with a phone you must first turn on Bluetooth communication and turn on the Discoverable setting on your handheld See Bluetooth Pref
426. ront panel buttons In general treat your handheld as you would a pocket calculator or other small electronic instrument Take care not to drop your handheld or subject it to any strong impact Do not carry your handheld in your back pocket if you sit on it you may damage it Protect your handheld from temperature extremes For example do not leave your handheld on the dashboard of a car on a hot day or on a day when temperatures are below freezing and keep it away from heaters and other heat sources Do not store or use your handheld in any location that is extremely dusty damp or wet Use a soft damp cloth to clean your handheld If the surface of the handheld screen becomes soiled clean it with a soft cloth moistened with a diluted window cleaning solution 443 Appendix A Maintaining Your Handheld Prolonging battery life Note the following considerations for the battery in your handheld Under normal conditions your handheld battery should remain charged when you place it in the cradle cable for just a few minutes each day You can conserve battery life by doing any of the following Reduce the brightness of the screen display See Adjusting screen brightness in Chapter 2 for more information Change the Auto off setting that automatically turns the handheld off after a period of inactivity See Auto off after in Chapter 22 for more information Turn off the Bluetooth feature when yo
427. rs with accent marks first write the letter stroke on the left side or aligned with the division marks for uppercase letters of the Graffiti 2 writing area Then quickly write the accent stroke on the right side of the Graffiti 2 writing area For example the following diagram shows the strokes required to draw an accented or F Q 123 You can use the following accent strokes in combination with Graffiti 2 letters Draw accents on RIGHT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Accent Stroke Accent Stroke Acute Dieresis mn F Grave Circumflex a Tilde Ring i N O Using these accent strokes you can write the following accented letters 2 A xom N aadaaadaae e iiiioddddouutuyyn Symbols and other special characters You can write symbols and other special characters using the Punctuation Shift stroke NOTE You can also use the Punctuation Shift stroke to write punctuation marks To write symbols and special characters 1 Enter the Punctuation Shift stroke Punctuation Shift 30 Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data When Punctuation Shift is active an up arrow symbol appears in the lower right corner of the handheld screen If you accidentally activate Punctuation Shift another Punctuation Shift stroke will cancel it t Punctuation Shift indicator NOTE Drawing two Punctuation Shift strokes also cancels the
428. rt the Note Pad Voice Memo or Memo list manually tap and drag a note voice memo or memo to a new location in the list To make the list appear in Palm Desktop software as you manually sorted it on your handheld open the application in Palm Desktop software and click Sort by Then select Order on Handheld 64 Performing common tasks Attaching notes In Address Book Date Book To Do List Palm Photos and Expense you can attach a note to a record A note can be up to several thousand characters long For example for an appointment in Date Book you can attach a note with directions to the location To attach a note to a record 1 Display the entry to which you want to add a note To display an entry tap it or press Up or Down on the navigator to highlight it and then press Select on the navigator 2 In Address Book only Tap Edit 3 Tap Details 4 Tap Note 5 Enter your note 6 Tap Done A small note icon appears at the right side of any item that has a note Note icon To review or edit a note m Tap the Note icon D TIP In Date Book you can also highlight the event that contains the note press Select on the navigator to open the note and then press Select on the navigator again to close the note To delete a note 1 Tap the Note icon D 2 Tap Delete 3 Tap Yes 65 Chapter 4 Working with Applications Choosing fonts In many applications you can change the font style to
429. rver requires authentication ESMTP Username Username and Password fields appear only if Sami ates ESMTP check box is selected Password i j 4 Tap OK twice Adding APOP to an account To encrypt your username and password when they are traveling over the network some services require APOP to work properly while others do not work properly if APOP is used If you aren t sure if your ISP or web e mail provider supports APOP check with your e mail provider NOTE APOP works only with accounts that use the POP protocol 291 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To edit an account and add APOP 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options 3 Select Mail Servers CREE Accounts Preferences R Display Options Notification Auto Get Mail Filters Disconnect About VersaMail 4 Tap the Account pick list and select Edit Accounts Mail Servers i Account v FEMRE Sam IMAP Protocol w 25 Syne All e mail accounts Username Speakeasy appear in the list Edit Accounts Password ji O Always connect using 5 Tap the name of the account you want to change and then tap OK 6 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 7 Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Incoming Mail Servers i Options Address Servers X Get A Incoming Mail BS Gesunre Outgoing Mail Max Messag advanced Incoming X Lea
430. ry power to turn it on By default the Owner Preferences screen contains the information that you supplied when you installed the Palm Desktop software and set up your handheld If you use Security Preferences to turn off and lock your handheld with a password the first three lines that you entered in the Owner Preferences appear the next time you turn on your handheld See Security Preferences earlier in this chapter for additional information 424 Setting Personal Preferences To customize the Owner Preferences 1 2 3 From the Personal Preferences list select Owner Modify or enter the text that you want to associate with your handheld If you enter more text than can fit on one screen a scroll bar automatically appears on the right side of the screen Preferences Owner This handheld computer is owned by Midyne Spear Creative Spearit Bonny Doon CA 831 555 1212 If found please contact me If you assign a password using Security Preferences the information on the Owner Preferences screen cannot be changed In this case an Unlock button appears at the bottom of the screen Tap Done To unlock the Owner Preferences screen 1 2 3 4 5 From the Personal Preferences list select Owner Tap Unlock Enter the password that you defined in Security Preferences Tap OK Tap Done Security Preferences Your handheld comes with a security feature so that unauthorized users can
431. s a unique user name when the new user performs his or her first local HotSync operation For example suppose a sales organization wants to distribute two dozen handhelds that all have acommon company phone list a set of memos and several key applications A user profile can be created to install the common data before the handhelds are distributed to the employees who will use them Then when the employees perform their first HotSync operation the common data becomes part of their individual data file NOTE The handhelds that are synchronized with a user profile must be either new ones that have never been synchronized or handhelds that have had their user names and data removed by a hard reset To create a user profile on a Windows computer 1 Open Palm Desktop software 2 From the Tools menu select Users 3 Click Profiles 4 Click New Select a profile 376 Creating a user profile 5 Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK New Profile x Enter a new profile name cae 6 Repeat steps 3 and 4 for each profile that you want to create and then click OK to return to Palm Desktop software 7 Select the profile from the User list and create the data for the profile such as a company phone list and so on User Tech Support profile ha l Th F Midyne 5 6 ech Support profile nN 2 8 Edit Users To create a user profile on a Mac computer 1 Open Palm De
432. s to Sands and selecting sm scrolls further to Smith If you sort the list by company name the Quick Look Up feature scrolls to the matches for the company name 5 Repeat steps 3 and 4 until the entry you want appears in the list 6 Press Select on the navigator to highlight the record you want 7 Press Select on the navigator to view the contents of the selected record TIP Ifthere is only one possible match for the letters you selected the contents of the record automatically display 59 Chapter 4 Working with Applications To look up an Address Book record with the stylus 1 From the Address list screen enter the first letter of the name you want to find Address v All anzi Arthur 415 555 7775 W Mosich Donn donna example c Nguyen Mai 555 3434W Plasterer Michael 831 555 3792M Spear Midyne 831 555 7534M Venkat Raja raja anyisp com Weiss Chris 555 2367 W Weston Michelle 555 6338 W Look TR Look Up line The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter If you write another letter the list scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters For example writing an s scrolls to Sands and writing sm scrolls further to Smith If you sort the list by company name the Look Up feature scrolls to the first letter of the company name 2 Tap the record to view its contents Using Find You can use Find to locate any text that you specify
433. schuwing Bij dit produkt zijn batterijen geleverd Wanneer deze leeg zijn moet u ze niet weggooien maar inleveren als KCA Uwaga Nie kroi lub przekluwa baterii ani nie wrzuca ich do ognia Mog si rozerwa lub wybuchn wydzielaj c truj ce rodki chemiczne Zu ytych baterii nale y pozbywa sie w spos b opisany przez producenta i zgodnie z miejscowymi przepisami NNN NND XD AMI ADDN NX Y9 NN OX Myyignn NIDY K 7 NLN DXN ANT I ANT IIIA ND9IDN NX Yonnsd Ww NSA mann DNNN MyMwn MIND TIYDI wr 470 A ABA See Address Book archive files Accented characters Graffiti 2 writing 30 Account See E mail account Add Remove Programs icon 76 Add on applications 68 75 Address Book If Found Call entry 79 adding custom fields 85 adding e mail address from 231 adding entry from e mail 258 259 archive files aba 38 business card for beaming 34 categorizing records 55 conduit for synchronizing 354 creating records 50 deleting records 52 displaying category 85 displaying data in the Address list 80 finding records 20 60 fonts 66 menus 83 notes for records 65 opening 77 overview 77 private records 435 sorting records 63 using to address e mail 231 Addressing e mail displaying another address 187 194 201 290 message 230 233 using Smart Addressing 232 Addressing SMS messages 160 Advanced VersaMail preferences 255 Agenda Date Book view 106 Alarm indicator light 13 LED 13 3
434. se fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a password and then tap OK Mail Servers i Options v Advanced Outgoing Port Number 25 M My server requires authentication ESMTP Username g SamYahoo Username and Password fields appear only if Password i ESMTP check box is selected 9 Tap OK Setting advanced account preferences You can set advanced preferences for each e mail account Any preferences you set are account specific they apply only to the account you are currently in To set advanced account preferences 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options 3 Select Preferences 294 Going beyond the basics 4 Tap Advanced Preferences i General Advanced System Enable Smart Addressing Auto Empty Mail from Trash v Older Than 1 Week Timeout 45 secs O Auto Disconnect amp Disconnect on Exit Modem Wait 0 secs 5 Select any of the following preferences Enable Smart Addressing Auto Empty Mail from Trash Timeout Auto Disconnect
435. sed ate or OENE rE Ep ei eee eee 52 P roing records isha adoe Seed Cheater pels ee eee ee ee 54 Categ ri i g TECOIIS seso srs iets kaw dade ees tebe edge Berean aes 55 Findine MOMMA OR x caved ve eee eee eee ee ee ee eee EEA ces 58 Contents Sorting lists OF records viva eeu ieee eday eee whee bed ews Ceased 63 Attaching NOLES er crosat seals niur ak eked EAEE reeset eens een i 65 Choosing fonts sre eroro riroraa rE EEO EErEE REO EREE 66 R ceiving alerts parsi renak ana aaae in a Ro EEE RAEE KODA RAAE E KEPE EAE 67 Hiding or masking private records 4 4 242 Ke nies cba Peso tea wew 68 Installing and removing applications sunar cece cece eee 68 Installing files and add on applications 0 0 00 cece eee 68 Installing applications and files on a Windows computer 69 Palpi Quick Install ips icc ssri enuiar ah Peed Ree eee eee ee 72 Installing applications and files on a Mac computer 73 Removing applications sclarcopvaenvelehed Can ee eee eee Mee eee eeees 75 Removing Palm Desktop software 0 e ccc cece eee 75 Chapter 5 Using Address Book 000 ee eee eee eeeeee 77 Creating an Address Book entry lt 2 2 2 c0i298 Hie hs Se es 78 Selecting types of phone numbers 2 56 sahceg nie eneee tebarenie eaves 79 Changing Address Entry details lt i 105 lt c0005 4 xcandeeecseieheraw as 80 Making connections from Address Book 000 e eee
436. ser and any nearby persons during continuous and extended data transmission The users of this device should ensure that the operation of this device is in compliance with these provisions Canadian IC Notice Certification No 3905 550007A To prevent radio interference to the licensed service this device is intended to be operated indoors and away from windows to provide maximum shielding Equipment that is installed outdoors is subject to licensing Canadian ICES 003 Statement This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regulations Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Canada FAA Statement Whenever you use the wireless features of your handheld please observe the guidelines or prohibitions on the use of wireless devices in your current location For example when you are on an airplane do not use the Bluetooth communication features of your handheld at times when government or airline regulations prohibit the use of cellular phones You can of course use all other applications on your handheld in accordance with airline regulations for electronic devices Electrical Transmission Statement This product has been certified as conforming to technological standards for a wireless device as a small electrical data transmission under electrical transmission law Therefore you do not need a license
437. server for example your corporate network or your ISP A login script is associated with a specific network service profile created in Network Preferences A login script is something that you are likely to receive from your system administrator if your company has a system in which you log in to the corporate servers from your handheld using a modem or network connection The script is generally prepared by the system administrator and distributed to users who need it It automates the events that must take place to establish a connection between your handheld and the corporate servers You can create login scripts in two ways m Ina text editor on your desktop computer in which you create a file with the extension PNC which you then install on your handheld using the Install Tool This method is not available to Mac computer users m Inthe Login Script dialog box on your handheld accessed from the Details dialog box in Network Preferences Login Script i w Send CR w Wait For Host Name w Send User ID w Send CR w Wait For Password Send Password 7E Tap here to see the list of available commands NOTE You can also use non ASCII and literal characters in your login script Creating a login script on your handheld You can create login scripts by selecting commands from the Command pick list in the Login Script dialog box Some commands such as Send require you to supply additional information Those commands have
438. set additional outgoing mail options 1 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 2 Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing Mail Servers ti Options Address Servers Port Number Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail Advanced Incoming O My serve E etree irre authentication ESM IF 290 Going beyond the basics 3 Set additional options for outgoing e mail Port Number The default is 25 the port number most SMTP servers use If you are not sure about the correct port number check with your mail server administrator My server requires Select the My server requires authentication ESMTP check SMe box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option See Adding ESMTP to an account later in this chapter for information If you select this option username and password fields appear These fields are prepopulated based on the account information you entered previously In most cases the prepopulated information is correct however occasionally your authentication username and or password is different from your account username or password Check with your e mail service provider for authentication username and password information If you need to enter new information enter a username and or tap the Password box and enter a password and then tap OK Mail Servers i Options v Advanced Outgoing Port Number 25 M My se
439. sing the optional serial cradle cable the cradle attaches to a serial COM port of your computer 398 Setting Communication Preferences Modem to Universal connector A cable connection between your handheld s universal connector and a modem for dialing in to a modem that is part of your computer or laptop PC to Infrared A connection between the IR port of your handheld and the infrared device of your computer or laptop handheld and a modem The modem can be attached to or within a mobile phone or other device containing an IR port Some IR phones contain modems TODD 99 nooo 000000 Modem to Infrared A connection between the IR port of your Editing connections The following example shows you how to edit the IR to GSM Phone connection to adjust the communication speed you can similarly edit other connections or settings or create a custom connection You can use the IR to GSM Phone connection to perform a remote IR HotSync operation To accomplish the HotSync operation your handheld sends data through its IR port to a modem within your mobile phone which then dials a modem attached to or within your desktop computer to synchronize with your Desktop application To edit the IR to Phone connection 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Connection 2 Select the IR to GSM Phone connection P
440. sk Private Records Hide Private Records Done Automatic Help Select Automatic 436 Setting Personal Preferences 2 Tap the Automatically pick list and select either Mask Private Records or Hide Public Records Security Options Options w Private Records Automatically Hide Private Records A Mask Private Records Select to mask or hide records Tap box 3 Tap When box 4 Select At a preset time and then use the arrows to set the time Mask Records Automatically mask records On power off At a preset time Select At a After a preset delay preset time e ANA PMI Your records will be masked at gt 11 00 pm Set Time 5 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change To automatically hide or mask your records after a period of inactivity 1 Select Automatic Preferences Security Password Auto Lock Handheld Show Private Records Mask Private Records Hide Private Records Done Automatic Help Select Automatic 437 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 2 Tap the Automatically pick list and select either Mask Private Records or Hide Public Records Security Options fi Options w Private Records Automatically Hide Private Records Whe Wee Select to mask or hide records Tap box 3 Tap When box 4 Select After a preset delay M
441. sktop software 2 From the User pop up menu select Edit Users 3 Click New Profile eee Users ma P Gi l is a an anh New Profil Edit Dekte i Name Kind amp dkajiyama user amp PalmUser user Shown with Mac OS X 4 Enter a unique name for the profile and click OK Enter name for new profile Cancel OK Shown with Mac OS X 5 Close the Users window 6 From the User pop up menu select the new profile 7 Create the data for the profile such as a company phone list 8 From the HotSync menu select Conduit Settings 9 Select the conduit settings for the profile For details see Customizing HotSync application settings earlier in this chapter 377 Chapter 21 Performing HotSync Operations Performing the first HotSync operation with a user profile After you create a user profile you are ready to transfer the information to the new handheld during the first HotSync operation To use a profile for a first time HotSync operation on a Windows computer 1 Place the new handheld in the cradle cable 2 Press the HotSync button on the cradle cable 3 Click Profiles Select the profile you want to load on the handheld and click OK A Install Profile 6 Installing a profile will overwrite all data currently on the handheld Are you sure you want to do this T Don t ask this question again 5 Click Yes to transfer all the profile dat
442. t from the cradle cable Once your handheld is setup and in daily use it requires about 15 to 30 minutes of charge time per day depending on usage To keep the battery fully charged we recommend placing your handheld in a cradle cable that is connected to a power source whenever you are not using it Step 3 Set up your handheld a Press the power button to turn on your handheld If your handheld did not turn on see Operating problems in Appendix B b Gently press the top of the stylus to release it from the slot and then remove it from the slot Step 4 Install software c Hold the stylus like you would a pen or pencil and use it to follow the onscreen directions Welcome The following screens will walk you through Setup which takes just a few minutes 1 Remove the stylus as shown 2 Use the stylus to tap anywhere to continue Step 4 Install software a Insert the Desktop Software CD ROM into your computer s CD ROM drive b Windows Follow the onscreen instructions which guide you through installing Palm Desktop software and entering your handheld business card information Mac Double click the Desktop Software CD ROM icon that appears on the desktop and then double click the Palm Desktop Installer icon NOTE You need administrator rights to install Palm Desktop software on a computer running Windows NT 2000 XP or Mac OS X Chapter 1 Setting Up Your Palm Tungsten T
443. t identifies the type of e mail and where you want the e mail stored For example a filter might read If the Subject Contains sales meeting Then get mail and move 280 Going beyond the basics to Sales When you use this filter to sort incoming e mail any e mail containing sales meetings in the subject line is filed in the Sales folder To pick list Select the message header field with the information contained in the edit line To From Subject cc Date Size For example you might select Date to download only messages that are less than a certain number of days old Contains pick list Select a filter action Contains Starts with Does NOT Contain Edit line Enter the text that must be found in the header field For example if you want to sort e mail with the subject Sales enter Sales If you enter more than one criteria separate each with a comma for example Sales New York Then get mail and Select the folder or mailbox into which you want your move to pick list filtered e mail to go You can also create a new folder for storing the incoming e mail Tap Edit Folders and then create a new folder or delete or rename existing ones 6 Tap OK The filter appears in the Filters list Filters Connected M 7 Quotes O 7 Sales EA Move Up Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the subject contains seminar Selected filters execute in the order in which the
444. t mode ShortCut Q Tap Done Editing a ShortCut After you create a ShortCut you can modify it at any time To edit a ShortCut 1 2 3 From the Personal Preferences list select Shortcuts Select the ShortCut you want to edit Tap Edit Make the changes you want Tap OK Tap Done 441 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Deleting a ShortCut If you no longer need a ShortCut you can delete it from the list of ShortCuts To delete a ShortCut 1 From the Personal Preferences list select Shortcuts 2 Select the ShortCut you want to delete 3 Tap Delete 4 Tap Yes 5 Tap Done 442 Maintaining Your Handheld This chapter provides information on the following Caring for your handheld Prolonging battery life Resetting your handheld Caring for your handheld Your handheld is designed to be rugged and reliable and to provide years of trouble free service Observe the following general tips when using your handheld Take care not to scratch the screen of your handheld Keep the screen clean When working with your handheld use the supplied stylus or plastic tipped pens intended for use with a touch sensitive screen Never use an actual pen or pencil or other sharp object on the surface of the handheld screen Your handheld is not waterproof and should not be exposed to rain or moisture Under extreme conditions water may enter the circuitry through the f
445. t one succeeded and downloaded two new messages the Reminders screen would first display the error message but would display the number of messages retrieved after the successful retrieval Reminders screen notifications are specific for each account For example if auto get fails for one account but succeeds in downloading new messages for a separate account the Reminders screen displays an error message for the first account and a message indicating the number of messages downloaded for the second account Auto get mail retries If the interval for scheduled auto get is set at Every 1 hour or less frequently and an auto get fails for any reason the VersaMail application continues attempting to retrieve e mail at 30 minute intervals until either the next scheduled auto get occurs or the end time for scheduled e mail retrieval is reached If the interval is set for more frequently than one hour and an auto get fails the VersaMail application waits until the next scheduled auto get 216 Getting sending and managing e mail Resource issues with auto get mail If you use the auto get mail feature you should be aware of the following potential resource constraints Decreased battery If youset the auto get interval for more frequently than once per life hour you may drain your handheld s battery charge more quickly and thus need to recharge the battery more frequently Increased monthly If your e mail service provider
446. t you can enter a smaller size The maximum message size that you can retrieve is 60KB for the body text and 2MB total including attachments 193 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software POP accounts IMAP accounts Sam IMAP Incoming Mail Options Incoming Mail Options Get unread mail ONLY Get unread mail ONLY O Delete messages on the O Delete messages on the server when they are server when they are deleted in VersaMail deleted in VersaMail Leave mail on server e g to view on desktop later Port Number 110 Port Number 143 O Use Secure Connection SSL O Use Secure Connection SSL Maximum Message Size 5 KB Maximum Message Size 5 KB 2 Tap Next Setting outgoing mail options Outgoing mail options are the same for POP and IMAP accounts To set outgoing mail options 1 Optional Enter or select any of the following Display Name Enter the name you want to appear on your outgoing messages such as Joe Smith Reply To Enter the e mail address that you want recipients to see and Address reply to on your e mail messages only if this is different from the e mail address from which you are sending the message For example if you are sending a message from me yahoo com but you want recipients to reply to me earthlink net enter the reply to address here Reply To Address makes it look as though the e mail came from the address you entered BCC Select the BCC
447. tSync Manager later in this chapter for information You will not be able to synchronize e mail between your handheld and your desktop until you configure the account on your desktop To set up additional mail options tap Next Continue with the next set of procedures VersaMail Setup Tap Done to complete the setup of your Sam Sync account and then exit Tap Next to continue to set additional mail options Setting mail retrieval options for a POP or IMAP account The next VersaMail Setup screen displays different options depending on whether your mail service uses a POP or an IMAP protocol 192 Setting up and managing e mail accounts To set mail retrieval server options for a POP or IMAP account 1 Optional Select any of the following Get unread mail Delete messages on server Leave mail on server POP account only Port Number Use Secure Connection Maximum Message Size NOTE The POP protocol does not support retrieval of unread mail only from the server If you have a POP e mail account the VersaMail application downloads all messages from the server regardless of whether you have read them for example on your desktop or on the web and regardless of whether this check box is selected For IMAP accounts select Get unread mail ONLY to download only unread mail to your handheld If you don t choose this option and you tap Get amp Send all of your e mail messages on your provide
448. tails you want to change TIP You can also use the navigator to open an Address entry See Using the ce navigator in Chapter 2 for instructions 2 Tap Edit 3 Tap Details Address Entry Details Showin List w Work Category w Unfiled Private O 4 Select any of the following settings Show in List Select which type of phone or other information appears in the Address list screen Your options are Work Home Fax Other E mail Main Pager and Mobile The identifying letters W H F O M or P appear next to the record in the Address list depending on which information is displayed If you select E mail no identifying letter is displayed Category Assign the entry to a category Private Hide this entry when Security is turned on See Sounds amp Alerts Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information 80 Creating an Address Book entry Making connections from Address Book You can use the entries in your Address Book to launch applications that perform tasks such as dialing a phone number or creating an e mail or SMS message Some of the applications you can launch are included on your handheld others on the Software Essentials CD ROM that comes with your handheld and yet others may be available from third party developers and are sold separately Most of these applications require a Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phone or an optional modem accessory that is compatible with your h
449. takes advantage of this feature Tap the Menu icon Select Options and then select Phone Lookup Begin to spell the last name of the name you want to find The list scrolls to the first record in the list that starts with the first letter you enter Continue to spell the name you re looking for or when you see the name tap it Phone Number Lookup Abrams Liz 650 454 6121 Adams Ben 408 772 1900 Beckman Rachel 510 532 0746 Bertolli Marcus 213 422 1363 Bruce Jeremy 408 459 1279 Butler Richard 516 626 1424 Cain Cath 650 235 6222 Carter Melanie 212 395 6277 W Chu Byron 213 343 9801 Conner Sandy 301 933 6833 W Tap Add 61 Chapter 4 Working with Applications The name you selected along with the information associated with it is pasted into the record you selected in step 1 Using Graffiti 2 commands with Phone Lookup Write the Graffiti 2 Command stroke L to activate the Phone Lookup feature You can also activate it in the following circumstances m While entering text For example to insert the full name and phone number for someone with the last name Williams write the Graffiti 2 characters for Wi and then the Phone Lookup Command stroke L If you have only one Address Book record that begins with Wi your handheld inserts the full name such as Fred Williams and its associated information If you have more than one name that begins with Wi the Phone Lookup screen a
450. tap B oth A message asks if you want to update the server now To delete the message from only the handheld now tap Handheld NOTE Many e mail providers such as Yahoo have size restrictions for mail storage If yo ur mailbox on the server becomes full messages are returned to the senders To have the trash emptied automatically 1 Tap the Menu icon tap Options and then select Preferences 2 Tap Advanced Preferences i General Advanced System Enable Smart Addressing Auto Empty Mail from Trash Older Than 1 Week Timeout 45 secs O Auto Disconnect amp Disconnect on Exit Modem Wait 0 secs By default Auto Empty Mail from Trash is selected and the time interval is set at Older Than 1 Week 3 Tap the pick list and select how often you want the e mail messages automatically emptied from the trash Immediately Older Than 1 Day Older Than 3 Days Older Than 1 Week Older Than 1 Month 4 Tap OK 255 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Marking messages as read or unread You can mark messages as read or unread When you tap a message to read it it is automatically marked as read To mark messages as read or unread 1 Tap the folders pick list and select the folder you want 2 Tap the icon next to the message you want to mark 3 Tap Mark Read or tap Mark Unread Speakeas 2 16 Inbox M Joe Sadusky 12 10p 4 out of offi
451. tasks Looking up Address Book records In Address Book you can use the Look Up line with the stylus or navigator to look up and quickly scroll to any of your Address Book entries To look up an Address Book record with the navigator 1 From the Address list screen press Right on the navigator to display the Quick Look Up line 2 Press Up and Down on the navigator to select the first letter of the name you want to find The list scrolls to the first entry that begins with that letter 3 Press Right on the navigator to move to the next letter box Address wv All Manzi Arthur 415 555 7775 W Mosich Donn donna example c Nguyen Mai 555 3434W Plasterer Michael 831 555 3792M Spear Midyne 831 555 7534M Srivinas Sanagala 954 555 1234H Taylor David 650 555 3434 W Venkat Raja raja anyisp com Weiss Chris 555 2367 W Weston Michelle 555 6338 W Quick Look Up line Look Up M A N it The Quick Look Up line displays only letters that are a possible match for that position For example in the screen shown here if you enter c in the first box only the letters a h and o appear in the second box If there is only one possible match for a particular position the highlight jumps to the next position 4 Press Up or Down on the navigator to select the next letter of the name you want to find The list then scrolls to the first entry that starts with those two letters For example selecting s scroll
452. ter 17 for more information Dial telephone numbers from your Address Book Use the Quick Connect and Tap to Connect features with a GSM mobile phone to dial directly from your Address Book See Making connections from Address Book in Chapter 5 for details 149 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link m Exchange SMS messages Use a Global System for Mobile Communications GSM phone carrier service to send and receive short text messages See Chapter 15 for more information m Use Palm Dialer to dial numbers on your phone Send telephone numbers from your handheld to your GSM mobile phone See Chapter 9 for more information m Perform wireless HotSync operations Use your mobile phone as a modem and synchronize data with your computer from anywhere within your mobile phone service area To use this feature your mobile phone service must include data services See Conducting modem HotSync operations in Chapter 21 for additional information A GSM mobile phone GSM network service data service high speed wireless data service and an ISP account with a dial up connection are not included with your handheld Setting up a phone connection To set up a phone connection you must configure connection information on your handheld If you want to connect to the Internet and send and receive e mail you must also configure the network service settings The Phone Link and Phone Link Updater applications guide you through this pro
453. th Bluetooth technology that Bluetooth is enabled and that the power is on 462 VersaMail problems My phone connection drops before I finish using it I get an error message when I try to dial a phone number using my handheld lida VersaMail problems Problem Iam having problems accessing my account m You need to increase the Idle timeout setting on the Network Preferences Details screen See Adding detailed information to a network service profile in Chapter 22 for instructions m Make sure that the proper phone driver is installed on your handheld See Updating the phone files on your handheld in Chapter 14 for instructions m You may need to go through the pairing process on both your handheld and your phone See Connection Preferences in Chapter 22 for information on completing the pairing process on your handheld See the documentation included with your phone for assistance with completing the pairing process on your phone m Check the Phone Preferences screen and make sure the correct phone connection is selected Solution Occasionally you may experience problems using an e mail account after you set it up Be sure to follow the account setup procedures in Chapter 17 If you followed the procedure and are experiencing problems using the account verify that the account complies with your e mail provider s requirements by following these steps m Verify both your password
454. the Account Setup screen the e mail address field is completed automatically based on the username and mail service you entered Check the address to verify that it is correct and edit it if necessary If you chose Other from the Mail Services pick list on the Account Setup screen enter the e mail address for your account Sam Yahoo Review your settings and edit if necessary Email Address E mail address will be filled in SamYahoo yahoo com automatically if you chose a Incoming Mail Server preconfigured mail service pop mail yahoo com Mail servers will be filled in automatically if the VersaMail application knows the names based on the mail service you chose Outgoing Mail Server smtp mail yahoo com 2 Enter the name of your incoming POP mail server such as pop mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the incoming mail server name based on the mail service you selected the correct server name is displayed 184 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Enter the name of your outgoing SMTP mail server such as smtp mail yahoo com If the VersaMail application knows the outgoing mail server name based on the mail service you selected the correct server name is displayed 4 Tap Next Do one of the following To accept these mail options and begin using the VersaMail application tap Done This takes you to the Inbox of the account you set up See Getting sending and manag
455. the Always connect using check box A pick list of available services appears The currently used connection is displayed by default Details i Get unread mail ONLY I Download Attachments Use Filters O Auto Disconnect Max Message Size 5 KB X Always connect using Service v WiFi 802 11b Tap to change the service connection for this e mail account only from your default handheld service connection 4 Select the connection you want to switch to from the Service pick list Details X Get unread mail ONLY X Downk AT amp T WorldNet Compuserve O Use Fil Earthlink O Auto I Psinet Max Mess Unix x 3 Untitled Select a new service connection w A M AlwayfUUNet for this e mail account only Servic Verio OK Ta WiFi 802 11b E Windows RAS 5 Tap OK and then tap OK again If there is an existing service connection it is disconnected and the new connection is initiated The VersaMail application sends and checks for any new e mail using the new connection When you exit the VersaMail application the new service disconnects unless you are using the default service for your handheld When you reopen the application the e mail account you selected My Earthlink in this example continues to connect using the new connection Earthlink GPRS in this example until you either select a new service or deselect the Always connect using check box If you deselect the Always connect using check box the e m
456. the Auto off after pick list 3 Select the setting you want to use for the automatic shutoff feature 30 seconds 1 minute 2 minutes or 3 minutes 4 Tap Done Stay on in Cradle You can choose to leave your handheld on when it is in the cradle cable so that you can continue to view your data By default your handheld remains on when it is in the cradle cable and is connected to a power source To change the cradle cable setting 1 From the General Preferences list select Power 2 Tap the Stay on in Cradle pick list 3 Select Off to turn off your handheld when it is in the cradle cable 4 Tap Done Beam Receive You can choose to turn off the Beam Receive feature This prohibits anyone from beaming information to your handheld It also results in a slight saving of battery power By default Beam Receive is enabled To turn off the Beam Receive feature 1 From the General Preferences list select Power 2 Tap the Beam Receive pick list 3 Select Off to disable receiving beamed information 4 Tap Done Power on when opened and Power off when closed You can choose to automatically turn your handheld on and off when you open and close the Graffiti 2 writing area By default your handheld turns on when you open it and remains on when you close it The Power off option is available only when the Power on when opened setting is active 385 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld To change the p
457. the default you cannot open URLs in e mail messages You can also tap an embedded e mail address to open a new message screen with the address in the To field Depending on whether the received message is displayed in HTML or plain text format URLs and e mail addresses will appear in slightly different forms as follows HTML URLs and e mail addresses appear as blue underlined text Plain text URLs appear as any text beginning with http or www You cannot view the page or file associated with a URL that does not begin with http or www in a plain text message E mail addresses appear in the form username mailservice com or other three letter extension such as net org and so on Inbox 4q 20315 gt El mA lt 1027 P From AndQA1 1 Tap underlined blue om eehentan 1 lt andga1 yahoo com gt iz i a lt jms510 hotmail com gt Subj HTML text in HTML e mail Subj cool site Date Mon Nov 18 2002 11 38 am Hey Size 297 bytes Check out this new website To joe jmswordsmith com Www myway com i 1 Tap text begi nning check out this site Talk to you soon with www or www futurefacing com html in text e mail vi a A Working with attachments You can easily download view and send attachments with e mail messages Downloading attachments to your handheld At times e mail contains attached files such as Microsoft Word or text files t
458. the first section of the IP address Each section must be a number from 0 to 255 3 Repeat step 2 for the second third and last sections of the Primary DNS field 4 Repeat steps 2 and 3 for the Secondary DNS field 5 Tap OK IP address Everyone who logs on to the Internet needs to have a unique identifier an IP address whether permanent or temporary Some networks dynamically assign a temporary IP address when clients log in You can use the IP Address field to indicate whether your network provides automatic dynamic temporary IP addressing If your IP address is permanently assigned you need to get that information from your system administrator If you are not sure select Automatic To identify dynamic IP addressing m Tap the IP Address check box to select it Details Connection type PPP Idle timeout w 1 Minute Query DNS Rf IP Address y Automatic Tap to select automatic IP address To enter a permanent IP address 1 Tap the IP Address check box to deselect it and to display a permanent IP address field below the check box 2 Tap the space to the left of the first period and then enter the first section of the IP address Each section must be a number from 0 to 255 3 Tap and enter the remaining sections of the IP address 4 Tap OK 415 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Login scripts A login script is a series of commands that automates logging in to a network
459. then tap OK Tap the Until box select the end time and then tap OK Tap the Days boxes to select the days when you want the wakeup feature to be active Tap OK Tap Done 393 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld Adding trusted devices When you create a trusted pair you enter an identical secret code on both devices This secret code is called a passkey The passkey enables you to create a list of Bluetooth devices from which you automatically accept communication If a device with a recognized passkey attempts to communicate with your handheld it bypasses the discovery and authentication process and automatically accepts the communication If a device without a recognized passkey attempts to communicate with your handheld it goes through the discovery and authentication process and you can choose to accept or reject the communication To add a trusted device 1 From the Communications Preferences list select Bluetooth 2 Tap Trusted Devices 3 Tap Add Device The discovery process begins and the discovery screens appear Trusted Devices i Bluetooth Discovery Searching for Bluetooth devices Add Device Tap here 4 When the Discovery Results screen appears select the device you want to add as a trusted device If the device you want to add as a trusted device does not appear on the discovery results list tap Find More Discovery Results Select a device Tap devic
460. ting area Draw numbers on RIGHT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Number Strokes Number Strokes 0 1 2 2 3 9 4 5 1 2 a 5 6 7 6 E 3 q Punctuation marks With Graffiti 2 writing you can create any punctuation mark that you can enter from a standard keyboard You can write the period and comma strokes on either side of the Graffiti 2 writing area You must write other punctuation marks on a 28 Using Graffiti 2 writing to enter data designated side of the Graffiti 2 writing area Punctuation marks that appear in the the following table must be written on the left letter side of the Graffiti 2 writing area Draw these marks on LEFT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Mark Stroke Mark Stroke Period Ampersand e amp amp Comma Carriage return S Apostrophe At Space Straight quotes T Question Tab 1 D e2 ERRIN 1 02 Punctuation marks that appear in the following table must be written on the right number side of the Graffiti 2 writing area Draw these marks on RIGHT side of Graffiti 2 writing area Mark Stroke Mark Stroke Period A Backslash x N C a Slash omm 3 F Tilde Left Paren i N C Dash Right Paren gt Plus Equal 1 4 Asterisk mix 29 Chapter 3 Entering Data on Your Handheld Accented characters When writing lette
461. tion After creating the folder continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders m Ifyou havea folder on your handheld that matches a folder on the mail server continue with the following procedures for synchronizing IMAP folders You can synchronize server folders either during a Get Mail operation or from a menu NOTE You can synchronize folders whose names are up to 16 characters in length You can synchronize up to 11 custom folders you create in addition to the default folders Inbox Outbox Drafts Sent and Trash To wirelessly synchronize handheld mail server IMAP folders during a Get Mail operation 1 From within an IMAP e mail account tap Get Mail 2 Select the Sync IMAP Folders check box and then tap OK Get Mail Options i Subjects Only X Sync IMAP Folders 3 Select the check box next to each folder you want to synchronize You can select more than one folder 300 Going beyond the basics 4 Optional The Subjects Only check box is selected or deselected based on the preference you set for getting mail Select or deselect the check box to change this preference for the IMAP e mail account only 5 Optional Select the Use Filters check box to apply any filters you have created to the IMAP e mail account See Managing mail filters later in this chapter for information 6 Tap OK To wirelessly synchronize handheld mail server IMAP folders from the Options menu
462. tion even if you do not open the message Auto get then starts at the next scheduled interval with the Reminders screen counter reset to 1 If you do not view the Inbox of the selected account and another scheduled e mail retrieval takes place and finds new messages the Reminders screen will add the number of new messages to the notification for that account For example if scheduled auto get 1 finds two new messages and before you view the Inbox scheduled auto get 2 takes place and finds three more new messages the Reminders screen notification indicates five new messages for that account 215 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software If auto get discovers new messages but then fails for any reason a notification appears in the Reminders screen displaying the account name and an error message 8 01am Reminders O Git 3s Speakeasy mail account Scheduled get failed You can tap the error message or open the VersaMail application to the given account for more detailed information on the failed auto get Auto Get Mail The last scheduled get failed You may wish to perform a manual get at your convenience timeout 0x1212 If auto get discovers no new messages for a given account no notifications appear in the Reminders screen for that account The Reminders screen displays only the most recent notification for a given account For example if one scheduled auto get failed but the nex
463. tion tap the Menu icon tap Edit and select Paste See Chapter 3 for more information on copying and pasting 296 Going beyond the basics Using the command bar The command bar provides shortcuts for performing numerous tasks The options presented on the command bar may change depending on which screen is displayed in the application For example if you are viewing a message in the Inbox the command bar gives you the option of quickly moving the message to another folder See Moving e mail between folders earlier in this chapter To access the command bar on your handheld m Enter the command bar stroke in the Graffiti 2 writing area For each type of screen the command bar offers various options View Options List Inbox Outbox and so on showing list of messages gt N Ep Reading a message Composing a message e Reading or composing a d message Select all messages Deselect all messages Change display font toggles between large and small font Delete messages from the handheld icon appears only if you have previously selected at least one message Empty the trash icon appears only if you have previously deleted at least one message Delete message from the handheld Move message to a different folder select folder from pick list Change display font toggles between large and small font Insert the symbol into a recipient s e mail address
464. to get mail with notification and Send retry earlier in this chapter for information Five way navigation in the VersaMail application The following table summarizes the controls for the 5 way navigator on your handheld that are specific to the VersaMail application See Chapter 3 for general navigator information View Selection Navigation Function Main List No message Up Down Scrolls between messages in list Inbox or selected other folder list Select Highlights the first message in the list Right No function 302 Going beyond the basics View Selection Navigation Function Left No function Message Select Opens messages for viewing selected Right Displays popup menu that normally appears when you click on the e mail icon for each message Left Deselects the highlighted message Compose N A Up Down In To cc bcc and Subject fields Tabs New Message to the next previous field In message body text Scrolls the text viewed on the text list Select No function Right In To cc bec and Subject fields Moves to the next character In message body text No function Left In To cc bec and Subject fields Moves to previous character In message body text No function Read N A Up Down Scrolls the message text Message Select Returns you to list view Right Displays the next message If you are viewing the last message returns you to the folder list view Left Displays the previous messa
465. to make private Tap Details Tap the Private check box Tap OK Hiding or masking your private records automatically You can set your handheld to automatically hide or mask your private records when any one of the following occur When you turn off the power At a time you specify m After a period of inactivity you specify To hide or mask your records when you turn your handheld off 1 Select Automatic Preferences Security Password Cu nnt Deter eras l neenl Show Private Records Mask Private Records Hide Private Records Done Automatic Help Select Automatic 435 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld 2 Tap the Automatically pick list and select either Mask Private Records or Hide Public Records Security Options Options w Private Records Automatically Hide Private Records Mask Private Records Select to mask or hide records Tap box 3 Tap When box 4 Select On power off Mask Records Automatically mask records On power off Select On power off After a preset delay Your private records will be masked when your handheld is turned off 5 Tap OK NOTE Turn off and then turn on your handheld to enable this change To automatically hide or mask records at a preset time 1 Select Automatic Preferences Security Password La cfssigned Auto Lock Handheld f Currant Deisarul nunl Show Private Records Ma
466. to the web page 2 Tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Mail URL in the Page menu Page y Open URL Pa Bookmark URL View Bookmarks i seseeaeseeseseesesneaesneseseaesssessaeeneaeeneaesseseeees i View Saved Pages ge Info Disconnect eet Googe seara a eeg cory a Advanced Search Preferences hd The e mail application opens 328 Bookmarking your favorite pages 4 Compose your mail message in the e mail application For more information on composing e mail messages in the VersaMail application see Chapter 17 5 Tap Send to send the e mail message Outbox to send the e mail message later or Cancel You are returned to Web Browser Pro and to the web page you were viewing Bookmarking your favorite pages When you read a printed book you place a bookmark at the page where you stopped reading so that you can remember where you stopped In the same way you can bookmark a web page for later reference A bookmark in Web Browser Pro doesn t store the actual page instead it stores a reference to the page s URL Adding a bookmark you would like to visit the current page again add a bookmark to the Bookmark ist To add a bookmark for the current page 1 Do one of the following Tap the Bookmark icon A Tap the Menu icon and then tap Bookmark URL from the Page menu 2 Optional Change the bookmark name URL or category Bookmark Page i Tap here to change the bookma
467. ts and the pick list in the upper right corner of the screen displays the name of the card 42 Switching between applications To open an application on an expansion card m Select the icon of the application that you want to open coat m lt v Diy Cord HardBall Switching between applications When working with any application select the Home icon or press an application button on your handheld to switch to another application Your handheld automatically saves your work in the current application and displays it when you return to that application You can also press and hold Select on the navigator to switch to the Applications Launcher at any time When you use an expansion card your handheld creates and displays a new category that matches the name of the expansion card You can easily switch between applications installed on your handheld and on the expansion card To switch to an expansion card 1 Tap the pick list in the upper right corner TIP You can also press and hold Select on the navigator to open the category pick list 2 Select the category item that matches the name of the expansion card coat lt v Diy Card HardBall 43 Chapter 4 Working with Applications Categorizing applications The category feature enables you to manage the number of application icons that appear onscreen in the Applications Launcher You can assign an application to a category and th
468. ttach files from the card to an e mail message you are sending The types of files you can attach from an expansion card include the following m Word docs a HTML files m JPG and GIF graphics files a MP3 and WAV audio files m Any other file type To attach a file from an expansion card 1 Insert the expansion card into the slot on your handheld 2 On the New Message screen tap the Menu icon 3 Tap Options 4 Tap Add Attachment Edit Ka ACIE Attachment sA Save To Drafts Address Lookup Go To Bottom 249 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 5 Tap the From pick list and select Files on Card Attachments i Handheld Type Gites ac books doc Attachments Four j to Enter Text txt 6 Tap the Type pick list and select the file type Attachments i __ Address vCard Handhelc Application pre Four Way Appointment vCal Downloat Database pdb Memo Text Attachi MSWord Only file types that correspond to the types of files on the card will be displayed on the list For example if the card contains only Word docs and Address Book entries only the file types doc and vCard will be listed You can select a particular file type or select All Files to view all files on the card 7 Tap the file that you want to attach and then tap Add Attachments i Type v AllfFiles ac books doc ac books 2 doc countrycode prc
469. u re not using it See Bluetooth Preferences in Chapter 22 for more information Minimize accessing the expansion card slot Moderate how often you access multimedia files such as MP3 files expansion card required sold separately and video files If the battery becomes low in the course of normal use an alert appears on the handheld screen describing the low battery condition If this alert appears perform a HotSync operation to back up your data then leave your handheld in the cradle cable to recharge the unit This helps prevent accidental data loss If the battery drains to the point where your handheld does not operate it stores your data safely for about a week In this case there is enough residual energy in the battery to store the data but not enough to turn on your handheld If your handheld does not turn on when you press the power button you should recharge the unit immediately The battery may not have enough residual energy to power the indicator light which is normally green when the battery is charging If your battery drains and you have the unit in an uncharged state for an extended period of time you can lose all your stored data There are no serviceable parts inside your handheld so do not attempt to open the unit If you ever dispose of your handheld please dispose of it without damaging the environment Take your handheld to your nearest environmental recycling center Resetting your
470. ucceeds on any attempt the message is moved to the Sent folder NOTE Automatic send retry occurs only if you tap Send to send the message manually It does not work if you tap Get amp Send 234 Getting sending and managing e mail To select automatic send retry m Tap Yes on the dialog box notifying you that manual send has failed Sending Mail The message could not be sent RequestURI COM Do you want to keep trying to send it in the background NOTE Automatic send retry is not supported for VPN or SSL connections or for accounts for which your ISP requires you to log in to the mail server before sending mail It is also not supported if you have configured the security preferences on your handheld to encrypt databases on the handheld Send retry notifications If automatic send retry fails after the third attempt a notification appears in the Reminders screen A separate notification appears for each e mail account for which a send retry has failed 10 16am Reminders O Gi CJ Sam Yahoo mail account Background send failed Tap the notification or open the account in the VersaMail application to view a detailed error message Get Mail Alert Q One or more messages could not be sent timeout 0x1212 Viewing the error message deletes the notification from the Reminders screen The Reminders screen shows only the most recent notification for a given e mail account no matter how many aut
471. uch as MultiMail SE or MultiMail Deluxe or used version 2 0 of the VersaMail application you can upgrade your e mail database for use with the VersaMail 2 5 application To upgrade an existing e mail database for use with the VersaMail application 1 Perform a HotSync operation with a user profile that contains the existing e mail database To do so press the HotSync button and then select a profile that contains an e mail database from the displayed list of users Selecta profile J Stone OK M Johnson New Cancel Users l Help 2 Tap the VersaMail icon amp in the Applications Launcher on your handheld 3 Tap Yes to accept the upgrade 178 Setting up and managing e mail accounts Setting up and managing e mail accounts With the VersaMail application you can access e mail accounts from providers such as Earthlink or Yahoo You may also access your corporate e mail with the appropriate mail server configuration See Using a corporate e mail account later in this chapter for more information You can add up to eight e mail accounts on your handheld by setting up a connection to an e mail service provider or synchronizing to a desktop e mail application For example if you have a Yahoo e mail account with POP access you can create a new account in the VersaMail application and name that new account Yahoo so that you can send and receive e mail on your handheld using your Yahoo acco
472. unt Account and connection types Two types of e mail accounts are supported m Network You can send and receive e mail directly to and from your handheld by connecting with an e mail service provider m Synchronize Only Windows computers only You can download view and manage e mail between the handheld and a desktop e mail application such as Microsoft Outlook by performing a HotSync operation using the cradle cable You can t send and receive messages wirelessly or with a modem for an account of this type Using a network account you can set up or access an e mail account using any of the following connection methods m Built in Bluetooth radio m PalmModem accessory sold separately m External modem sled sold separately m Infrared IR port on the handheld to infrared port on a mobile phone m Direct connection to a mobile phone by means of a physical cable m Handheld cradle connected to your desktop Windows users only 179 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software Network e mail account prerequisites Before you can set up a network e mail account you must do the following m Establish the e mail account with an e mail service provider Common providers include Internet service providers ISPs such as Earthlink and Prodigy A provider can also be a wireless GSM or GPRS carrier such as VoiceStream Cingular or Vodafone You may also use a corporate e mail account m Confi
473. ur handheld or on an expansion card Use Palm Photos to do the following Locate photos quickly with the Thumbnail and List views m Organize photos into albums m Play a slide show of your photos m Sort photos by name or date m View details for each photo m Keep track of your thoughts about a photo by entering notes m Exchange photos with other devices that use infrared or e mail communication m Use Palm Desktop software and HotSync technology to transfer photos to your handheld to copy and paste photos into popular computer applications and to send photos as e mail attachments or to other applications To open Palm Photos Palm Photos is available after the first time you HotSync your handheld 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select the Palm Photos icon Palm Photos opens to display the most recently viewed screen Viewing photos A record in Palm Photos is called a photo Photos can be a file that you transfer from your computer store on an expansion card or receive from another device This section covers how to view manage and exchange photos that are stored on your handheld or on an expansion card that is seated in the expansion slot For information on transferring photos from your computer see Installing files and add on applications in Chapter 4 and the online Help in Palm Desktop software You can use Palm Photos to view the following types of photos m JPG files BMP files 137 Chapter
474. ur handheld includes system defined categories such as All and Unfiled and user defined categories such as Business and Personal You cannot modify the system defined categories but you can rename and delete the user defined categories In addition you can create your own user defined categories You can have a maximum of 15 user defined categories in each application Address Book contains the QuickList user defined category in which you can store the names addresses and phone numbers you might need in emergencies doctor fire department lawyer and so on Expense contains two user defined categories New York and Paris to show how you might sort your expenses according to different business trips Palm Photos contains three user defined albums Vacation Friends and Family that you can use to organize your photos Palm Web Browser Pro allows you to save web pages and bookmarks in categories See Chapter 19 for details SMS has set categories you can place messages in Outbox Inbox Trash Archive and Draft The illustrations in this section come from Address Book but you can use these procedures in all the applications in which categories are available The only exception is that the steps for moving photos into albums is slightly different See Filing photos in albums in Chapter 13 for details 55 Chapter 4 Working with Applications To move a record into a category Select the record you want to
475. ure 165 188 195 202 attaching personal 237 258 SMAPI Simple MAPI 262 Smart Addressing turning on 233 using 232 SMS connecting to your mobile phone 159 creating messages 160 draft messages 164 icons 162 Inbox 162 menus 169 overview 159 preferences 167 169 sending and receiving messages 161 sending data from another application 166 signature 165 viewing messages 162 164 SMTP settings 289 Soft reset 445 484 Index Sorting applications 44 records 63 64 453 Sounds amp Alerts preferences 386 388 Sounds See Alarm and System sounds Speed of image downloading 336 SSL See Secure Sockets Layer Starting applications 42 Stopping a download 323 Stylus dragging with 17 pen stroke to activate a feature 422 tapping with 17 Sunday to start week 383 Symbols for currency 122 in Graffiti 2 writing 30 Synchronize only account creating 189 196 connection 179 Synchronizing an existing username 178 IMAP folders 300 Synchronizing e mail 276 277 account information screens 271 active accounts 277 e mail applications for 262 HotSync operation 261 logging errors 260 setting how many days 265 shortcuts 272 SSL and 278 synchronizing multiple accounts 278 turn off synchronization 277 System conduit 354 sounds 387 T Tab delimited files importing data from 38 Tapping 17 TCP IP 404 419 TDA To Do List archive file 38 Technical Support 449 465 Text copying 52 copying and pasting in e mail 296 cutting 52 entr
476. urrency pick list in the Receipt Details dialog box and then select Edit currencies Receipt Details Category w Untiled Type oo Lunch Payment Unfiled Currency j DM Attendees Edit currencies Select Currencies Select the currencies that display in currency list Currency 1 w United States Currency 2 w EU Euro Tap Edit currencies Currency 3 w United Kingdom Currency 4 w Germany Currency 5 w None 2 Tap each Currency pick list and select the country whose currency you want to display on that line 3 Tap OK to close the Select Currencies dialog box 4 Tap OK 122 Customizing the Currency pick list Changing the default currency You can select which currency appears by default when you re entering Expense items You can override this setting when entering individual expense items To change your default currency 1 2 3 6 Open Expense Tap the Menu icon Select Options and then select Preferences Tap the Default Currency pick list Tap the currency symbol you want to appear in Expense Preferences a E Use automatic fill when entering data Default Currenc E DM Edit currencies Tap OK Defining a custom currency symbol If the currency you want to use is not in the list of countries you can create your own custom country and currency symbol To define a custom currency symbol 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Se
477. used Phone Link to create the connection or the name you assigned to the high speed wireless data network or LAN access point connection when you created it If you selected a Bluetooth phone connection in step 4 tap Phone and enter the dial up connection number for your ISP and then tap OK See Adding telephone settings earlier in this chapter for details If you are using a Bluetooth Phone or LAN access point you can now connect and disconnect as described earlier in this chapter If you are using a high speed wireless data network connection you must send an initialization INIT string as described in the following procedure 411 Chapter 22 Setting Preferences for Your Handheld To enter an INIT string for a high speed wireless data network connection 1 After completing step 5 in the preceding procedure tap Details Details Connection type w PPP Idle timeout w 1 Minute Query DNS Y IP Address Mf Automatic 2 Tap Script Log in Script i 3 Tap End to expand the pick list and then tap Send Log in Script Li Wait For Wait For Prompt Tap here to send INIT string 412 Setting Communication Preferences 4 In the Send field enter the INIT string provided by your wireless operator Log in Script i Enter INIT string here 5 Tap OK High speed wireless data network services are not available in all locations If you pass from an area with coverage into one w
478. uses a host or in other words proxy server to access the Internet You can change your host server IMPORTANT You should not change this setting from its default webpro palm com unless you are told to do so by your system administrator To access a new host server 1 Tap the Menu icon 2 Tap Options and then tap Preferences 3 Tap Advanced Preferences i Advanced Host Address _ M Accept cookies M Enable JavaScript O Clear cache on exit Max cache size 1024 k Cache used sd 4 Tap the Host Address field Host Address D Host Address 5 Enter the Internet Protocol IP address or host name of the new server NOTE If you enter the IP address of the new server make sure you enter the address exactly including periods 6 Tap OK to save your changes 7 Tap OK 341 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro 342 amp Using World Clock World Clock enables you to view the current time and date in multiple locations and to set an alarm Use World Clock to do the following View the current time and date in three locations Open a preferences screen where you can set the time and date for all the applications on your handheld Set an alarm Set Daylight Saving options To open World Clock 1 2 Select the World Clock icon amp Tap the Home icon TIP You can also open World Clock by tapping the Clock icon in the upper left corner of the Graffiti 2
479. using Outlook m 1 Lotus Notes account 5 combined direct POP or direct IMAP accounts If you attempt to synchronize more than the limit for a particular type of account during a HotSync operation you will receive an alert prompting you to deactivate any accounts over the allowed number Using SSL with the conduit When you set up an e mail account you can choose to use a secure connection Secure Sockets Layer or SSL for sending and receiving e mail messages The Palm VersaMail HotSync Conduit supports SSL when synchronizing with an e mail account only if that account uses one of the following desktop e mail applications mail clients a Outlook m Outlook Express m Eudora The conduit does not support SSL for accounts set up as direct POP or direct IMAP or for Microsoft Exchange or Lotus Notes accounts Going beyond the basics Many of the VersaMail application features such as getting and sending e mail you use daily Other features are used less frequently but are especially valuable in certain situations For example filtering e mail is helpful if you are traveling and want to receive messages only from certain people or about specific subjects Filters and other special features are discussed in this chapter This section describes the following m Creating and using filters to determine which e mail you actually view m Managing mail settings m Adding APOP to an account 278 Going beyond the basics m Adding
480. ustom silent All Off System Sound High Game Sound High Alarm Sound v High Alarm LED On Alarm Vibrate Off 4 Tap the Alarm Vibrate pick list and select On or Off 5 Tap Done Writing Area Preferences Writing Area Preferences offer you the option of using the full screen to enter Graffiti 2 characters When Writing Area Preferences are turned on and active you can write letters anywhere on the left side of the screen write numbers anywhere on the right side of the screen and write capital letters across the imaginary division line in the middle of the screen You access buttons and other controls that appear on the screen by tapping and holding the control until it activates To turn Writing Area Preferences on and off 1 From the General Preferences list select Writing Area Preferences Writing Area Write anywhere on screen M Show pen strokes Write Graffiti 2 letters B on the left side of the screen and numbers on the right 2 Tap On or Off 3 If you selected On in the previous step select the Show penstrokes check box to display penstrokes while writing or deselect this check box to hide penstrokes 4 Tap Done See Full screen writing area in Chapter 3 for details on using full screen writing to enter data 388 Setting Communication Preferences Setting Communication Preferences The Communication Preferences category enables you to access screens where you
481. ve Accounts Occurs on next HotSync only Available Accounts 5 Configured Accounts 2 Active Accounts 1 6 Optional Select the check box Enable Informational Logging if you want the HotSync log to record information such as errors encountered about the conduit during a HotSync operation 7 Optional Select the check box Set Selection As Default to make the current settings the default settings for all accounts 260 Synchronizing e mail between the handheld and the desktop Setting synchronization options and account settings Next you must configure each e mail account s general synchronization settings For example if you created an Earthlink e mail account on the handheld and want to synchronize that with the desktop set the synchronization options for the Earthlink account During a HotSync operation the Earthlink account on the handheld and the e mail application specified in the conduit are synchronized To configure an account and set the synchronization options 1 Onthe VersaMail Configuration For User screen click the plus sign to the left of the account you want to configure VersaMail Configuration For User Joe Sadusky foe Samisiy z lf ls Ba Attachment Conversion Mail Client Syne Setup vanced Sync Options E Handheld Settings Speakeasy Attachment Conversion 261 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software
482. ve files dba 38 changing event time 99 changing event to untimed 99 conduit for synchronizing 354 conflicting events 107 continuous events 101 103 creating records 50 96 99 Day view 103 deleting records 52 display options 108 end time for Day view 109 fonts 66 menus 107 Month view 105 notes for records 65 opening 95 overview 95 private records 435 purging records 54 repeating events 53 101 103 scheduling events 95 99 selecting dates 97 start time for Day view 109 Sunday or Monday to start week 383 switching views 103 untimed events 96 98 viewing appointment reminders 215 Week view 104 383 453 Day Date Book view 96 109 Daylight Saving options 348 settings 347 DBA Date Book archive file 38 Decimal point 383 Default categories 44 55 currency in Expense 123 Deleted data saving in archive files 53 Deleting applications 75 bookmarks 330 Desktop software 75 e mail 251 254 289 filters 283 Graffiti 2 characters 26 mail in the trash 254 old messages 253 passwords 426 records 52 saved web pages 333 474 Index service templates 418 text 52 See also Purging records Desktop software displaying euro 125 linking to external files 39 375 removing 76 saving deleted data in archive file 53 Device assigning name 390 enabling disabling the user cache 397 types with which you can connect 389 Digitizer 17 382 calibrating your handheld 17 preferences 382 Disabling autofill 337 cookies 337 JavaScript
483. ve ma Advanced Outgoing 292 Going beyond the basics 8 Select the Use APOP check box Mail Servers i Options v Advanced Incoming PortNumber 110 O Use Secure Connection SSL lt Use APOP 9 Tap OK Adding ESMTP to an account Some services require ESMTP authentication to validate your username and password on a given SMTP server If you aren t sure if your ISP or web e mail provider supports ESMTP check with your e mail provider To edit an account and add ESMTP 1 In your Inbox or another folder screen tap the Menu icon 2 Select Options 3 Select Mail Servers CENT Accounts Preferences R Display Options ee ee el Auto Get Mail All e mail accounts Aco appear in the list Password i O Always connect using 5 Tap the name of the account you want to change and then tap OK 293 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software 6 In the Server Settings screen tap Details 7 Tap the Options pick list and select Advanced Outgoing Mail Servers i Options Address Servers Port Number Incoming Mail Outgoing Mail Advanced Incoming O My serve EON authentication LESM IF 8 Select the My server requires authentication ESMTP check box if the outgoing server SMTP requires authentication Check with your system administrator before selecting this option If you select this option username and password fields appear The
484. w e mail message you can enter the person s e mail address or use the Lookup screen to find a particular address To create a new e mail message 1 Tap New 0 0 w Inbox New Yoo Hew Send Outbox Drafts Cancel 2 Enter the recipient s name using one of the methods described in the next procedures 229 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software NOTE When you address a message to several recipients you do not see all the recipients on the To list because the list is truncated on the To line If you tap the To field a dialog box shows all recipients for the current message Addressing a message by typing the address You can address a message by entering the complete address To enter the address 1 Inthe New Message screen tap or navigate to the To field and enter the address and then tap Done New Message Send Catbox rates Cana For multiple recipients type a semicolon and then a space between recipient names The To field expands to two lines during address entry for addresses longer than the one line display After address entry addresses longer than one line are shown on a single line with an ellipsis symbol to the right of the address line Ellipsis indicates address is longer than one line New Message Send Gatbox rates Cana 230 Getting sending and managing e mail Alternately in t
485. wn Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to select the photo TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the 4 Tap Beam 5 Point the IR port on your handheld at the IR port on the receiving device See Beaming tips in Chapter 3 for additional information on beaming data 145 Chapter 13 Using Palm Photos Deleting photos If you no longer want a photo on your handheld or expansion card you can delete the photo To delete photos 1 2 Tap the Menu icon Select Photo and then select Delete Delete Tap to select photos pr ee p rie Delete Photo Do you want to delete Eid xp xem these photos from your yar handheld m s N y v Tap Delete Tap the photo s you want to delete An X sign appears next to the photo s you select TIP You can also select a photo with the navigator Press Select on the navigator to insert the highlight press Up Down Right or Left to highlight a specific photo and then press Select to view the photo Tap Delete When the confirmation dialog box appears tap Delete Working with photos on your computer After you copy photos onto your handheld and perform a HotSync operation Palm Desktop software enables you to do any of the following on your Windows computer See the Palm Desktop software online Help for details View photos in various formats List Thumbnails Details and Edit
486. writing area and then tapping Go to Clock or when your handheld is off you can press Select on the navigator and then tap Go to Clock cars Ss Palo Alto Gor 10 31 pm Sat Dec 6 2003 v Tokyo v London 3 31 pm 6 31 am Sun Dec 7 Sun Dec 7 Set Date amp Time 343 Chapter 20 Using World Clock Viewing the time There are several ways for you to easily check the current time and date To view the time Do one of the following m When your handheld is on tap the Clock icon in the upper left corner of the Graffiti 2 writing area Your handheld displays the time for two seconds and then returns to the previous application m When your handheld is off press Select on the navigator Your handheld turns on displays the time and then turns off after a few seconds m Tap the Home icon and then select the World Clock icon amp Setting the primary location You can use World Clock to select the location date and time for the primary location Keep in mind that the primary location settings are also your system date and time and that these settings are used by all the applications on your handheld The primary Location settings also appear in the Date amp Time Preferences screen Similarly if you change the settings in the Date amp Time Preferences screen those settings become your system date and time and also appear under the primary location in World Clock The primary Location settin
487. x appears Network Service Do you want to setup your handheld to connect to the Internet and send email 11 Tap Yes and then follow the instructions in the next section to set up network services for your phone Configuring network service settings for your phone If you want to use your handheld to connect to the Internet and to send and receive e mail you must configure network service settings for your phone To connect to the Internet your mobile phone carrier must support data services and you must also have one of the following m Access to a GPRS high speed wireless data service network a A dial up account with an ISP m Dial up or Bluetooth access to a corporate network with Internet access 153 Chapter 14 Using Phone Link To configure a GPRS high speed wireless data service connection for your phone 1 After completing step 11 in the preceding procedure tap Next on the Network Service Setup screen If you do not see the Network Service Setup screen tap the Home icon O select the Phone Link icon amp and then tap the Network Service box Network Service Setup amp This guide will help you set up a network service to connect to the Internet and use e mail 2 Tap Yes when asked if you subscribe to a high speed data service Network Service Setup Do you subscribe to high speed data service GPRS from your carrier Yes Cancel Previous Next 3 Tap Next 4 Tap the Se
488. y See Entering data files importing data from 38 39 fonts for 66 selecting all 52 size setting in Web Browser Pro 334 Thousands separator 383 Time alarm setting 100 Daylight Saving settings and options 347 348 format 383 setting current 345 382 setting event 96 start and end for Date Book Day view 109 Time Zone 347 Tips online 19 To Do List adding Address Book data to records 61 62 archive files tda 38 categorizing records 55 175 checking off items 173 completed items 175 completion date 175 conduit for synchronizing 354 creating records 50 deleting records 52 102 due date 174 175 fonts 66 menus 176 notes for records 65 opening 171 overview 171 prioritizing records 172 175 private records 435 purging records 54 175 sorting records 63 viewing task reminders 215 To field 231 Today See Current date Transmitting data See Beaming information and Sending data using Bluetooth communication Trash 164 automatically emptying 255 creating other folders 228 emptying deleted e mail 254 255 setting frequency in preferences 255 485 Index Troubleshooting 459 Trusted devices adding trusted devices 394 395 Trusted pairs creating 402 Turning off handheld automatically 385 pen stroke for 423 problems with 451 Turning on handheld displaying owner s name 424 power button 13 problems with 451 U Undoing actions 52 Uniform Resource Locator See URL ninstalling Desktop software 75 niversal connector 14
489. y appear on the list Move filters up and down the list to ensure that they execute in the correct order NOTE Filters created on the handheld also apply to e mail synchronization See Synchronizing an account earlier in this chapter for more information Turning filters on and off By default a filter that is turned on or selected affects all subsequent downloads of e mail until you deselect it More than one filter can be in effect at once Before you download e mail be sure to turn on the filters you want and turn off those you don t want 281 Chapter 17 Using Palm VersaMail Personal E mail Software To turn a filter on or off 1 Tap the Menu icon O 2 Select Options and then select Filters The Filters dialog box appears with the filters you created Filters Connected M 7 Quotes Filters with a checkmark are O 7 Sales turned on M 7 Seminar Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the subject contains seminar 3 Tap the pick list in the upper left corner and select Connected or Synchronize Filters Moer rmn i O 7 Sales M 7 Seminar Retrieve mail if the sender address contains onlinebroker OR the subject contains seminar Connected applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld over a modem or network connection Synchronize applies a filter to messages downloaded to your handheld during a HotSync operation 4 Tap th
490. you want tap OK Download Are you sure you want to download this file File SolitaireFree Size 35k 3 A message is displayed showing you the progress of the download Download File SolitaireFree Size 35k 63 4 When the file download is complete a message is displayed Download D Download was successful File SolitaireFree Size 35k 5 Tap OK If you decide that the download process is taking too long you can stop it To stop a web page from downloading Tap the Stop icon 3 in the Web Browser Pro action bar To stop a file from downloading m Tap Cancel in the Download dialog box You can make changes to improve the download speed such as not downloading images that appear on web pages See Changing how images are downloaded 323 Chapter 19 Using Web Browser Pro Refreshing a page Some web pages such as news sites change frequently If you visit a page and spend several minutes reading an article the web site may change during that time To make sure you have the latest content refresh the page To refresh a page m Tap the Refresh icon You can also view old content instead of accessing the Internet See Controlling how Web Browser Pro accesses the Internet Web Browser Pro lets you know you re looking at old content by displaying a dialog box when you open the web page Existing Content Q This page has been viewed previously Last viewed
491. you with a place to take notes that are not associated with records in Date Book Address Book or To Do List The number of memos you can store depends only on the memory available on your handheld Use Memo Pad to do the following m Use Graffiti 2 characters to store memos lists or any other text message on your handheld m Send memos to popular computer applications like Microsoft Word when you synchronize using Palm Desktop software and HotSync technology m Assign memos to categories so that you can organize and view them in logical groups a Write down phone numbers and other types of information that you can later copy and paste into other applications To open Memo Pad 1 Tap the Home icon 2 Select the Memo Pad icon amp Creating memos A record in Memo Pad is called a memo You can assign memos to categories and mark them private as described in Chapter 4 This section covers how to create a memo 127 Chapter 11 Using Memo Pad To create a new memo 1 Open Memo Pad 2 Tap New Memo v All d of gt i Unfiled 1 11722 Meeting minutes 2 Directions to Moscone Center 3 Plans for conference 4 Priorities on new project 5 To discuss Jose Ribera Tap New t TIP Inthe Memo list screen you can also begin writing in the Graffiti 2 writing area to create a new memo The first letter is automatically capitalized and begins your new memo 3 Enter the text you w
492. your computer Make sure the user name you selected in Palm Desktop software matches the user name assigned to your handheld Make sure the date on your computer matches the date on your handheld Read the HotSync Log for the user account for which you are performing a HotSync operation On a Windows computer try each step in turn Make sure that HotSync Manager is running If it is running close it and restart it Make sure you selected Local USB or Local Serial as appropriate from the HotSync Manager menu If you are using the serial cradle cable make sure you selected the correct serial port on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box It should be set to the port where you connected the HotSync cradle cable If you are using the serial cradle cable try a lower baud rate setting on the Local tab in the Setup dialog box If you are using the serial cradle cable make sure you aren t running a program such as America Online that uses the serial port you selected in the Setup dialog box On a Mac computer try each step in turn Make sure HotSync Manager is enabled on the HotSync Controls tab in the HotSync Software Setup window If you are using the optional serial cradle cable double click the HotSync Manager icon in the Palm folder and then click the Connection Settings tab Make sure the port selection matches the port where your HotSync cradle cable is attached If you are using the optional serial cradle cab

Download Pdf Manuals

image

Related Search

Related Contents

T668C-(RGB) R82 RF LED Controller User Manual  1000E - Cleveland Time Clock  Installationshandbuch RMP60  ÉTIQUETAGE DES DENRÉES ALIMENTAIRES  Beer Wizard Menu Board User Manual  Sony CDX-454XRF User's Manual  Artisan Technology Group is your source for quality new and    User Manual - Witura Technology Sdn Bhd  6 - Smartcaisse  

Copyright © All rights reserved.
Failed to retrieve file